Bachelor of
HEALTH SCIENCE (Audiology/Biomedicine/
Dietetics/Environmental and
Occupational Health/Exercise
and Sports Science/Medical
Radiation/Nursing/Nutrition/
Speech Pathology)
SCIENCE (Forensic
Science) Diploma in
NURSING
Academic Session
2017/2018
Bachelor of
Health Science (Audiology/Biomedicine/
Dietetics/Environmental and
Occupational Health/Exercise
and Sports Science/Medical
Radiation/Nursing/Nutrition/
Speech Pathology)
Science (Forensic Science) Diploma in
Nursing
Academic Session 2017/2018
i
USM Vision
Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow
USM Mission
USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university
that empowers future talents and enables the bottom billions
to transform their socio-economic well-being
ii
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
Full Name
Identity Card (IC)/Passport No.
Current Address
Permanent Address
E-mail Address
Telephone No. (Residence)
Mobile Phone No. (if applicable)
School
Programme of Study
iii
CONTENT
PAGE
I.
VISION AND MISSION
i
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
CONTENT
ACADEMIC CALENDAR
SCHOOL MAIN ADMINISTRATIVES
SCHOOL STAFF LIST
ii
iii
iv
v
vi - xiii
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1 - 2
2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION 3 - 25
3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS 26 - 36
4.0 COURSES AND PROGRAMMES OFFERED IN SCHOOL
OF HEALTH SCIENCES
37 - 42
5.0 MAJOR PROGRAMMES 43 - 88
5.1. Audiology …………………………………………….. 43 - 47
5.2. Biomedicine …………………………………………….……. 48 - 51
5.3. Dietetics ………………………………………………….. 52 - 55
5.4. Environmental and Occupational Health ……………………. 56 - 60
5.5. Exercise and Sports Science ………………………………. 61 - 64
5.6. Medical Radiation…………….…………………………… 65 - 68
5.7. Nursing………………………………………………… 69 - 73
5.8. Nutrition ………………………………………………. 74 - 77
5.9. Speech Pathology…………………………………………….. 78 - 83
5.10. Forensic Science………………………...….……….... 84 - 88
6.0 COURSES SYNOPSIS 89 - 209
6.1. Foundation Courses (GTU)…………………………….. 89 - 95
6.2. Core Courses Level 100.............……………….……… 96 - 110
6.3. Core Courses Level 200 …………...................………. 111 - 143
6.4. Core Courses Level 300 ………………….................... 144 - 183
6.5. Core Courses Level 400 ……………………………….. 184 - 209
7.0 ELECTIVE COURSES 210 - 222
8.0 FACILITIES 223
9.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 224 - 229
9.1. Career Guidance ………………………………………… 224 - 228
9.2. Prizes, Awards and Dean's List ………….…………….. 229
9.3. Society …………….….………………………………… 229
9.4. Postgraduate Programmes…………………….…………. 229
9.5. Overseas Training Scheme …………………………….. 229
10.0
11.0
12.0
DIPLOMA OF NURSING
INDEX...........................................................................................
STUDENTS’ FEEDBACK...........................................................
230 - 273
274 - 286
287
iv
ACADEMIC CALENDAR - ACADEMIC SESSION 2017/2018
FOR ALL SCHOOLS (EXCEPT THE SCHOOL OF MEDICAL SCIENCES AND SCHOOL OF DENTAL SCIENCES)
*Registration for New Students (3 September 2017) / Orientation Week 3-10 September 2017
SEM WEEK ACTIVITY DATE REMARKS
ON
E
1
Teaching & Learning Period
(T&LP - 5 Weeks)
Sunday, 10.09.2017 - Thursday, 14.09.2017 01 & 02.09.2017, Friday & Saturday - Eid-ul adha
2 Sunday, 17.09.2017 - Thursday, 21.09.2017 09.09.2017, Saturday - Agong’s Birthday
3 Sunday, 24.09.2017 - Thursday, 28.09.2017 16.09.2017, Saturday - Malaysia Day 22.09.2017, Thursday - Maal Hijrah 1439
4 Sunday,, 01.10.2017 - Thursday, 05.10.2017
5 Sunday, 08.10.2017 - Thursday, 1210.2017
6 Mid Semester Break Friday, 13.10.2017 - Saturday, 21.10.2017 18.10.2017, Wednesday - Deepavali**
7
Teaching & Learning Period
(T&LP - 9 Weeks)
Sunday, 22.10.2017 - Thursday, 26.10.2017
8 Sunday, 29.10.2017 - Thursday, 02.11.2017
9 Sunday, 05.11.2017 - Thursday, 09.11.2017
10 Sunday, 12.11.2017 - Thursday, 16.11.2017
11 Sunday, 19.11.2017 - Thursday, 23.11.2017
12 Sunday, 26.11.2017 - Thursday, 30.11.2017 01.12.2017, Friday - Prophet Muhammad’s Birthday
13 Sunday, 03.12.2017 - Thursday, 07.12.2017
14 Sunday, 10.12.2017 - Thursday, 14.12.2017
15 Sunday, 17.12.2017 - Thursday, 21.12.2017
16 Revision Week Friday, 22.12.2017 - Saturday, 30.12.2017 25.12.2017, Monday - Christmas
17 Examinations
(3 Weeks)
Sunday, 31.12.2017 - Thursday, 04.01.2018 01.01.2018, Monday - New Year 2018 18 Sunday, 07.01.2018 - Thursday, 11.01.2018
19 Sunday, 14.01.2018 - Thursday, 18.01.2018
20 Mid Semester Break
(3 Weeks)
,
21 Friday, 19.01.2018 - Saturday, 10.02.2018 31.01.2018,. Wednesday- Thaipusam**
22 ,
TWO
1/23
Teaching & Learning Period
(T&LP - 7 Weeks)
Sunday, 11.02.2018 - Thursday, 15.02.2018 16 & 17.02.2018, Friday & Saturday - Chinese New Year 2/24 Sunday, 18.02.2018 - Thursday, 22.02.2018
3/25 Sunday, 25.02.2018 - Thursday, 01.03.2018
4/26 Sunday, 04.03.2018 - Thursday, 08.03.2018
5/27 Sunday, 11.03.2018 - Thursday, 15.03.2018
6/28 Sunday, 18.03.2018 - Thursday, 22.03.2018
7/29 Sunday, 25.03.2018 - Thursday, 29.03.2018
8/30 Mid Semester Break Friday, 30.03.2018 - Saturday, 07.04.2018
9/31
Teaching & Learning Period
(T&LP – 7 Weeks)
Sunday, 08.04.2018 - Thursday, 12.04.2018
10/32 Sunday, 15.04.2018 - Thursday, 19.04.2018
11/33 Sunday, 22.04.2018 - Thursday, 26.04.2018
12/34 Sunday, 29.04.2018 - Thursday, 03.05.2018 01.05.2018, Tuesday - Labour Day
13/35 Sunday, 06.05.2018 - Thursday, 10.05.2018
14/36 Sunday, 13.05.2018 - Thursday, 17.05.2018
15/37 Sunday, 20.05.2018 - Thursday, 24.05.2018 EXAMINATIONS START ON 23.05.2018 - 13.06.2018
16/38
Examinations (3 Weeks)
29.05.2018, Tuesday - Wesak Day
17/39 Wednesday, 23.05.2018 - Friday, 13.06.2018 02.06.2018, Saturday - Nuzul Al-Quran
18/40 15 & 16.06.2018, Friday & Saturday - Eid-ul fitr**
*KSC
P
19/41 Sunday, 17.06.2018 - Thursday, 21.06.2018
20/42 Sunday, 24.06.2018 - Thursday, 28.06.2018
21/43 Long Vacation/ Industrial Training/ KSCP* (11 Weeks)
Sunday, 01.07.2018 - Thursday, 05.07.2018 07.07.2018, Saturday - Penang Heritage & Penang Governor’s Birthday
22/44 *T&LP
Sunday, 08.07.2018 - Thursday, 12.07.2018
23/45 Sunday, 15.07.2018 - Thursday, 19.07.2018
24/46 *Examination Sunday, 22.07.2018 - Thursday, 26.07.2018
25/47 Sunday, 29.07.2018 - Thursday, 02.08.2018 28.07.2018, Saturday - Agong’s Birthday 26/48 Sunday, 05.08.2018 - Thursday, 09.08.2018
27/49 Sunday, 12.08.2018 - Thursday, 16.08.2018
28/50 Sunday, 19.08.2018 - Thursday, 23.08.2018 22.08.2018, Wednesday-Eid-ul-adha**
29/51 Sunday, 26.08.2018 - Thursday, 30.08.2018 31.08.2018, Friday - National Day
*Courses during the Long Vacation (KSCP) **This Academic Calendar is subject to change
vi
SCHOOL STAFF LIST
Tel: 609-767 7509/7510/7516/7517/7518/7519/7520 Fax: 609-7677515
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Professor Dr. Norazmi
Mohd. Nor
Dean/Lecturer 7500/7784 [email protected]
2. Professor Dr. Wan Rosli
Wan Ishak @ Wan
Ahmad
Deputy Dean
(Academic, Students
Affairs & Alumni)
/Lecturer
7502/7783 [email protected]
3. Associate Professor
Dr. Lim Boon Huat
Deputy Dean
(Postgraduate
Studies, Industry-
Community Network
and International
Affair)/Lecturer
7501/7779 [email protected]
4. Associate Professor
Dr. Rapeah Suppian
Deputy Dean
(Research &
Innovation) /Lecturer
7782/7613 [email protected]
AUDIOLOGY AND SPEECH PATHOLOGY PROGRAMMES
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Dr. Mohd Normani
Zakaria
Programme
Chairman/Lecturer
7646 [email protected]
2. Dr. Affizal Ahmad Lecturer 7595 [email protected]
3. Dr. Nik Adilah Nik
Othman
Medical Lecturer 7571 [email protected]
4. Dr. Nik Fariza Husna
Nik Hassan
Medical Lecturer 7805 [email protected]
5. Dr. Wan Najibah Wan
Mohamad
Lecturer 7824 wannajibahwanmoham
6. Dr. Zuraida Zainun Medical Lecturer 7559 [email protected]
7. Mr. Khairy Anuar Mohd
Khairuddin
Lecturer 7614 [email protected]
8. Mr. Mahamad Almyzan
Awang
Lecturer 7803 [email protected]
9. Ms. Aimi Syahidah
Zulkipli
Lecturer 7809 [email protected]
10. Ms. Aw Cheu Lih Lecturer 7786 [email protected]
11. Ms. Azlinda Abd. Ghani Lecturer 7592 [email protected]
12. Ms. Maziah Romli Lecturer 7691 [email protected]
BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Professor Dr. Shaharum
Shamsuddin
Programme
Chairman /Lecturer
7615 [email protected]
2. Professor Dr. Norazmi
Mohd. Nor
Dean/Lecturer 7500/7784 [email protected]
vii
BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
3. Professor Dr. Zainul
Fadziruddin Zainuddin
Director Bussiness
and Technopreneur
Development
Division MTDC/
Lecturer
03-21726000
09-7647880
4. Associate Professor
Dr. Rapeah Suppian
Deputy Dean
(Research &
Innovation)/Lecturer
7782/7613 [email protected]
5. Associate Professor
Dr. Lim Boon Huat
Deputy Dean
(Postgraduate
Studies, Industry-
Community Network
and International
Affair)/Lecturer
7501/7779 [email protected]
6. Associate Professor
Dr. Few Ling Ling
Coordinator
(Postgraduate-
Biomedicine Mixed-
mode) /Lecturer
7536 [email protected]
7. Associate Professor
Dr. Farid Che Ghazali
Lecturer 7641 [email protected]
8. Associate Professor
Dr. See Too Wei Cun
Lecturer 7537 [email protected]
9. Dr. Ezzeddin Kamil
Mohamed Hashim
Lecturer 7851 [email protected]
10. Dr. Hermizi Hapidin Lecturer 7634 [email protected]
11. Dr. Idris Long Lecturer 7778 [email protected]
12. Dr. Maryam Azlan Lecturer 7836 [email protected]
13. Dr. Mohd Dasuki Haji
Sul’ain
Lecturer 7581 [email protected]
14. Dr. Nik Norliza Nik
Hassan
Lecturer 7532 [email protected]
15. Dr. Nik Siti Hanifah
Nik Ahmad
Lecturer 7835 [email protected]
16. Dr. Noor Izani Noor
Jamil
Lecturer 7604 [email protected]
17. Dr. Nor Fazila Che Mat Lecturer 7768 [email protected]
18. Dr. Nurhidanatasha Abu
Bakar
Lecturer 7814 [email protected]
19. Dr. Nurul Asma
Abdullah
Lecturer 7838 [email protected]
20. Dr. Rozieyati Mohamed
Saleh
Lecturer 7584 [email protected]
21. Dr. Sabreena Safuan Lecturer 7823 [email protected]
22. Dr. Tan Suat Cheng Lecturer 7776 [email protected]
viii
BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
23. Dr. Tee Get Bee @
Yvonne
Lecturer 7597 [email protected]
24. Dr. Wan Amir Nizam
Wan Ahmad
Lecturer 7652 [email protected]
25. Dr. Wan Ezumi Mohd
Puad @ Mohd Fuad
Lecturer 7626 [email protected]
26. Dr. Wan Nor Azilah @
Wan Nor Amilah Wan
Abdul Wahab
Lecturer 7552 [email protected]
27. Dr. Yusmazura Zakaria Lecturer 7781 [email protected]
28. Dr. Zefarina Zulkafli Lecturer 7799 [email protected]
29. Mr. Nor Azmi Zainal Lecturer 7547 [email protected]
30. Mr. Zamri Ibrahim Lecturer 7543 [email protected]
31. Dr. Noraini Abdul
Ghafar
Lecturer [email protected]
32. Dr. Nur Salwani Bakar Lecturer 7635/7569 [email protected]
33. Dr. Zuraidah Abdullah Lecturer 7556 [email protected]
34. Dr. Nur Syahmina
Rasudin
Lecturer 7607 [email protected]
NUTRITION AND DIETETICS PROGRAMMES
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Associate Professor
Dr. Hamid Jan Jan
Mohamed
Programme Chairman
/Lecturer
7618 [email protected]
2. Professor Dr. Wan Rosli
Wan Ishak @ Wan
Ahmad
Deputy Dean
(Academic, Students
Affairs & Alumni)
/Lecturer
7502/7783 [email protected]
3. Associate Professor
Dr. Shariza Abdul Razak
Lecturer 7638 [email protected]
4. Associate Professor
Dr. Foo Leng Huat
Lecturer 7548 [email protected]
5. Dr. Soo Kah Leng Lecturer 7631 [email protected]
6. Dr. Norfarizan Hanoon
Noor Azmi
Lecturer 7633 [email protected]
7. Dr. Hafzan Haji Yusoff Lecturer 7822 [email protected]
8. Dr. Marina Abdul Manaf Lecturer 7617 [email protected]
9. Dr. Reena Kumari A/P
Vijayakumaran
Lecturer 7833 [email protected]
10. Dr. Wan Faizah Wan
Yusof
Lecturer 7540 [email protected]
11.
Ms. Nur-Fazimah Sahran Lecturer 7637 nfazimah_sahran@
usm.my
ix
NUTRITION AND DIETETICS PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
12. Ms. Juliana Shamsudin Lecturer 7632 [email protected]
EXERCISE AND SPORT SCIENCES PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Associate Professor
Dr. Hairul Anuar
Hashim
Programme
Chairman/Lecturer
7575 [email protected]
2. Associate Professor
Dr. Mohamed Saat
Ismail
Lecturer 7602
3. Associate Professor
Dr. Chen Chee Keong
Lecturer 7787 [email protected]
4. Associate Professor
Dr. Oleksandr
Krasilshchikov
Lecturer 7585 [email protected]
5. Associate Professor
Dr. Ooi Foong Kiew
Lecturer 7809 [email protected]
6. Dr. Mohd Nidzam Mat
Jawis
Coordinator
(Postgraduate-Taught
Course)/Lecturer
7608 [email protected]
7. Dr. Vina Tan Phei
Sean
Lecturer 7538 [email protected]
8. Dr. Ang Boon Suen Lecturer 6157 [email protected]
9. Dr. Garry Kuan Pei Ern Lecturer 7622 [email protected]
10. Mr. Erie Zuraidee
Zulkifli
Lecturer 7558 [email protected]
11. Dr. Shazlin Shaharudin Lecturer 7852 [email protected]
12. Dr. Ayu Suzailiana
Muhamad
Lecturer 7578 ayu_suzailiana@usm.
my
13. Dr. Mohd Zulkifli Abd.
Rahim
Lecturer 7620 [email protected]
14. Dr. Rosniwati Ghafar Lecturer 7816 [email protected]
15. Dr. Marilyn Ong Li Yin Lecturer 7679 [email protected]
16. Ms. Aminah Haji
Hasbullah
Lecturer 7566 [email protected]
17. Mr. Nurul Azuar
Hamzah (Study Leave)
Lecturer 7641 [email protected]
FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Dr. Ahmad Fahmi Lim
Abdullah
Programme
Chairman/Lecturer
7596 [email protected]
2. Associate Professor
Dr. Zafarina Zainuddin
Lecturer 7616 [email protected]
3. Dr. Nurasmat Mohd
Shukri
Lecturer 7563 [email protected]
x
FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
4. Dr. Nik Fakhuruddin
Nik Hassan
Coordinator
(Postgraduate-Forensics
Science Mixed-mode)
/Lecturer
7621 [email protected]
5. Dr. Noor Zuhartini Md
Muslim
Lecturer 7785 [email protected]
6. Dr. Geshina Ayu Mat
Saat
Lecturer 7773 [email protected]
7. Dr. Dzulkiflee Ismail Lecturer 7820 [email protected]
8. Dr. Wan Nur Syuhaila
Mat Desa
Lecturer 7821 [email protected]
9. Dr. Nur Haslindawaty
Abd Rashid
Lecturer 7831 [email protected]
10. Dr. Helmi Mohd Hadi
Pritam
Lecturer 7834 [email protected]
11. Dr. Edinur Hisham
Atan
Lecturer 7641 [email protected]
12. Dr. Chang Kah Haw Lecturer 7624 [email protected]
MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Ms. Chen Suk Chiang Programme
Chairman/Lecturer
7639 [email protected]
2. Professor Dr. Ahmad
Hj Zakaria
Lecturer 7784 [email protected]
3. Dr. Wan Nordiana
W. Abd. Rahman
Lecturer 7811 [email protected]
4. Dr. Muhammad Nur
Salihin Yusoff
Lecturer 7565 [email protected]
5. Dr. Norazlina Mat Nawi Lecturer 7819 [email protected]
6. Dr. Marianie Musarudin Lecturer 7991 [email protected]
7. Mr. Mohd Fahmi
Mohd Yusof
Lecturer 7576 [email protected]
8. Ms. Siti Aishah Abdul
Aziz
Lecturer 7623 [email protected]
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Associate Professor
Dr. Hasmah Abdullah
Programme Chairman
/Lecturer
7534 [email protected]
2. Dr. Hj. Mohd Nazhari
Hj. Mohd Nawi
Medical Lecturer 7650 [email protected]
3. Dr. Maliki Hapani Lecturer 7625 [email protected]
4. Mr. Mohd Nasrom Hj.
Mohd Nawi
Lecturer 7800 [email protected]
xi
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
5. Ms. Faridah Naim (on study leave)
Lecturer 7804 [email protected]
6. Dr. Nurulilyana
Sansuddin
Lecturer 7810 [email protected]
7. Dr. Siti Marwanis Anua Lecturer 7827 [email protected]
8. Pn. Nor Haslina Mohd Lecturer 7828 [email protected]
9. Dr. Nurul Ainun
Hamzah
Lecturer 7804 [email protected]
10. Dr. Nur Fatien
Muhamad Salleh
Lecturer 7549 nurfatiensalleh@usm.
my
TEACHING STAFF OF NURSING PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Dr. Dariah Mohd
Yusoff
Programme Chairman
/Lecturer
7807 [email protected]
2. Dr. Kasmah Wati Pardi Lecturer 7533 [email protected]
3. Dr. Azlina Yusuf Lecturer 7567 [email protected]
4. Dr. Che Rabiaah
Mohamed
Lecturer 7577 [email protected]
5. Ms. Intan Idiana
Hassan (on study leave)
Lecturer 7636 [email protected]
6. Ms. Jayah K. Pubalan Lecturer 7550 [email protected]
7. Ms. Norazliah Hj.
Samsudin
Lecturer 7557 [email protected]
8. Dr. Noor Aini Hussain Lecturer 7531 [email protected]
9. Ms. Radziah Mohd
Fauzi
Lecturer 7588 [email protected]
10. Ms. Rosmawati
Mohamed
Lecturer 7611 [email protected]
11. Ms. Sabarisah Hashim Lecturer 7551 [email protected]
12. Dr. Soon Lean Keng Lecturer 7546 [email protected]
13. Dr. Zakira Mamat
@ Mohamed
Lecturer 7554 [email protected]
14. Ms. Intan Baiduri Badri Lecturer 7587 [email protected]
15. Ms. Anisah Mat Desa Tutor 7744 [email protected]
16. Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir Tutor 7733 [email protected]
17. Ms. Fazdillah Husin Tutor 7743 [email protected]
18. Ms. Hartini Muhamad (on study leave)
Tutor 7812 [email protected]
19. Ms. Hasni Embong Tutor 7741 [email protected]
20. Ms. Low Kim Lian Tutor 7747 [email protected]
21. Ms. Mas Nor Saloni
Ibrahim
Tutor 7732 [email protected]
22. Ms. Nik Asiah Nik Lah Tutor
7735 [email protected]
xii
TEACHING STAFF OF NURSING PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
23. Ms. Nik Nor Azlina
Abd. Kadir (on study
leave)
Tutor 7738
24. Ms. Nor Rahan
Mohamad
Tutor 7780 [email protected]
25. Ms. Norizam
Muhammad Yusof
Tutor 7734 [email protected]
26. Ms. Norliza Hussin Tutor 7745 [email protected]
27. Ms. Noor Jasmani
Hassan
Tutor 7746 [email protected]
28. Ms. Nurhayati
Muhamad Nor
Tutor 7742 [email protected]
29. Ms. Salwismawati
Badrin
Tutor 7813 [email protected]
30. Ms. Siti Aishah Hj.
Ghazali (on study leave)
Tutor 7737 [email protected]
31. Ms.Tuan Ruasmani
Tuan Daud
Tutor 7750 [email protected]
32. Ms. Zahniyah Che
Ishak
Tutor 7736 [email protected]
33. Ms. Zaihan Ab.
Rahman
Tutor 7749 [email protected]
34. Ms. Zuraida Yusoff Tutor 7748 [email protected]
35. Ms. Chu Be Lai Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]
36. Ms. Halizan Yusoff Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]
37. Ms. Masturah Hamzah Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]
38. Ms. Norizan Che
Mohd Yusoff
Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]
39. Ms. Zaharah
Muhammad
Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]
INTERDISIPLINARY HEALTH UNIT PROGRAMME
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Dr. Rohani Ismail Coordinator/Lecturer 7789 [email protected]
2. Dr. Mujahid Bakar Lecturer 7788 [email protected]
3. Professor Dato’
Dr. Rashidah Shuib
Lecturer 7762 [email protected]
4. Dr. Rehanah Mohd.
Zain
Lecturer 7564 [email protected]
5. Dr. Rosminah
Mohamed
Lecturer 7586 rosminah_mohamed@
usm.my
6. Dr. David Joseph
Pereira
Lecturer 7808 [email protected]
xiii
The School of Health Sciences is also supported by academic staff from the School of Medical
Sciences, School of Dental Sciences, School of Physics, School of Mathematics, School of
Distance Education and external lecturers from Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Universiti Putra
Malaysia, the Royal Malaysia Police, Department of Chemistry Malaysia and the Fire and Rescue
Department of Malaysia.
ADMINISTRATION
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Mr. Md. Lukmi Ismail Senior Chief Science
Officer (Science
Laboratory
Management Unit)
7541 [email protected]
2. Ms. Wan Suriati
Wan Nik
Senior Science Officer
(Research Unit)
7545 [email protected]
3. Mr. Khairul Ithma
Mahdi
Senior Assistant
Registrar
(Administration)/
(Postgraduate Studies
Unit)
7507 [email protected]
4. Ms. Hasuaniza Hassan Senior Assistant
Registrar (Academic)
7516 [email protected]
1
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Background
The treatment and prevention of diseases have long been the foundation of conventional
thoughts in matters of health. These thoughts have undergone changes, albeit slowly,
towards the concept of a more holistic management of health, based not only on the biology
of diseases but also incorporating aspects of sociological sciences, behaviour and the
environment. This concept of health gives cognizance not only to patients but to the healthy
individual as well.
Rapid advancement in technology has helped to hasten these changes in concepts,
methodologies and the way health services are disbursed. These facts are taken into account
during the development of programmes at the School of Health Sciences with the expressed
intention of producing graduates who would be able to compete in the job market both
locally and at the international level.
With these principles as its foundations, the School of Health Sciences USM was
established at the Health Campus in Kelantan on the 1st of November 1999. The School's
main objective is to holistically expand the Health Sciences disciplines. Within the ambit
of Health Sciences are included areas of specialties like Biomedicine, Dietetics, Nursing, Forensic Science, Medical Radiation, Exercise and Sports Science, Audiology, Speech
Pathology, Nutrition and Environmental and Occupational Health. In addition, several
other potential health related subjects will also be offered in due course. Thus, the
establishment of the School of Health Sciences is a direct effort by USM to help fulfill the
national requirement for manpower in the areas of health and paramedical disciplines
which is currently experiencing a severe shortage of trained personnels.
The 2017/2018 academic session is the eighteenth for the School. Since the academic
session 2002/2003, thirteen batches of students have graduated from various programmes.
In the academic session 2007/2008, the School of Health Sciences saw another milestone
with the reintroduction of Diploma in Nursing which was previously offered under the
School of Medical Sciences.
All programmes offered at the School of Health Sciences will be of four (4) years duration
(eight semesters). At the end of the programmes, graduates will be conferred the Bachelor
of Health Science (Honours) (BHSc) (Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains Kesihatan dengan
kepujian) for their respective disciplines with the exception of the Forensic Science
programme which will be conferred the Bachelor of Science (Honours) (Forensic Science)
[Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains dengan kepujian (Sains Forensik)] degree. Meanwhile,
graduates from the Diploma in Nursing Programme will be conferred a Diploma in
Nursing.
2
Philosophy
School of Health Sciences holds on to a philosophy that education drives the progress and
development of humankind. The school is committed to fulfil the aspiration by providing
holistic education to produce graduates with integrity as well as the capability to pursue
their own goals and directions in life, in addition to contributing to the development and
progress of Malaysia as an industralised and civilised nation.
Mission
To achieve and maintain excellence in health sciences by:
Producing graduates with a high level of intellectual inquiry and professionalism.
Developing graduates with a strong sense of ethics and commitment to humanity.
Transforming knowledge into an instrument for sustainable development and
wellness of society.
Vision
We are committed to be a centre of excellence in health sciences towards the wellness of
society through intellectual inquiry, creativity, innovation and dissemination of knowledge.
3
2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 Course Registration
Registration of courses is an important activity during the period of study at the
university. It is the first step for the students to sit for the examination at the end
of each semester. Signing up for the right courses each semester will help to
facilitate the graduation of each student from the first semester till the final
semester.
2.1.1 Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor Degree and
University’s Diploma Students
Student Data and Records Section (SDRP)
Academic Management Division
Registry
(Level 1, Chancellory Building)
Tel. No. : 04-653 2925/2924/2923
Fax No. : 04-657 4641
E-Mail : [email protected]
Website : http://registry.usm.my/updr
The SDRP office is the Secretariat/Coordinator of course registration for
the Bachelor Degree and Diploma Programme of the University.
Further inquiries regarding course registration activities for the first
degree and diploma can be made at the office of the Student Data and
Records Section. Please refer to the contact number above.
2.1.2 Course Registration Platform
(i) E-Daftar (E-Registration)
E-Daftar is a platform for on-line course registration. The
registration is done directly through the Campus Online portal
(https://campusonline.usm.my).
Registration under E-Daftar for Semester 1 usually starts 1-2 days
after the release of 'Official' examination results of Semester 2 of
the previous academic year. The system closes a day before
Semester 1 begins (in September). E-Daftar registration for
Semester 2 usually starts 1-2 days after the Semester 1 ‘Provisional’ examination results are released until a day before Semester 2
begins (in February).
4
The actual timing of registration under E-Daftar will be announced
by the Student Data and Records Section during the Revision Week
of every semester and will be displayed on the respective
Schools/Centres/Hostels’ bulletin boards and in the USM’s official
website.
Under E-Daftar, students can register for any courses offered by
USM, except co-curriculum courses. Registration of co-curriculum
courses is still placed under the administration of the Director of the
Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme at the Main Campus or the
Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Engineering
Campus and the Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at
the Health Campus.
Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students’ course
registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their pre-
registration application is successful.
(ii) Access to E-Daftar System
a. E-Daftar System can be accessed through the Campus Online
portal (https://campusonline.usm.my).
b. Students need to use the E-Mail ID and password to access their
profile page, which includes the E-Daftar menu.
c. Students need to click on the E-Daftar menu to access and
register for the relevant courses.
d. Students are advised to print the course registration
confirmation slip upon completion of the registration process or
after updating the course registration list (add/ drop) within the
E-Daftar period.
e. The E-Daftar system can only be accessed for a certain period
of time.
f. Guidelines to register/gain access to the E-Daftar portal are
available at the Campus Online portal’s main page.
(iii) Online Course Registration (OCR) in Schools/Centres
OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are
applicable to students who are academically active and under
Probation (P1/P2) status. Students who face difficulties registering
their courses during the E-Daftar period can register their courses
during the official period of OCR alternatively. Each school is
responsible for scheduling this activity.
5
The official period for OCR normally starts on the first day of the
semester (without the penalty charge of RM50.00). After this
official date, the registration will be considered late (a penalty of
RM50.00 will be imposed if no reasonable excuse is given).
During the non-penalty period, OCR will be conducted at each
School. After Week Six, all registration, including adding and
dropping of courses will be administered by the Examination and
Graduation Section Office (Academic Management Division,
Registry).
2.1.3 The Frequency of Course Registration in One Academic Session
(i) Normal Study Semester
- 2 times per year (beginning of Semester 1 & Semester 2)
(ii) Long semester break (about one month after the final examination of
Semester 2)
- Once per year
2.1.4 General Guidelines before Students Register for Courses
(i) Matters/Information/Documents required to be noted/considered/
referred to by students before course registration:
- Refer to the respective School’s website to get updated
information for courses offered or course registration.
- Decide on courses to be registered according to the semester as
stipulated in the Study Programme Guide Book.
- List of courses to be registered and number of units (unit value)
for each course.
- Provide Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred).
- Construct Teaching and Learning Timetable for the registered
courses (to avoid overlapping in timetable).
- Read and comprehend the reminders regarding policies/general
requirements for the course registration.
(ii) The number of maximum and minimum units that can be registered
in every semester is stated below:
Academic Status Minimum Units Maximum
Units
Active 9 21
P1 9 12
P2 9 10
6
Determination of academic status in a semester is based on the
students’ academic performance in the previous semester (Grade
Point Average, GPA):
* GPA 2.00 & above = Active Academic Status
* GPA 1.99 & below = Probation Academic Status (P1/P2)
- Students who meet the minimum period of residency (6 semesters
for a 3 year programme, 7 semesters for a 3.5 year programme or
8 semesters for a 4 year programme) are allowed to register
courses with a total of less than 9 units. The semester in which the
student is on leave is not considered for the residency period. -
(iii) Type of course codes during registration:
T = Core courses Grade and number of units
E = Elective courses obtained from these courses
M = Minor courses are considered for graduation
U = University courses
Two (2) other course codes are:
Y = audit courses
Z = prerequisite courses
Grade and number of units obtained from these courses are not
considered for graduation.
(iv) Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor
- Approval from the Academic Advisor is required for students
under Probation status before they are allowed to register during
the OCR period. Probation students cannot access E-Daftar for
registration. - Approval from the Academic Advisor is not required for students
under Active Status to register courses through E-Daftar.
(v) Students are not allowed to register and repeat any course for which
they have achieved a grade 'C' and above.
2.1.5 Information/Document Given To All Students through Campus
Online Portal (https://campusonline.usm.my)
(i) The information of Academic Advisor.
(ii) Academic information such as academic status, GPA value, CGPA
value and year of study.
(iii) Cangred and Course Registration Form.
7
(iv) List of courses offered by all Schools/Centres.
(v) Teaching and Learning Timetable for all Schools/Centres/Units
from the three campuses.
(vi) List of pre-registered courses which have been added into the
students’ course registration record (if any).
(vii) Reminders about the University course registration policies/general
requisites.
2.1.6 Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses
(a) Registration of Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed.
However, if any problem arises, registration for language
courses can still be carried out/updated during the official period
of OCR at the office of the School of Languages, Literacies and
Translation.
All approval/registration/dropping/adding of language courses
is under the responsibility and administration of the School of
Languages, Literacies and Translation.
Any problems related to the registration of language courses can
be referred to the School of Languages, Literacies and
Translation. The contact details are as follows:
General Office : 04-653 4542/
5243/ 5248 for Main
Malay Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533974 Campus
English Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533406 students
Foreign Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533396
Engineering Campus Programme : 04-5995407
Chairperson 04-5996385
Health Campus Programme Chairperson : 09-7671252
(b) Registration for co-curricular courses through E-Daftar is not
allowed.
Registration for co-curricular courses is either done through pre-
registration before the semester begins or during the first/second
week of the semester. Co-curricular courses will be included in
the students’ course registration account prior to the E-Daftar
activity, if their pre-registration application is successful.
8
All approval/registration/dropping/adding of co-curricular
courses is under the responsibility and administration of:
Director of the Centre for Co-Curricular Programme, Main
Campus (04-653 5242/5243/5248)
Coordinator of the Centre for Co-Curricular Programme,
Engineering Campus (04-599 5097/6385)
Coordinator of the Centre for Co-Curricular Programme, Health
Campus (09-767 7547)
(c) Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if
necessary, must be made within the first week. After the first
week, a fine of RM50.00 will be imposed.
2.1.7 Registration of ‘Audit’ Courses (Y code)
Registration for the ‘Audit’ course (Y code) is not allowed in the
E-Daftar. It can only be done during the official period of OCR in the
School or Centre involved. Students who are interested must complete
the course registration form which can be printed from the Campus Online Portal or obtained directly from the School. Approval from the
lecturers of the courses to be audited and the Dean/ Deputy Dean
(Academic) (signed and stamped) in the course registration form is
required.
Registration of ‘Audit’ courses (Y code) is not included in the calculation
of the total registered workload units. Grades obtained from ‘Audit’
course are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and total units for
graduation.
2.1.8 Registration of Prerequisite Courses (Z code)
Registration of Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the total
registered workload (units). Grades obtained from the Prerequisite
courses are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and units for
graduation.
9
2.1.9 Late Course Registration/Late Course Addition
Late course registration or addition is not allowed after the official period
of the OCR ends unless with valid reasons. General information on this
matter is as follows:
(i) Late course registration and addition are only allowed in the first
to the third week with the approval of the Dean. Students will be
fined RM50.00 if the reasons given are not acceptable.
(ii) Application to add a course after the third week will not be
considered, except for special cases approved by the University.
2.1.10 Dropping of Courses
Dropping of courses is allowed until the end of the sixth week.
For this purpose, students must meet the requirements set by the
University as follows:
(i) Dropping Course Form must be completed by the student and signed by the lecturer of the course involved and the Dean/Deputy
Dean of their respective Schools and submitted to the general office
of the School/Centre which is responsible for offering the courses
involved.
(ii) Students who wish to drop a language course must obtain the
signature and stamp of the Dean of the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation, as well as the signature and stamp of the
Dean of their respective schools.
(iii) Students who wish to drop the Co-Curriculum courses must obtain
the approval of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme and the
signature and stamp of the Dean of their respective schools.
(iv) The option for dropping courses cannot be misused. Lecturers have
the right not to certify the course that the student wishes to drop if
the student is not serious, such as poor attendance record at lectures,
tutorials and practical, as well as poor performance in coursework.
The student will be barred from sitting for the examination and will be given grade 'X' and is not allowed to repeat the course during the
Courses during the Long Vacation (KSCP) period.
10
2.1.11 Course Registration Confirmation Slip
The course registration confirmation slip that has been printed/ obtained
after registering the course should be checked carefully to ensure there
are no errors, especially the code type of the registered courses. Any data
errors for course registration must be corrected immediately whether
during the period of E-Daftar (for students with active status only) or
during the period of OCR at the Schools.
2.1.12 Revising and Updating Data/Information/Students’ Personal and
Academic Records
Personal and academic information for each student can be checked
through the Campus Online portal (https://campusonline.usm.my).
Students are advised to always check all the information displayed on
this website.
- The office of the Student Data and Records Section must be notified
of any application/notification for correction/updating of personal
data such as the spelling of names (names must be spelled as shown
on the Identification Card), Identification Card number and address
(permanent address and correspondence address).
- The office of the Student Data and Records Section must be notified
of any application/ notification for correction of academic data such
as information on Major, Minor, MUET result and the course code.
- The office of the Examination and Graduation Section must be
notified of any application/notification for correction of the
examination/results data.
2.1.13 Academic Advisor
Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each student.
Academic Advisors comprise academic staff (lecturers) of the school.
Normally, the appointment of Academic Advisors will be made known
to every student during the first semester in the first year of their studies.
Academic Advisors will advise their students under their responsibility
on academic-related matters. Important advice for the students
includes the registration planning for certain courses in each
semester during the study period. Before registering the course,
students are advised to consult and discuss with their Academic Advisors
to determine the courses to be registered in a semester.
11
2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit/Course
2.2.1 Unit
Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is
determined by the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the students.
In general, a unit is defined as follows:
Type of Course Definition of Unit
Theory 1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per
week for 13 – 14 weeks in one semester
Practical/Laboratory/
Language Proficiency
1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per week for 13 – 14 hours in one
semester
Industrial Training/
Teaching Practice
1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of
training
Based on the requirements of Malaysian Qualifications Framework
(MQF):
One unit is equivalent to 40 hours of student learning time [1 unit = 40 hours of Student Learning Time (SLT)]
2.2.2 Accumulated Credit Unit
Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate, students
must accumulate the total number of credits stipulated for the programme
concerned.
2.3 Examination System
Examinations are held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit for the
examination of the courses they have registered for. Students are required to settle
all due fees and fulfil the standing requirements for lectures/tutorials/practical
and other requirements before being allowed to sit for the examination of the
courses they have registered for. Course evaluation will be based on the two
components of coursework and final examinations. Coursework evaluation
includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation in tutorials.
2.3.1 Duration of Examination
Evaluated Courses Examination Duration
2 units 1 hour for coursework of more than 40%
2 units 2 hours for coursework of 40% and below
3 units or more 2 hours for coursework of more than 40%
3 units or more 3 hours for coursework of 40% and below
12
2.3.2 Barring from Examination
Students will be barred from sitting for the final examination if they do
not fulfil the course requirements, such as absence from lectures and
tutorials of at least 70%, and have not completed/fulfilled the required
components of coursework. Students will also be barred from sitting for
the final examination if they have not settled the academic fees. A grade
'X' would be awarded for a course for which a student is barred. Students
will not be allowed to repeat the course during the Courses during the
Long Vacation (KSCP) period.
2.3.3 Grade Point Average System
Students’ academic achievement for registered courses will be graded as
follows:
Alphabetic
Grade A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D D- F
Grade
Points 4.00 3.67 3.33 3.00 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 0.67 0
Students awarded with a grade 'C-' and below for a particular course
would be given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP (see below) or normal semester. Students awarded
with a grade 'C' and above for a particular course will not be allowed to
repeat the course whether during KSCP or normal semester.
The achievement of students in any semester is based on Grade Point
Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular
semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of
students in any semester.
CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student
from one semester to another during the years of study.
The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:
n
∑ Ui Mi
Grade Point Average = i=1
__________
n
∑ Ui
i=1
where:
n = Number of courses taken
Ui = Course units for course i
Mi = Grade point for course i
13
Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Course Unit Grade Point
(GP)
Grade
(G ) Total GP
Semester I ABC XX1 4 3.00 B 12.00
ABC XX2 4 2.33 C+ 9.32
BCD XX3 3 1.67 C- 5.01
CDE XX4 4 2.00 C 8.00
EFG XX5 3 1.33 D+ 3.99
EFG XX6 2 2.67 B- 5.34
20 43.66
GPA = 43.66 = 2.18
20
Course Unit Grade Point
(GP) Grade (G ) Total GP
Semester II ABC XX7 3 1.00 D 3.00
ABB XX8 4 2.33 C+ 9.32
BBC XX9 4 2.00 C 8.00
BCB X10 4 2.67 B- 10.68
XYZ XX1 3 3.33 B+ 9.99
18 40.99
GPA = 40.99 = 2.28
18
CGPA = Total Accumulated GP = 43.66 + 40.99 = 84.65 = 2.23
Total Accumulated Unit 20 + 18 38
From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total grade
point accumulated for all the registered courses and divided by the total
number of the registered units.
2.3.4 Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti Panjang)
(KSCP)
KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and
obtained a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who
have obtained a grade 'X' or 'F*' are not allowed to take the course during
KSCP.
14
The purpose of KSCP is to:
(i) Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for
graduation.
(ii) Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for
graduation.
(iii) Assist "probationary" students to enhance their academic status.
(iv) Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course, which
is not offered in the following semester.
However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking courses
that they have attempted before and achieved a grade as stipulated above,
provided that the course is being offered. Priority is given to final year
students. Usually, formal lectures are not held, and teaching is via
tutorials.
The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of
examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is
available in the University's Academic Calendar.
The Implementation of KSCP
(i) Students are allowed to register for a maximum of 3 courses
and the total number of units registered must not exceed 10.
(ii) Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest marks/the
best grades obtained in a particular course in the normal semester
before KSCP. The final overall grade is determined as follows:
Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade +
Marks or grade for KSCP examination
(iii) GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in KSCP)
and also involves courses taken in the second semester and those
repeated in KSCP. If the GPA during KSCP as calculated above is
2.00 or better, the academic status will be active, even though the
academic status for the second semester was probation status.
However, if the GPA for KSCP (as calculated above) is 1.99 or
below, the academic status will remain as probation status for the
second semester.
(iv) Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation requirements) in the second semester are not allowed to register for
KSCP.
15
2.3.5 Academic Status
Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for
any examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be
allowed to pursue his/her studies for the following semester.
Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who achieves
a GPA of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation status for
three consecutive semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to pursue
his/her studies at the university. On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00
and above, the student concerned will be allowed to pursue his/her
studies and will remain at P2 status.
2.3.6 Termination of Candidature
Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University
Examination Council has the absolute right to terminate any
student's studies if his/her academic achievement does not satisfy
and fulfil the accumulated minimum credits.
The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any
student's studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not registered
for the courses, has not attended the examination without valid reasons),
as well as medical reasons can be disqualified from pursuing his/her
studies.
2.3.7 Examination Results
A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Campus Online portal
(campusonline.usm.my) and short message service (SMS) will usually
be released and announced after the School Examination Council
meeting and approximately one month after the final examination.
Enquiries regarding full results (grade) can be made through the Campus
Online portal and short message service (SMS). The results will be
released and announced after the University Examination Council
meeting and is usually two weeks after the provisional results are
released.
Students can print their official semester results document namely
‘SEMGRED’ through the portal “Campus Online”
(campusonline.usm.my) during the second week of the following
semester.
16
2.4 Unit Exemption
2.4.1 Unit Exemption
Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to students
who are pursuing their studies in USM that are exempted from the
graduation requirements. Students only need to accumulate the
remaining units for graduation purposes. Only passes or course grades
accumulated or acquired in USM will be included in the calculation of
the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for graduation purposes.
2.4.2 Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption
Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private Institutions of
Higher Learning:
i) Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken at diploma level.
ii) Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in two or more
combinations) in order to obtain exemption of one course at degree
level. However if the School would like to approve only one course
at the diploma level for unit exemption of one course at degree
level, the course at diploma level must be equivalent to the degree
course and have the same number of or more units.
iii) Courses taken during employment (in service) for diploma holders
cannot be considered for unit exemption.
iv) The minimum achievement at diploma level that can be considered
for unit exemption is a minimum grade 'C' or 2.0 or equivalent.
v) The total number of semesters exempted should not exceed two
semesters.
vi) In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial training, a
student must have continuous work experience for at least two
years in the area. If a student has undergone industrial training
during the period of diploma level study, the student must have
work experience for at least one year. The students are also required
to produce a report on the level and type of work performed.
Industrial training unit exemption cannot be considered for
semester exemption as the industrial training is carried out during
the long vacation in USM.
vii) Unit exemption for university and option courses can only be given
for courses such as Bahasa Malaysia (LKM400), English
Language, Islamic and Asian Civilisations and as well as co-
curriculum.
17
IPTS (Private Institution of Higher Learning) USM Supervised/ External
Diploma Graduates:
Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external diploma
graduates are given unit exemption as stipulated by the specific
programme of study. Normally, unit exemption in this category
is given as a block according to the agreement between USM
(through the School that offers the programme) with the IPTS.
Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public Institutions of
Higher Learning)/IPTS who are studying at the Bachelor’s Degree level
may apply to study in this university and if successful, may be considered
for unit exemption, subject to the following conditions:
(i) Courses taken in the previous IPT are equivalent (at least 50% of
the course must be the same) to the courses offered in USM.
(ii) Students taking courses at Advanced Diploma level in IPT that are
recognised to be equivalent to the Bachelor’s Degree course in
USM may be considered for unit exemption as in Section 2.5.
(iii) The total maximum unit exemption allowed should not exceed one
third of the total unit requirement for graduation.
2.4.3 Total Number of Exempted Semesters
Semester exemption is based on the total units exempted as below:
Total Units Exempted Total Semesters Exempted
8 and below None
9 – 32 1
33 to 1/3 of the
total units for graduation
2
2.4.4 Application Procedure for Unit Exemption
Any student who would like to apply for unit exemption is required to
complete the Unit Exemption Application Form which can be obtained
from the Examination and Graduation Section or the respective Schools.
The form must be approved by the Dean of the School prior to
submission to the Examination and Graduation Section for consideration
and approval.
18
2.5 Credit Transfer
Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of the total number of credits
obtained by USM students taking courses in other IPTAs (Public Institution of
Higher Learning) within the period of study at USM, and is combined with
credits obtained at USM to fulfil the unit requirements for his/her programme of
study. The transferred examination results or grades obtained in courses taken
at other IPTAs will be taken into consideration in the Cumulative Grade Point
Average (CGPA) calculation.
(a) Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit Transfer
USM full-time Bachelor Degree level students who would like to attend
specific Bachelor Degree level courses at other IPTAs.
USM full-time diploma level students who would like to attend specific
diploma level courses at other IPTAs.
(b) Specific Conditions
(i) Basic and Core Courses
Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained from other
courses in other IPTAs that are equivalent (at least 80% of the content
is the same) with the courses offered by the programme.
Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have the same
number of units or more. For equivalent courses but with less number
of units, credit transfers can be approved by combining a few courses.
Credits transferred are the same as the course units offered in USM.
Average grade of the combined courses will be taken into account in
the CGPA calculation.
(ii) Elective or Option Courses
Students may take any appropriate courses in other IPTAs subject to
permission from the School as well as the approval of the IPTAs.
The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at other IPTAs.
No course equivalence condition is required.
(iii) Minor Courses
For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should adhere to either
conditions (i) or (ii), and take into account the programme requirement.
19
(c) General Conditions
1) The total maximum units transferred should not exceed one third of the
total number of units for the programme.
2) Credit exemption from other IPTAs can be considered only once for
each IPTA.
3) The examination results obtained by a student who has taken courses at
other IPTAs will be taken into account for graduation purposes. Grades
obtained for each course will be combined with the grades obtained at
USM for CGPA calculation.
4) Students who have applied and are approved for credit transfer are not
allowed to cancel the approval after the examination result is obtained.
5) Students are required to register for courses at other IPTAs with not less
than the total minimum units as well as not exceeding the maximum
units as stipulated in their programme of study. However, for specific
cases (e.g. students on an extended semester and only require a few
units for graduation), the Dean may allow such students to register less than the minimum units and the semester will not be considered for the
residential requirement. In this case, the CGPA calculation will be
similar to that requirement of the KSCP.
6) USM students attending courses at other IPTAs who have failed in any
courses will be allowed to re-sit the examinations of the courses if there
is such a provision in that IPTA.
7) If the method of calculation of examination marks in the other IPTAs is
not the same as in USM, grade conversions will be carried out according
to the existing scales.
8) USM students who have registered for courses at other IPTAs but have
decided to return to study in USM must adhere to the existing course
registration conditions of USM.
2.5.1 Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit Transfer
USM students who would like to apply to attend courses/credit transfer
at other IPTAs should apply using the Credit Transfer Application Form.
The application form should be submitted for the Dean's approval for the
programme of study at least three months before the application is
submitted to other IPTAs for consideration.
20
2.6 Academic Integrity
“Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without integrity
is dangerous and dreadful.” - Samuel Johnson
Academic honesty in academic is important because it is the main pillar in
ensuring that manners and ethics with regards to high academic integrity are
preserved.
Universiti Sains Malaysia encourages its students to be respectful of and to
ensure that any matter relating to academic integrity will be well-preserved.
Universiti Sains Malaysia always encourages its students to ensure that manners,
ethics and integrity would be essential in academics while focusing on their
studies in Universiti Sains Malaysia.
These are practices or acts that are considered as conducts which lack integrity
in academics:
(a) Cheating
Cheating in the context of academics include copying in examinations,
unauthorized use of information or other aids in any academic exercise
without authorization or in a non-sincere manner. There are numerous
ways and methods of cheating which include:
Copying answers from others during a test or an exam.
Any suspicious action that can be described as cheating or an attempt to
cheat in an exam.
Using unauthorized materials or devices without authorization (calculator, PDA, mobile phones, pager, or any smart device, and other
unauthorized devices) during a test or an exam.
Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam on behalf
and vice-versa.
Sharing answers or programmes for an assignments or projects.
Purposely tampering with marked/graded after it has been returned, and then re-submitting it for remarking/regrading.
Give command, to force, persuade, deceive or blackmail others to
conduct research, do writing, programming or any task for personal gain.
Submitting any identical or similar work in more than one course without
consulting or prior permission from the lecturers concerned.
(b) Plagiarism
The reputation of an academic institution depends on the ability to achieve and sustain academic excellence through the exercise of academic
integrity. Academic integrity is based on honesty, trust, fairness, respect,
and responsibility, which form the basis of academic work.
21
One aspect of the loss of academic integrity is due to plagiarism, which is
the act of presenting published and unpublished ideas, writings, works or
inventions of others in written or other medium, as one’s own original
intellectual endeavours without any clear acknowledgement of or reference
to the author of the source.
A substantial portion of academic work and research are in the written form
and the university is committed in the deterrence of plagiarism.
POLICY ON PLAGIARISM OF UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA
The University Policy on Plagiarism describes USM’s strong commitment
to uphold academic integrity in relation to plagiarism. It will come into
effect when there is an infringement of academic conduct relating to
plagiarism.
This policy acts as a guideline that both educates and prevents and can be
used as the basis if anyone that is part of the university violates any rules
and laws of the University.
The policy applies to all students, former students, staff and former staff which include fellows, post-doctorates, visiting scholars, as well as
academic, non-academic, research, contract and temporary staff who
study, serving or having served, or have graduated from the University.
Plagiarism is defined as the act of presenting, quoting, copying,
paraphrasing or passing off ideas, images, processes, works, data, personal
words or those of other people or sources without any proper
acknowledgement, reference to or quotation of the original source(s). The
acts of plagiarism include, but are not limited to, the following:
Quoting verbatim (word-for-word replication of) works of other people.
Paraphrasing another person’s work by changing some of the words, or
the order of the words, without due acknowledgement of the source(s).
Submitting another person’s work in whole or in part as one’s own.
Auto-plagiarising or self-plagiarism (one’s own work or previous work)
that has already been submitted previously for assessment, or for any
other academic award and admitting it as newly-produced without citing
the original content.
Insufficient or misleading referencing of the source(s) that would enable
the reader to check whether any particular work has indeed been cited
accurately and/or fairly and thus to identify the original writer’s particular contribution in the work submitted.
22
The University will take action of every report and offences relating to
plagiarism and if the student is found guilty, the student can be charged by
the university according to the Students Disciplinary Rules.
(c) Fabrication
Fabrication refers to a process of invention, adaptation or copying with the
intention of cheating. This is an act of deceiving other people. Fabrication
is somewhat related to matters which have been ‘created’ or altered.
Invention or task outcome or academic work without acknowledgement,
alteration, falsification or misleading use of data, information or citation in
any academic work constitutes fabrication. Fabricated information neither
represent the student's own effort nor the truth concerning a particular
investigation or study, and thus violating the principle of truth in
knowledge. Some examples are:
Creating or exchanging data or results, or using someone else’s results,
in an experiment, assignment or research.
Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to.
Listing with intent, incorrect or fictitious references.
Forging signatures of authorization in any academic record or other
university documents.
Developing a set of false data.
(d) Collusion
Collusion refers to the cooperation in committing or to commit or to do
work with negative intentions. Some examples of collusion include:
Paying, bribing or allowing someone else to do an assignment, test/exam,
project or research for you.
Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project or research
for something in return.
Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others.
Providing material, information or sources to others knowing that such
aids could be used in any dishonest act.
(e) Other violations relating to academic integrity
Arriving late to lecture, tutorial, class or other forms of teaching relating
to their courses.
Sending or submitting any overdue assignment relating to their courses.
Hire someone else to do the assignment or thesis.
Carrying out business by providing service to write assignment or thesis
of the students.
Any other violations that USM considers as violating academic integrity.
23
2.6.1 Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity
Students are responsible in protecting and upholding academic integrity
in USM.
If in any specific event a student or students would encounter any
incident that denotes academic dishonesty, the student(s) need to submit
a report to the relevant lecturer. The lecturer is then responsible to
investigate and substantiate the violation and report the matter to the
Dean of the School.
(i) If any violation of academic integrity is considered as not of a serious
nature, the Dean of the School can take administrative action on the
students.
(ii) However, if the violation is deemed serious by the School, this
matter will be brought to the attention of the University Disciplinary
Committee for appropriate measures to be taken.
(iii) If a student is caught copying or cheating in an examination, the
Investigation Committee on Copying/Cheating in Examinations
will pursue the matter according to the university’s procedures. If
the investigation found that there is a case, the student(s) will be
brought to the Secretariat of University Student Disciplinary
Committee (Academic Cases) at Legal Office, Level 2, Building
E42, Chancellory II, Universiti Sains Malaysia. Regarding this
matter, the Universiti Sains Malaysia (Discipline of Students) Rules
will be enforced.
(iv) Measure 48 Measure Universiti Sains Malaysia (Discipline of
Students) Rules provides that a student who had committed an
inappropriate conduct and is found guilty could be sentenced with
either or a combination of or other suitable penalty as listed:
(a) a warning ;
(b) a fine not exceeding two hundred ringgit;
(c) exclusion from any specific part or parts of the University for a
specified period;
(d) suspension from being a student of the University for a specified period;
(e) expulsion from the University.
(v) Any student(s) found guilty and is to be suspended from their
studies within a given duration by the University Disciplinary
Committee (Academic Matters) or the University Disciplinary
Committee (General Matters), the maximum suspension period will
not be accounted for them in the completion of their studies and
while waiting for the verdict to be read.
24
2.7 USM Mentor Programme
The Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves staff undergoing
special training as consultants and guides to the USM community who would
like to share their feelings and any psychosocial issues that could affect their
social activities. This programme helps individuals to manage psychosocial
issues in a more effective manner, which will eventually improve their well-
being in order to achieve a better quality of life.
Objectives
(a) To serve as a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing
with stress, psychosocial problems and many more in order to ensure the
well-being of the USM community.
(b) To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one another by
appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent who promotes a caring
society for USM.
(c) To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help.
(d) To prevent damage in any psychosocial aspect before they reach a critical
stage.
2.8 Student Exchange Programme
2.8.1 Study Abroad Scheme
The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM students
to study for one or two semesters abroad at any USM partner
institutions. Ideally, students are encouraged to participate in the
exchange programme within their third to fifth semester (3 year degree
programme) and within the third to seventh semester (4 year degree
programme).
USM students who wish to follow the SBLN programme must discuss
their academic plans with the Dean or Deputy Dean of their respective
Schools and also with the International Mobility & Collaboration
Centre (IMCC) (to ensure that credits obtained from the external higher
education institution can be transferred as part of the credit
accumulation for graduation).
Any student that follows the SBLN programme and violates any
disciplinary act in the external higher education institution, can be
penalised in accordance with the University (Discipline of Students)
Rules if the matter is referred to USM.
25
For further information, please visit www.imcc.usm.my or contact the
International Mobility and Collaboration Centre (IMCC) at +604 – 653
2777/2774.
2.8.2 Student Exchange Programme in Local Higher Education
Institutions (RPPIPT)
This is a programme that allows students of Higher Learning Institutions
to do an exchange programme for a semester among the higher institutions
themselves. Students can choose any relevant courses and apply for credit
transfers.
USM students who want to participate in RPPIPT have to discuss their
academic plans with the Dean or Deputy Dean of their respective
Schools as well with the Academic Collaboration Unit, Division of
Academic and International (to ensure that credits obtained from the
higher education institution in Malaysia can be transferred as part of the
credit accumulation for graduation).
Any student who participates in RPPIPT and violates any of the
institution’s displinary rules can be penalised according to the University (Discipline of Students) Rules if the matter is referred to
USM.
For further information, please visit
http://bheaa.usm.my/index.php/programmes/inter-university-exchange
or contact the Academic Collaboration Unit of the Academic and
International Division at +604 – 653 2451.
2.9 Ownership of Students’ Dissertation/Research Project/Theses and
University’s Intellectual Property
2.9.1 Ownership of Students’ Dissertation/Research Project/Theses and
University’s Intellectual Property
The copyright of a dissertation/research project/thesis belongs to the
student. However, as a condition for the conferment of a degree, the
student gives this right unconditionally, directly but not exclusively, and
free of royalties to the university to use the contents of the work/thesis
for teaching, research and promotion purposes. In addition, the student
gives non-exclusive rights to the University to keep, use, reproduce,
display and distribute copies of the original thesis with the rights to publish for future research and the archives.
26
3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Summary of University Requirements
Students are required to take 15 - 22 units of the following University/Option
courses for University requirements:
University Requirements Units
1 Bahasa Malaysia 2
2 English Language 4
3 Local Students
• Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 Units)
• Ethnic Relations (2 Units)
• Core Entrepreneurship* (2 Units)
International Students
• Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
• Option/ Bahasa Malaysia/ English Language (2 Units)
6
4 Co-curricular /Skills Courses/Foreign Language
Courses/Options
Students have to choose one of the following:
• Co-curricular** (1-10 Units)
• Skills Courses/ Foreign Language Courses/Options
3 – 12
Total 15 – 22
* Students from Schools which have a similar course as this are exempted from taking this course. The units should be replaced with an option course.
** Students from the School of Educational Studies are required to choose a
uniformed body co-curricular package. Registration for co-curricular courses
is compulsory for students from the School of Dental Sciences (SDS). The
number of co-curricular units that need to be collected is three (3) units. The
breakdown is as follows: (i) 2nd year students must register for one (1) unit of
the co-curricular course in semester 1. (ii) 3rd year students must register for
one (1) unit of co-curricular course in semester 1 AND one (1) unit in
semester 2 (further information can be obtained from the SDS Academic
Office). Registration for co-curricular courses is compulsory for 1st year
students from the School of Medical Sciences (SMS). The number of units
that need to be collected for co-curricular courses is two (2) units. The
breakdown is as follows: 1st year students must register for one (1) unit of a
co-curricular course in semester 1 AND one (1) unit in semester 2 (further
information can be obtained from the SMS Academic Office).
Details of the University requirements are given in the following sections.
27
3.2 Bahasa Malaysia
(a) Local Students
The requirements are as follows:
• LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV
All Malaysian students must take LKM400 and pass with the minimum of
Grade C in order to graduate.
Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as follows:
Note: To obtain credit units for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum grade
of C is required. Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation if they have different Bahasa Malaysia
qualifications from the above.
(b) International Students
International students pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in Science,
Accounting, Arts (ELLS), Education (TESL), Housing, Building and
Planning and English for Professionals.
All international students in this category are required to take the following
courses:
Code Type Units
LKM100 U 2
International students (non-Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in
Arts.
All international students in this category are required to take the following
courses:
Code Type Units
LKM 100 Z 2
LKM 200 U 2
LKM 300 U 2
No Qualification Grade Level of
Entry Type Units Status
1
(a) SPM/ MCE/ SC
(or equivalent qualification)
(b) STPM/ HSC
(or equivalent qualification)
1 - 6
P/ S
LKM400 U 2 Graduation
requirement
28
International students (Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor degrees in Arts.
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of
students is as follows:
Code Type Units
LKM200 U 2
LKM300 U 2
Note: Students must pass with a minimum grade C for type U courses.
3.3 English Language
All Bachelor degree students must take 4 units of English Language courses to
fulfil the University requirement for graduation.
(a) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses
No. English Language
Qualification
Grade Level of
Entry
Status
1 *MUET
LSP401/402/403/404
† Discretion of Dean
Band 6
A - C
LHP
451/452/453/454/455/
456/457/458/459
Compulsory/
Option/Type U
(2 Units)
2 *MUET
LSP300
† Discretion of Dean
Band 5
A - C
LSP
401/402/403/404
Compulsory/
Type U
(2 Units)
3 *MUET
LMT100
† Discretion of Dean
Band 4
A - C
LSP300 Compulsory/
Type U
(2 Units)
4 *MUET
† Discretion of Dean
Band 3/2/1
(Score 0 - 179)
LMT100/
Re-sit MUET
Prerequisite/
Type Z
(2 Units)
* MUET: Malaysian University English Test.
† Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and
Translation if they have different English Language qualifications from the
above.
Note:
• Students are required to accumulate four (4) units of English for graduation.
• In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students have to pass
with a minimum grade ‘C’. • Students with a Score of 260 – 300 (Band 6) in MUET must accumulate the
4 units of English from the courses in the post-advanced level
(LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/ 458/459*). They can also take foreign
language courses to replace their English language units but they must first
obtain written consent from the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies
and Translation. (Please use the form that can be obtained from the School of
Languages, Literacies and Translation).
29
[*The number of units for LHP457 is 4 and for LHP451, 452, 453, 454, 455,
456, 458 and 459 is 2].
• Students with a score of 179 and below in MUET are required to re-sit MUET
to improve their score to Band 4 or take LMT100 and pass with a minimum
grade ‘C’.
(b) English Language Courses (Compulsory English Language Units)
The English Language courses offered as University courses are as follows:
No Code/Unit Course Title School (If Applicable)
1 LMT100/2 Preparatory English Students from all Schools
2 LSP300/2 Academic English Students from all Schools
3 LSP401/2 General English Students from:
School of Educational Studies
(Arts)
School of The Arts
School of Humanities
School of Social Sciences
School of Languages, Literacies
and Translation
4 LSP402/2 Scientific and Medical
English
Students from:
School of Biological Sciences
School of Physics
School of Chemical Sciences
School of Mathematical Sciences
School of Industrial Technology
School of Educational Studies
(Science)
School of Medical Sciences
School of Health and Dental
Sciences
School of Pharmaceutical
Sciences
5 LSP403/2 Business and
Communication
English
Students from:
School of Management
School of Communication
6 LSP404/2 Technical and
Engineering English
Students from:
School of Computer Sciences
School of Housing, Building and
Planning
School of Engineering
7 LDN 101/2 English For Nursing I Students from the School of
Health Sciences
8 LDN 201/2 English For Nursing II Students from the School of
Health Sciences
30
3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisations/Ethnic Relations/Core
Entrepreneurship
(a) Islamic and Asian Civilisations (The course is conducted in Bahasa
Malaysia)
It is compulsory to pass the following course (with a minimum grade ‘C’):
HTU 223 – Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 units)
This course aims to increase students’ knowledge on history, principles,
values, main aspects of Malay civilization, Islamic civilization and its
culture. With academic exposure to cultural issues and civilization in
Malaysia, it is hoped that students will be more aware of issues that can
contribute to the cultivation of the culture of respect and harmony among
the plural society of Malaysia. Among the topics in this course are
Interaction among Various Civilizations, Islamic Civilization, Malay
Civilization, Contemporary Challenges faced by the Islamic and Asian
Civilizations and Islamic Hadhari Principles.
(b) Ethnic Relations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
It is compulsory to pass the following course (with a minimum grade ‘C’):
SHE 101 – Ethnic Relations (2 units)
This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia. This course
is designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce students to the basic
concepts and the practices of social accord in Malaysia, (2) to reinforce
basic understanding of challenges and problems in a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to provide an understanding and awareness in managing the
complexity of ethnic relations in Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is
hoped that students will be able to identify and apply the skills to issues
associated with ethnic relations in Malaysia.
(c) Core Entrepreneurship (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
It is compulsory to pass the following course (with a minimum grade ‘C’):
WUS 101 – Core Entrepreneurship (2 units)
This course aims to provide basic exposure to students in the field of
entrepreneurship and business, with emphasis on the implementation of the learning aspects while experiencing the process of executing business
projects in campus. The mode of teaching is through interactive lectures,
practical, business plan proposals, execution of entrepreneurial projects
and report presentations. Practical experiences through hands-on
31
participation of students in business project management will generate
interest and provide a clearer picture of the world of entrepreneurship. The
main learning outcome is the assimilation of culture and entrepreneurship
work ethics in their everyday life. This initiative is made to open the minds
and arouse the spirit of entrepreneurship among target groups that possess
the potential to become successful entrepreneurs. By exposing all students
to entrepreneurial knowledge, it is hoped that it will accelerate the effort to
increase the number of middle-class entrepreneurs in the country.
For more information, please refer to the Co-curriculum Programme Reference Book.
3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option
(a) Malaysian Studies
It is compulsory for all international students to pass the following course
(with a minimum grade ‘C’):
SEA205E - Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of
government and the major contemporary trends in Malaysia. Emphasis will
be given to the current issues in Malaysian politics and the historical and
economic developments and trends of the country. The discussion begins
with a review of the independence process. This is followed by an analysis
of the formation and workings of the major institutions of government –
parliament, judiciary, bureaucracy, and the electoral and party systems.
The scope and extent of Malaysian democracy will be considered,
especially in the light of the current changes and developments in
Malaysian politics. The second part of the course focuses on specific
issues: ethnic relations, national unity and the national ideology;
development and political change; federal-state relations; the role of
religion in Malaysian politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the
modern world system; civil society; law, justice and order; and directions
for the future.
(b) Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units)
International students need to fulfil another 2 units of an option course or
an additional Bahasa Malaysia/English Language course.
32
3.6 Co-Curriculum/Skills Courses/Foreign Language Courses/Options
Students have to choose one of the following (A/B):
(A) Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak/Jazz Band Co-curricular Package
(6 – 10 Units)
Students who choose to take packaged co-curricular courses are required
to complete all levels of the package. It is compulsory for students from
the School of Education to choose a uniformed body co-curricular package
from the list below (excluding Seni Silat Cekak). The
co-curricular packages offered are as follows:
• Palapes (Reserve Officers’ Training Corps) Co-curricular Package
(10 Units) (3 years)
Palapes
Army
Palapes
Navy
Palapes
Air Force
WTD103/3 WTL103/3 WTU103/3
WTD203/3 WTL203/3 WTU203/3
WTD304/4 WTL304/4 WTU304/4
Co-curricular Package (6 Units) (3 years)
Suksis
(Students’ Police
Volunteers)
Seni Silat
Cekak Malaysia Jazz Band
WPD101/2 WCC123/2 WCC108/2
WPD201/2 WCC223/2 WCC208/2
WPD301/2 WCC323/2 WCC308/2
Kelanasiswa
(Rovers)
Bulan Sabit Merah
(Red Crescent)
Ambulans St. John
(St. John
Ambulance)
SISPA
(Civil Defence)
WLK102/2 WBM102/2 WJA102/2 WPA103/2
WLK202/2 WBM202/2 WJA202/2 WPA203/2
WLK302/2 WBM302/2 WJA302/2 WPA303/2
33
(B) Co-curricular/Skills Courses/Options (1 – 6 Units)
All students are encouraged to follow the co-curricular courses and are
given a maximum of 6 units for Community Service, Culture, Sports,
Innovation and Initiatives and Leadership (Students from the School of
Medical Sciences and School of Dental Sciences are required to register
for a specific number of co-curriculum units and at specific times during
their academic year (Please refer to subject 3.1 Summary of University
Requirements). Students from the School of Education must take the
uniformed co-curricular package [excluding Seni Silat Cekak]. Students
who do not enrol for any co-curricular courses or who enrol for only a
portion of the 3 units need to replace these units with skills/option courses.
The co-curricular, skills and option courses offered are as follows:
(i) Community Service, Culture, Sports, Innovation and Initiatives and
Leadership Co-curricular Courses
Packaged
(Students are required to complete all levels)
Community Service
(2 Years)
Jazz Band
(3 Years)
Karate
(3 Semesters)
Taekwondo
(3 Semesters)
WKM101/2 WCC108/2 WSC108/1 WSC115/1
WKM201/2 WCC208/2 WSC208/1 WSC215/1
WCC308/2 WSC308/1 WSC315/1
Non-Packaged (1 Semester)
Culture Sports
WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting) WSC105/1 - Bola Tampar
(Volley Ball)
WCC105/1 - Gamelan WSC106/1 - Golf
WCC107/1 - Guitar WSC110/1 - Memanah (Archery)
WCC109/1 - Koir (Choir) WSC111/1 - Ping Pong
(Table Tennis)
WCC110/1 - Kraftangan (Handcrafting) WSC112/1 - Renang (Swimming)
WCC115/1 - Tarian Moden
(Modern Dance) WSC113/1 - Aerobik (Aerobics)
WCC116/1 - Tarian Tradisional
(Traditional Dance) WSC114/1 - Skuasy (Squash)
WCC117/1 - Teater Moden
(Modern Theatre) WSC116/1 - Tenis (Tennis)
WCC118/1 - Wayang Kulit Melayu
(Malay Shadow Play) WSC119/1 - Badminton
WCC119/1 - Senaman Qigong Asas
(Basic Qigong Exercise)
34
Non-Packaged (1 Semester)
WCC219/1 - Senaman Qigong Pertengahan
(Intermediate Qigong Exercise) WCC124/1 - Sepak Takraw
WCC124/1 - Kompang Berlagu WSC 125/1 - Futsal
WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak (Culinary Arts) WSC 126/1 - Bola Jaring (Netball)
WCC127/1 - Kesenian Muzik Nasyid (Nasyid Musical Arts)
WSC 128/1 – Petanque
WSC 129/1 - Boling Padang
(Lawn Bowl)
Innovation & Initiative WSC 130/1 - Orienteering
WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting) Leadership (Kepimpinan)
WCC110/1 - Kraftangan (Handcrafting) WSC 127/1 - Pengurusan Acara 1
(Event Management 1)
WCC120/1 - Canting Batik (Batik Painting) WSC 227/1 - Pengurusan Acara 2
(Event Management 2)
WCC121/1 - Seni Khat (Calligraphic Art) Public Speaking
WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak (Culinary Arts) WEC 101/1 – Pengucapan Awam
WCC125/1 - Seni Wau Tradisional
(Traditional Kite Art)
WEC 101E/1 – Public Speaking
WCC127/1 - Kesenian Muzik Nasyid
(Art of Nasheed Music)
WCC 129 – Latin Dance
(Cha Cha)
WCC128/1 - Seni Sulaman & Manik Labuci
(Embroidery & Beads Sequins Art)
WCC 130/1 - Seni Fotografi SLR Digital
(Digital SLR Photography Art)
WCC/131/1 - Seni Suntingan Fotografi
(Editing Photography Art)
WCC132/1 – Seni Seramik
(The Art of Ceramics)
(ii) WSU 101/2 - Sustainability: Issues, Challenges & Prospect (2 units)
Course Synopsis
This course introduces and exposes students to the concepts of
sustainable development. The course is aimed at ensuring that the
ability of the next generation to fulfil their needs in the future will not
35
be jeopardized, especially in an era of globalization that is filled with
challenges and rapid advances in information technology. Sustainable
development by definition, involves efforts to maintain the balance
among the three important aspects, i.e. competitive economy, balanced
ecosystem and social integration. For the economic aspect, it touches
on the issues of development, economic growth, economic challenges
of population, agriculture and industrial sector contributions, finance
sector, and also information and technology. Environmental
sustainability, on the other hand, focuses on forest and environmental
management, marine resource management, eco-tourism,
environmental degradation, natural phenomena, global warming, and
also ethics in natural resource management. The social integration
aspect emphasizes the role of the communities in practising
sustainable development in daily life with health management,
security (climate change, epidemics, crime and terrorism) and socio-
economic network. Sustainable development models and case studies
will be discussed too.
(iii) HTV201/2 - Teknik Berfikir (Thinking Techniques)
(iv) Other options/ skills courses as recommended or required by the respective Schools (if any)
(v) English Language Courses
The following courses may be taken as university courses to fulfil the
compulsory English Language requirements (for Band 5 and Band 6
in MUET) or as skills/option courses:
No Code/Unit Course Title
1. LHP451/2 Effective Reading
2. LHP452/2 Business Writing
3. LHP453/2 Creative Writing
4. LHP454/2 Academic Writing
No Code/Unit Course Title
5. LHP455/2 English Pronunciation Skills
6. LHP456/2 Spoken English
7. LHP457/4 Speech Writing and Public Speaking
8. LHP458/2 English for Translation
(Offered only in Semester II)
9. LHP459/2 English for Interpretation
(Offered only in Semester I)
36
(vi) Foreign Language Courses
The foreign language courses offered by the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation can be taken by students as an option or
compulsory courses to fulfil the number of units required for
graduation. Students are not allowed to register for more than one
foreign language course per semester. They must complete at least two
levels of a foreign language course before they are allowed to register
for another foreign language course. However, students are not
required to complete all four levels of one particular foreign language
course. The foreign language courses offered are as follows:
Arabic Chinese Japanese German Spanish
LAA100/2 LAC100/2 LAJ100/2 LAG100/2 LAE100/2
LAA200/2 LAC200/2 LAJ200/2 LAG200/2 LAE200/2
LAA300/2 LAC300/2 LAJ300/2 LAG300/2 LAE300/2
LAA400/2 LAC400/2 LAJ400/2 LAG400/2 LAE400/2
French Thai Tamil Korean
LAP100/2 LAS100/2 LAT100/2 LAK100/2
LAP200/2 LAS200/2 LAT200/2 LAK200/2
LAP300/2 LAS300/2 LAT300/2 LAK300/2
LAP400/2 LAS400/2
37
4.0 COURSES AND PROGRAMMES OFFERED IN SCHOOL OF HEALTH
SCIENCES
4.1 Foundation Courses
Foundation courses are compulsory for all students pursuing the health
science bachelor degrees in School of Health Sciences. These courses
cover the basic knowledge and skills essential for various health related
disciplines and are intended to prepare the students to undertake more
advance courses later on. The total number of units required for
graduation varies according to the respective programmes. Generally, each student is required to take between 16-25 units. Below is the
summary of the Foundation Courses:
No. Course
Code
Course Title Course Offered
Year Semester
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 1 I
2. GTU103/3 Fundamental of Health Informatics 1 I & II
3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 1 II
4. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 1 I & II
5. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetic 1 I
6. GTU202/3 Health and Society 3 I & II
7. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
3 I & II
8. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3 I & II
9. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3 I & II
4.2 Core Courses
The core courses are the major component of the programme of studies
and reflect the specialisation and expertise of each programme. Please
refer to the list of core courses of the respective programme.
4.3 Electives Courses
The purpose of offering elective courses is to ensure that students are
presented with knowledge which not only complement the core courses
but also will enhance and broaden their foundation of knowledge. The
school encourages students to freely select any of the courses offered.
All students of the School of Health Sciences are required to register a
total of 6-39 units of elective courses. The units from electives courses
will contribute to the total number of units for graduation. Students are
reminded to ONLY select courses indicated by the school and to avoid
selecting courses from own programme or any programmes unless
permitted and approved by the School Board. Students are strongly
encouraged to select electives courses offered within their respective
academic year level. They may choose courses from one level lower or
higher than their academic year, though this practice should be guided
closely by academic advisor. The Elective Courses offered by School of
38
Health Sciences are managed by the Interdisciplinary Health Sciences
Unit and are listed as below.
Courses offered as Elective Courses
Semester 1 Semester II
Course
Code
Title of Course Unit Course
Code
Title of Course Unit
GTF101/3 Basic Chemistry 3 GTJ108/2 Health Communication &
Education
2
GEG103/3 Fitness and Health 3 GEG109/2 History of Health Sciences 2
GTX101/3 Introduction to Medical
Radiation
3 GEG114/2
Oral Health
2
GTB224/3 Immunology I 3 GTX103/3 Medical Radiation Physics I 3
GTS202/2 *First Aid and
Cardiopulmonary
Resuscitation (CPR)
2 GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
GEG204/3 Gender Perspectives in
Health
3 GTS202/2 *First Aid and
Cardiopulmonary
Resuscitation (CPR)
2
GEG208/2 Human Resource
Management in Healthcare
Organizations
2 GTS207/3 Principles and Training in
Individual and Team Sports
3
GEG213/3 Stress Management 3 GEG201/2
Women’s Health 2
GEG218/3 Community Development
in Health Promotion
3 GEG208/2 Human Resource
Management in Healthcare
Organizations
2
GEG219/3 Healthcare Management 3 GEG216/3 Development of Health
Services in Malaysia
3
GEG220/2 Occupation Therapy for
People with Disabilities
2 GEG219/3 Healthcare Management 3
GTJ317/2 Principles of Health
Management
2 GTS307/3 Physical Activity, Growth
and Development
3
GEG304/2 Communication & Self
Development
2 GEG302/3 Violence & Society 3
GEG315/3 Fiqh of Health 3 GEG304/2 Communication & Self
Development
2
GTB404/3 Toxicology 3 GEG305/2 Forensic Science 2
GTS407/3 Therapeutic Exercise 3 GEG309/2 Principles of Forensic
Dentistry
2
LAA100/2 Arabic Language I 2 GEG311/2 Botany and Health 2
LAJ100/2 Japanese Language I 2 GEG313/2 Health Economics 2
LAA200/2 Arabic Language II 2 GEG315/3 Fiqh of Health 3
LAJ200/2 Japanese Language II 2 LAA100/2 Arabic Language I 2
LAA200/2 Arabic Language II 2
LAJ100/2 Japanese Language I 2
LAJ200/2 Japanese Language II 2
* GEGxxx/x= Courses are offered only as Elective Course and are subjected to changes.
* GTS202/2 1st semester is only open to Sport Science’s Students; 2nd semester will be opened to all students
39
4.4 Programmes Offered
4.4.1 Status of Students and Level of Study
Students are designated as equivalent to first, second, third or fourth year
according to the total units accumulated as follows:-
Course of Study
Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative
Unit Acquired
(Total Unit
Required for
Graduation)
First Second Third Fourth
Biomedicine
(140 Units)
0 - 36 37 - 76 77 - 113 ≥ 114
Dietetics
(140 Units)
0 - 35 36 - 74 75 - 112 ≥ 113
Nursing
(140 Units)
0 - 36 37 - 75 76 - 114 ≥ 115
Medical Radiation
(140 Units)
0 - 36 37 - 71 72 - 108 ≥ 109
Forensic Science
(145 Units)
0 - 41 42 - 79 80 - 116 ≥ 117
Audiology
(147 Units)
0 - 40 41 - 85 86 - 121 ≥ 122
Speech Pathology
(147 Units)
0 - 38 39 - 76 77 - 116 ≥ 116
Exercise and Sports
Science
(140 Units)
0 - 38 39 - 75 76 - 112 ≥ 113
Nutrition
(140 Units)
0 - 36 37 - 73 74 - 111 ≥ 112
Environmental and Occupational Health
(140 Units)
0 - 40 41 - 79 80 - 113 ≥ 114
4.4.2 Biomedicine Programme
This is a 4-year programme. The total unit required for graduation is 140, which includes core (109 units), elective (16 units) and
university (15 units) courses.
4.4.3 Nursing Programme
This is a 4-year programme requiring a total of 140 units for
graduation. The programme consists of core courses (115 units),
elective courses (10 units) and university courses (15 units).
40
The nursing programme was developed by taking into account the
following criteria:
(i) Fulfilled the requirement of the Malaysian Nursing Board
(MNA) to have sufficient component of clinical practice for
registration. Students who are Registered nurses do not need to
adhere to this requirement.
(ii) The clinical practice components is compulsory for students
who enrolled with matriculation, ‘Sijil Tinggi Pelajaran
Malaysia’ or equivalent to it and other diploma qualifications.
The nursing programme is structured as follows:
Semester 1-6: Courses in Semester 1-6 must be taken by all students.
Registered nurses can be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science
(Nursing) upon completion of 120 units (95 units for core courses, 15
units for university courses and 10 units for elective courses). Registered
nurses may be given unit exemptions of not more than 1/3 of the total
unit requirement for graduation.
Semester 7-8: Students other than registered nurses are required to
undergo clinical practice components over a period of one year in order
to fulfill the MNA registration. These students will then be eligible to be
awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Nursing) upon completion of
140 units.
4.4.4 Forensic Science Programme
This is a 4-year programme requiring a total of 145 units for graduation.
This consists of core courses (124 units), elective courses (6 units) and
university courses (15 units).
4.4.5 Dietetics Programme
This is a 4-year programme requiring 140 units for graduation. It
consists of core courses (113 units), elective courses (12 units) and
university courses (15 units).
4.4.6 Medical Radiation Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 140 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (111 units), elective courses (14
units) and university courses (15 units).
4.4.7 Audiology Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 147 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (122 units), elective courses (10
units) and university courses (15 units).
41
4.4.8 Speech Pathology Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 147 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (122 units), elective courses (10
units) and university courses (15 units).
4.4.9 Exercise and Sports Science Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 140 units for
graduation. It consists of core courses (80 units), elective courses (39
units) and university courses (21 units).
4.4.10 Nutrition Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 140 units for graduation.
It consists of core courses (107 units), elective courses (18 units) and
university courses (15 units).
4.4.11 Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 140 units for graduation.
It consists of core courses (106 units), elective courses (19 units) and
university courses (15 units).
Below is the summary of the unit requirement of all programmes offered
in School of Health Sciences:
Unit Requirements for Graduation
Programme Core
Courses
Elective
Courses
University
Courses
Total
Biomedicine
109 16 15 140
Nursing
115 10 15 140
Forensic Science
124 6 15 145
Dietetics
113 12 15 140
Medical Radiation
111 14 15 140
Audiology 122 10 15 147
Speech Pathology 122 10 15 147
Exercise and Sports
Science
80 39 21 140
Nutrition
107 18 15 140
Environmental and
Occupational Health
106 19 15 140
42
4.5 Graduation Requirements
In order to graduate, student must fulfil both the minimum residence and
the academic requirement such as:-
(a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e
total credits and the required number of credits for each
component in the programme [Core, Elective, University and
Optional (if appropriate) courses].
(b) Obtain a minimum grade points of 2.00 (Grade C) and above
for all Core courses.
(c) Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole
programme.
(d) Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point 2.00 for the language
courses (Bahasa Malaysia and English), Ethnics Relation and
the TITAS courses.
Audiology Programme
School of Health Sciences
43
5.0 MAJOR PROGRAMMES
5.1 AUDIOLOGY
Introduction
This programme aims to produce audiologists who are knowledgeable and able to practise
in the field of audiology to fulfill the needs of public and private sectors. Graduates will be
awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Audiology). This 4-year (8 semesters)
programme includes the theoretical and practical (clinical) learning experience through our
Core University and Elective courses to equip the students to be competent practicing
audiologists. Thus, students will acquire the necessary academic qualification and clinical
skills to become a professional audiologist and play their role as part of the health care
team.
List of Courses of the Audiology Programme
No. Course Code Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Human I 3
2. GTP100/3 Basic Linguistics 3
3. GTP107/3 Language Development 3
4. GTA105/2 Acoustics for Hearing and Speech 2
5. GTA106/2 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech I 2
6. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Human II 3
7. GTP104/3 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing 3
8. GTP108/2 Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology 2
9. GTA107/2 Psychoacoustics 2
10. GTA108/2 Basic Audiology Techniques 2
11. GTA109/2 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech II 2
12. GTP202/3 Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders 3
13. GTP209/2 Phonetics and Phonology 2
14. GTP211/3 Pediatric for Hearing and Speech 3
15. GTP212/2 Abnormal Psychology 2
16. GTA201/2 Audiological Instrumentation 2
17. GTA203/3 Advanced Audiology Techniques 3
18. GTA205/2 Neurology for Hearing and Speech 2
19. GTA208/4 Pediatric Audiology 4
20. GTA209/3 Audiology Clinic I 3
21. GTA210/3 Otology 3
22. GTA211/2 Hearing Screening 2
23. GTA212/3 Basic Hearing Amplification Technology 3
24. GTA213/3 Electrophysiological Tests 3
25. GTP311/3 Counseling for Communication Disorders 3
26. GTA305/3 Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology 3
27. GTA307/3 Audiology Clinic II 3
28. GTA308/2 Evaluation of Balance System 2
Audiology Programme
School of Health Sciences
44
No. Course Code Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme Unit
29. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
30. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
31. GTP316/3 Learning Disabilities 3
32. GTA309/4 Audiology Clinic III 4
33. GTA310/2
Basic Medical Management for Audiologist and Speech
Pathologist
2
34. GTA311/4 Audiological Rehabilitation 4
35. GTA401/6 Research Project 6
36. GTA406/2 Noise and Hearing 2
37. GTA407/5 Audiology Clinic IV 5
38. GTA408/6 Audiology Clinical Placement 6
39. GTA409/2 Audiology Seminar 2
40. GTA410/2 Ethics and Professionalism in Audiology 2
41. GTA411/5 Audiology Clinic V 5
42. GTA412/2 Practice Management for Audiologist and Speech Pathologist 2
Total Unit of Core Courses 122
Programme Learning Outcome:
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Demonstrate fundamental and advanced theoretically and clinically knowledge
in the field of audiological sciences.
PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills in diagnosis and re/habilitative
audiology.
PO3: Display critical and scientific thinking in integrating the audiological knowledge
in assessment, interpretation, management, and re/habilitation aspects of
hearing, balance and related disorders.
PO4: Demonstrate communication skills in dealing with patients, family members and
health-related professionals and other related working environments.
PO5: Participate effectively in multi-disciplinary teams in managing patients with
hearing and balance disorders.
PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conducts and ethical standards and demonstrate
sensitivity to the differences in culture and religion.
PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance clinical services and research
in audiology.
PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills in audiology-related fields and practice systemic
management in clinical audiology.
P09 : Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient
management and health-related professions.
Audiology Programme
School of Health Sciences
45
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 1 Semester 1
Year 1 Semester 2
LKM400/2
LSP300/2
WSCxxx/1
GTU101/3
GTP100/3 GTP107/3
GTA105/2
GTA106/2
GTU105/3
Bahasa Malaysia
Academic English
Co-Curriculum
Structure and Function of Human I
Basic Linguistics Language Development
Acoustics for Hearing and Speech
Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and
Speech I
Behavioural Science and Psychology
2
2
1
3
3 3
2
2
3
WUS101/2
WSCxxx/1
GTU104/3
GTP104/3
GTP108/2
GTA107/2
GTA108/2
GTA109/2
GTU103/3
Entrepreneurship
Co-Curriculum
Structure and Function of Human II
Developmental Psychology for Speech and
Hearing Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech
Pathology
Psychoacoustics
Basic Audiology Techniques
Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and
Speech II
Fundamental of Health Informatics
2
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
21 20
Audiology Programme
School of Health Sciences
46
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
HTU223/2
SHE101/2
GTP202/3
GTP209/2 GTP211/3
GTP212/2
GTA201/2
GTA203/3
GTA205/2
Year 2 Semester 1
TITAS
Ethnic Relations
Introduction to Speech and Language
Disorders
Phonetics and Phonology Pediatric for Hearing and Speech
Abnormal Psychology
Audiological Instrumentation
Advanced Audiology Techniques
Neurology for Hearing and Speech
2
2
3
2 3
2
2
3
2
LSP402/2
Wxxxxx/1
GTA208/4
GTA209/3
GTA210/3 GTA211/2
GTA212/3
GTA213/2
Year 2 Semester 2
Scientific and Medical English
Co-Curriculum
Pediatric Audiology
Audiology Clinic I
Otology Hearing Screening
Basic Hearing Amplification Technology
Electrophysiological Tests
2
1
4
3
3 2
3
3
21 21
Audiology Programme
School of Health Sciences
47
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 3 Semester 1
Year 3 Semester 2
GTA308/2
GTP311/3
GTA305/3
GTA307/3
GTU301/3
GEG304/2
Evaluation of Balance System
Counselling for Communication Disorders
Advanced Hearing
Amplification Technology
Audiology Clinic II
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Communication and Self-Development
2
3
3
3
3
2
GTU302/3
GTU304/3
GTP316/3
GTA309/4
GTA310/2
GTA311/4
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Learning Disabilites
Audiology Clinic III
Basic Medical Management for
Audiologist and Speech Pathologist
Audiological Rehabilitation
3
3
3
4
2
4
16 19
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 4 Semester 1 Year 4 Semester 2
GTA401/6
GTA406/2
GTA407/5
Research Project
Noise and Hearing
Audiology Clinic IV
3
2
5
GTA401/6
GTA410/2
GTA411/5
Research Project
Ethics and Professionalism in Audiology
Audiology Clinic V
3
2
5
GTA408/6
GTA409/2
Audiology Clinical Placement
Audiology Seminar
6
2
GTA412/2 Practice Management for Audiologist and
Speech Pathologist
2
18 12
Biomedicine Programme
School of Health Sciences
48
5.2 BIOMEDICINE
Introduction
The Biomedicine programme is a 4 years or 8 semesters full time programme. At the end
of the programme, graduates are awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Biomedicine).
The programme is multidisciplinary in nature and allows students to explore the latest
information and technology in the fields of Biomedical Sciences. It encompasses all aspects of laboratory diagnosis, disease prevention and research in the fields of Biomedical
Sciences. Industrial training, Biomedical Practicum and Research Project are introduced in
the final stage of the studies to equip the students with the knowledge and skills in the
diagnostic and clinical laboratory, disease prevention and research fields.
This programme is carefully designed to cater for the manpower requirements of both the
private and public sectors of the nation. The curriculum takes cognizance of the need to be
proactive in its approach, whereby curricula of institutions from the US, Europe and
Australia were used as benchmarks. This is to ensure that the curriculum is of quality and
of high standards capable of producing graduates who are competent and globally
competitive.
List of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme
No. Course Code Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU103/3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics 3
3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
4. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3
5. GTB105/3 Human Biochemistry 3
6. GTB106/3 Laboratory Science 3
7. GTB109/3 Cell Biology Techniques 3
8. GTB204/3 Molecular Biology Techniques 3
9. GTB212/3 Basic Microbiology 3
10. GTB218/3 Immunology II 3
11. GTB219/3 Pharmacology I 3
12. GTB221/3 Basic Haematology 3
13. GTB222/4 Pathology 4
14. GTB224/3 Immunology I 3
15. GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
16. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
17. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
18. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
19. GTB307/3 Medical Parasitology 3
20. GTB310/3 Clinical Biochemistry 3
Biomedicine Programme
School of Health Sciences
49
No. Course Code Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme Unit
21. GTB316/3 Transfusion Science and Blood Banking 3
22. GTB317/3 Clinical and Laboratory Haematology 3
23. GTB318/3 Pharmacology II 3
24. GTB319/3 Toxicology 3
25. GTB320/3 Medical Virology and Mycology 3
26. GTB321/3 Clinical Diagnostic Laboratory Management 3
27. GTB322/3 Medical Bacteriology 3
28. GTB408/9 Biomedical Practicum 9
29. GTB411/8 Research Project 8
30. GTB412/10 Industrial Training 10
Total Credit Unit of Core Courses 109
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge in biomedical sciences and display theoretical and
practical skills in diagnosis and research.
PO2: Perform laboratory diagnostic tests based on standard protocols; manage
diagnostic and/or research laboratories; perform research projects under
supervision; and utilise up-to-date information and communication technologies.
PO3: Demonstrate and apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems
and making decisions in diagnostic laboratories.
PO4: Apply communication skills at working environment in a diagnostic laboratory,
medical and research institutions.
PO5: Work in groups to solve health-related problems and participate as a team player
in community healthcare and services.
PO6: Demonstrate ethics and professional values in performing diagnostic and solving
problems in laboratory investigations.
PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance laboratory services and
research in biomedical sciences.
PO8: Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship skills in biomedical fields
and relevant professions.
PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in activities related to teaching, service and research in biomedical sciences.
Biomedicine Programme
School of Health Sciences
50
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 1 Semester 1
Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3 GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3 GTB105/3 Human Biochemistry 3
GTU103/3
GTB106/3
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Laboratory Science
3
3
GTB109/3 Cell Biology Techniques 3
12 9
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 2 Semester 1
Year 2 Semester II
GTB204/3
GTB221/3
GTB224/3
Molecular Biology Techniques
Basic Haematology
Immunology I
3
3
3
GTB212/3
GTB218/3
GTB219/3
GTB225/3
Basic Microbiology
Immunology II
Pharmacology I
Epidemiology
3
3
3
3
GTB222/4
Pathology
4
9 16
Biomedicine Programme
School of Health Sciences
51
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 3 Semester 1
Year 3 Semester II
GTU301/3
GTB317/3
GTB318/3
GTB319/3
GTB321/3 GTB322/3
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Clinical and Laboratory Haematology
Pharmacology II
Toxicology
Clinical Diagnostic Laboratory Management Medical Bacteriology
3
3
3
3
3 3
GTU302/3
GTU304/3
GTB307/3
GTB310/3
GTB316/3
GTB320/3
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Medical Parasitology
Clinical Biochemistry
Transfusion Science and Blood Banking
Medical Virology and Mycology
3
3
3
3
3
3
18 18
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 4 Semester 1
Year 4 Semester II
GTB408/9
GTB411/8
Biomedical Practicum
Research Project
9
4
GTB411/8
GTB412/10
Research Project
Industrial Training
4
10
13 14
Dietetics Programme
School of Health Sciences
52
5.3 DIETETICS
Introduction
The Dietetics programme is a full time programme offered over 4 years or 8 semesters.
Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Dietetics). The programme will
help to fullfil the needs for dieticians in Malaysia. Students will be exposed to all aspects
of food care and nutritional requirements for patients especially those requiring special
diets as well as knowledge of community nutritional requirements. The graduates are expected to be able to function as dietitians as well as consultants in related fields and in
the field of nutrition as therapeutic food.
Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme
No. Course
Code Title of Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU103/3 Fundamental of Health Informatics 3
3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
4. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Sciences 3
5. GTU202/3 Health and Society 3
6. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
7. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
8. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
9. GTN102/4 Food Science 4
10. GTN202/3 Principles of Food Preparation 3
11. GTN208/3 Nutritional Biochemistry 3
12. GTN213/4 Principles of Nutrition 4
13. GTN214/4 Nutrition in a Life Cycle 4
14. GTN215/3 Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3
15. GTN216/4 Food Analysis 4
16. GTN217/4 Assessment of Nutritional Status 4
17. GTN309/3 Nutrition and Diseases 3
18. GTN311/3 Food Service Management 3
19. GTN315/4 Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum 4
20. GTN316/3 Food and Nutritional Toxicology 3
21. GTN317/4 Food Microbiology 4
22. GTN407/3 Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar 3
23. GTN408/4 Food Service and Industry Practicum 4
24. GTD212/3 Dietetics Skills and Communication 3
25. GTD311/3 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I 3
26. GTD321/3 Therapeutic Diet Preparation 3
27. GTD323/3 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II 3
Dietetics Programme
School of Health Sciences
53
No. Course
Code Title of Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme Unit
28. GTD324/3 Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I 3
29. GTD325/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I 3
30. GTD326/3 Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I 3
31. GTD406/3 Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II 3
32. GTD407/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II 3
33. GTD408/3 Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II 3
34. GTD410/6 Research Projects in Dietetics 6
Total Unit 113
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply knowledge in nutrition and dietetics for problem identification, formulation
and solution.
PO2: Apply in-depth dietetics knowledge to analyse, interpret, evaluate and improve
nutritional status of patients in hospital and community in general.
PO3: Demonstrate critical thinking and scientific knowledge in dietetics.
PO4: Communicate effectively as an individual and in groups.
PO5: Demonstrate the ability to work as a team in healthcare settings.
PO6: Demonstrate professional ethics and moral values in their profession.
PO7: Undertake professional development and engage in life-long learning.
PO8: Integrate knowledge in nutrition and dietetics in entrepreneurship.
PO9: Demonstrate the ability to be a leader among the healthcare professionals.
Dietetics Programme
School of Health Sciences
54
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 1 Semester 1
Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3 GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
GTU103/3 Fundamental of Health Informatics 3 GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Sciences 3
GTN102/4 Food Science 4 GTU202/3 Health and Society 3
GTN213/4 Principles of Nutrition 4
10 13
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 2 Semester 1
Year 2 Semester II
GTN202/3
GTN208/3
Principles of Food Preparation
Nutritional Biochemistry
3
3
GTN216/4
GTN217/4
Food Analysis
Assessment of Nutritional Status
4
4
GTN214/4 Nutrition in a Life Cycle 4 GTD212/3 Dietetics Skills and Communication 3
GTN215/3 Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3 GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
3
13 14
Dietetics Programme
School of Health Sciences
55
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 3 Semester 1
Year 3 Semester II
GTN315/4 Community Nutrition and Dietetics
Services Practicum
4 GTD324/3
GTN311/3
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I
Food Service Management
3
3
GTN309/3
GTD311/3
GTN316/3
GTU302/3
Nutrition and Disease
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
Food and Nutritional Toxicology
Biostatistics
3
3
3
3
GTD323/3
GTD321/3
GTN317/4
GTU304/3
Principles of Medical Nutrition
Therapy II
Therapeutic Diet Preparation
Food Microbiology
Research Methodology
3
3
4
3
16 19
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 4 Semester 1
Year 4 Semester II
GTD325/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I 3 GTD407/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II 3
GTN408/4 Food Service and Industry Practicum 4 GTD408/3 Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II 3
GTD326/3 Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I 3 GTN407/3 Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar 3
GTD406/3
GTD410/6
Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II
Research Projects in Dietetics
3
(3)
GTD410/6
Research Projects in Dietetics (3)
16 12
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
School of Health Sciences
56
5.4 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Introduction
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme is offered by the School of Health
Sciences, as a full time 4 years (8 semesters) undergraduate academic programme. Students
will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Environmental and Occupational Health)
upon completion of the programme.
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme is an integrative academic
programme involves multidisciplinary fields. The tools of science and technology are used
to solve human health problems related to the environmental and occupational issues.
Knowledge in the field of environmental and occupational health will serve as a
competitive advantage that enables the graduates to work effectively with medical
professionals involved in the treatment and rehabilitation of individuals with
environmental and occupational related problems. The designation and development of the
programme is aimed to fulfill the specific needs of potential employers, regulators and
modern society in general. The students will be trained on international quality
management systems, including ISO 9001, ISO 14001, OSHAS 18000, ILO-OSH 2001
and MS 1722: 2003.
Students will also be exposed to knowledge in the field of quantitative chemistry with
special attention on skills to handle analytical instruments that measure pollutants in
outdoor and indoor samples, independently. Students will gain real life experience through
6 months Smart Partnership Scheme established between the university, industries and
government institutions.
List of Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
No.
Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Environmental and
Occupational Health Programme
Unit
1. GTK101/3 Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health 3
2. GTK104/3 Environmental Health 3
3. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
4. GTU103/3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics 3
5. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
6. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioral Science 3
7. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3
8. GTB106/3 Laboratory Science 3
9. GTF101/3 Basic Chemistry 3
10. GTK201/3 Occupational Safety 3
11. GTK202/3 Pollution and Health 3
12. GTK203/3 Occupational Health 3
13. GTK204/4 Environmental and Occupational Law 4
14. GTU202/3 Health and Society 3
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
School of Health Sciences
57
No.
Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Environmental and
Occupational Health Programme
Unit
15. GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
16. GTK301/4 Environmental and Occupational Toxicology 4
17. GTK302/3 Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering
Perspectives
3
18. GTK303/3 Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management 3
19. GTK305/3 Environmental and Occupational Health Related Diseases 3
20. GTK307/3 Occupational Rehabilitation 3
21. GTK310/4 Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants 4
22. GTK311/4 Environmental and Occupational Emergency 4
23. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
24. GTU302/3 Biostatistic 3
25. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
26. GTK402/8 Research Project 8
27. GTK404/3 Environmental Management 3
28. GTK406/12 Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum 12
29. GTK408/4 Occupational Safety and Health Management 4
Total Unit of Core Courses 106
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
School of Health Sciences
58
Programme Learning Outcome (PO)
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills
in all situations involving environmental and occupational hazards and safety.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills and capable in creating perception in order to identify
environmental and occupational health’s problems.
PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking in acquiring environmental and occupational
health information and apply scientific knowledge in research towards effective
services.
PO4: Apply communication skills effectively at any working environment in all
organizations, industrials and society.
PO5: Demonstrate social skills and participate as team player in order to catch the
organization goal and able to solve environmental and occupational health’s
problem as a group.
PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes, and professional ethics in environmental and
occupational safety, applications and services.
PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and identify resources to enhance services
and research in environmental and occupational health.
PO8: Identify and manipulate entrepreneur resources and skills in environmental and
occupational health related-skills and professions to facilitate society group in need.
PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership as healthcare professionals in activities related to
environmental, occupational, healthcare and research.
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
School of Health Sciences
59
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 1 Semester 1
Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3
GTU106/3
GTK101/3
GTB106/3
GTF101/3
Structure and Function of Humans I
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to
Environmental and Occupational Health
Laboratory Science
Basic Chemistry
3
3
3
3
3
GTU103/3
GTU104/3
GTU105/3
GTK104/3
Fundamentals of Health Informatics
Structure and Function of Humans II
Psychology and Behavioural Science
Environmental Health
3
3
3
3
15 12
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 2 Semester 1
Year 2 Semester II
GTU202/3
GTK201/3
GTK202/3
Health and Society
Occupational Safety
Pollution and Health
3
3
3
GTU302/3
GTU304/3
GTK203/3
GTK204/4
GTB225/3
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Occupational Health
Environmental and Occupational Law
Epidemiology
3
3
3
4
3
9 16
Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
School of Health Sciences
60
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 3 Semester 1
Year 3 Semester II
GTU301/3
GTK302/3
GTK310/4
GTK402/8
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Environmental and Occupational Health from
Engineering Perspectives
Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants
Research Project
3
3
4
4
GTK301/4
GTK303/3
GTK311/4
GTK402/8
Environmental and Occupational
Toxicology
Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial
Waste Management
Environmental and Occupational
Emergencies
Research Project
4
3
4
4
14 15
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 4 Semester 1
Year 4 Semester II
GTK307/3
GTK305/3
GTK404/3
GTK408/4
Occupational Rehabilitation
Environmental and Occupational Health Related
Diseases Environmental Management
Occupational Safety and Health Management
3
3
3
4
GTK406/12 Environmental and Occupational Health
Practicum
12
13 12
Exercise and Sports Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
61
5.5 EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE Introduction
The objective of this programme is to produce graduates who are academically sound and
able to function as the experts in the field of exercise and sports science relevant to the
requirement of the public and private sectors of the industry. It also takes into cognisance
the incorporation and assistance to be physically active in order to achieve the national
aspiration of creating healthy citizens.
Students undergoing this programme are expected to acquire a high level of academic
competency and knowledge that is at par with graduates of similar institutions within and
outside the country. The uniqueness of this programme is that it allows the graduates to be
flexible and capable of continued development in their specific career. This is based on the
curriculum design that is aimed at strengthening the knowledge of exercise and sports
sciences while at the same time expose students to health and sporting events relevant to
the field.
List of Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme
No.
Course
Code Title of Core Courses in the Exercise and Sports Science
Programme
Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU103/3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics 3
3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
4. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioral Science 3
5. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3
6. GTS101/2 Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science 2
7. GTS102/3 Sociology and Philosophy of Sports 3
8. GTS201/3 Exercise Physiology 3
9. GTS205/3 Sports Psychology 3
10. GTS206/3 Sports Training Methodology 3
11. GTS208/3 Kinanthropometry, Tests & Measurements for Sports
Science
3
12. GTN213/4 Principles of Nutrition 4
13. GTS308/2 Applied Sports Physiology 2
14. GTS311/3 Sports Nutrition 3
15. GTS312/3 Sports Injuries and Rehabilition 3
16. GTS313/3 Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology 3
17. GTS302/2 Motor Learning 2
18. GTS315/3 Coaching Science and Performance Analysis 3
19. GTS316/3 Adapted Physical Activity 3
20. GTS317/3 Sports Management 3
21. GTS401/3 Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription 3
22. GTS409/10 Research Project 10
Exercise and Sports Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
62
No.
Course
Code Title of Core Courses in the Exercise and Sports Science
Programme
Unit
23. GTS410/3 Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices 3
24. GTS411/6 Industrial Training 6
Total Unit of Core Courses 80
Programme Learning Outcomes
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Possess comprehensive knowledge with a strong foundation in exercise and sports
physiology.
PO2: Proficiently identify and apply the appropriate tests and technical analysis in
exercise and sports science.
PO3: Demonstrate analytical thinking, application of knowledge and problem-solving in
research laboratories and at the actual playing field.
PO4: Display professional communication skills for accurate information dissemination.
PO5: Provide professional services to aid optimum health and fitness for the community.
PO6: Demonstrate responsibility, accountability and portray professional ethics and
noble values.
PO7: Apply continuous learning and exploration of new knowledge in line with the latest
development.
PO8: Incorporate management and entrepreneurship skills that will branch out as other
career option s related to the field.
PO9: Display leadership and team management skills in taking charge of group tasks
and in community.
Exercise and Sports Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
63
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 1 Semester 1 Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3 GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
GTU103/3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics 3 GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3
GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3 GTS102/3 Sociology and Philosophy of Sports 3
GTS101/2 Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science 2
11 9
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 2 Semester 1 Year 2 Semester II
GTS201/3 Exercise Physiology 3 GTS206/3 Sports Training Methodology 3
4 GTS205/3 Sports Psychology 3 GTN213/4 Principle of Nutrition
GTS202/2* First Aid and CPR 2 GTS208/3 Kinanthropometry, Tests and Measurements
for Sports Science
3
GTU202/3* Health and Society 3 GTS207/3* Individual and Team Sports (Badminton,
Volleyball & Soccer) 3
GTB224/3* Immunology I 3
14 13 *Compulsory elective courses for Exercise and Sports Science students
Exercise and Sports Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
64
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 3 Semester 1 Year 3 Semester II
GTS312/3 Sports Injuries and Rehabilition 3 GTS308/2 Applied Sports Physiology 2
GTS313/3 Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology 3 GTS311/3 Sports Nutrition 3
GTS302/2 Motor Learning 2 GTS315/3 Coaching Science and Performance Analysis 3
GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3 GTS316/3 Adapted Physical Activity 3
GTU304/3* Research Methodology 3 GTS317/3
GTS314/3*
Sports Management
Physical Activity Growth and Development
3
3
GTU302/3* Biostatistics 3
17 17
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 4 Semester 1 Year 4 Semester II
GTS401/3 Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription 3 GTS409/10 Research Project 5
GTS409/10 Research Project 5 GTS411/6 Industrial Training 6
GTS410/2 Contemporary Issues in Sports Science
Practices
3
GTS407/3* Therapeutic Exercises 3
14 11 *Compulsory elective courses for Exercise and Sports Science students
Medical Radiation Programme
School of Health Sciences
65
5.6 MEDICAL RADIATION
Introduction
The Bachelor of Health Science (Medical Radiation) is a 4-year (8 semesters) full time
academic programme which has been offered since academic year 2001/2002 to students
with qualification of A-level, STPM, matriculation, diploma in radiography or equivalent.
The government of Malaysia has accredited this programme since 2004.
This programme provides theoretical and practical training experiences, which will allow
students to understand, able to explain and utilise ionising and non-ionising radiation in the
diagnosis and treatment of patients. The offering of this programme is expected to assist in
fulfilling the national requirements for trained personnel in the medical radiation science
disciplines. This programme opens up career opportunities in the field of diagnostic
radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy and medical radiation protection which required
knowledge and skills in these areas in order to ensure the safety of the graduates, medical
and health professionals, patients and members of the general public.
The students are required to complete a total of 140 units for the purpose of graduation.
The whole programme consists of 111 units of core courses, 15 units of university courses
and 14 units of elective courses.
List of Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Medical Radiation
Programme
Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU103/3 Fundamental of Health Informatics 3
3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
4. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioral Sciences 3
5. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3
6. GTX104/4 Introduction to Medical Radiation 4
7. GTX105/4 Medical Radiation Physics I 4
8. GTX106/3 Mathematics of Radiation Science I 3
9. GTX213/3 Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine 3
10. GTX214/3 Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology 3
11. GTX215/4 Medical Radiation Physics II 4
12. GTX216/3 Radiographic Anatomy 3
13. GTX217/3 Mathematics of Radiation Science II 3
14. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
15. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
16. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
17. GTX307/3 Radiation Protection and Safety II 3
18. GTX321/4 Imaging Techniques I 4
19. GTX322/3 Radiation Protection and Safety I 3
20. GTX323/3 Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry 3
Medical Radiation Programme
School of Health Sciences
66
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Medical Radiation
Programme
Unit
21. GTX324/4 Diagnostic Radiology Imaging 4
22. GTX325/4 Nuclear Medicine Imaging 4
23. GTX326/4 Principles of Radiotherapy 4
24. GTX327/3 Brachytherapy 3
25. GTX407/3 Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II 3
26. GTX408/3 Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy 3
27. GTX410/4 Imaging Techniques II 4
28. GTX411/4 Radiotherapy Techniques 4
29. GTX412/3 Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques 3
30. GTX414/3 Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I 3
31. GTX415/8 Research Project 8
32. GTX416/4 Professional Training 4
Total Unit of Core Courses 111
Programme Learning Outcomes
At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply comprehensive knowledge in radiotherapy, medical imaging (including
nuclear medicine) and radiation protection.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills in medical imaging and radiotherapy competently,
included implementation of corrective actions.
PO3: Demonstrate thinking skills and provide solutions to address challenges in medical imaging and radiotherapy practices using relevant techniques involving
critical and lateral thinking.
PO4: Apply communicate skills effectively in verbal and written forms with healthcare
professionals and the stakeholders and present information and findings
coherently.
PO5: Demonstrate social skills and collaborate with other healthcare professionals.
PO6: Comply with the legal, ethical principles and the professional codes of conduct in
medical imaging, nuclear medicine and radiotherapy and adherence to radiation
safety requirements and regulations.
PO7: Apply and engage in principles of lifelong learning in academic and career
development; conduct research and able to utilise ICT and information
management system to enhance their medical imaging, nuclear medicine and
radiotherapy practice and skills.
PO8: Apply broad business and real world perspectives in workplace and everyday
activities and demonstrate entrepreneurial skills.
PO9: Demonstrate sensitivities and responsibilities toward the community, culture,
religion and environment. Also able to show leadership.
Medical Radiation Programme
School of Health Sciences
67
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 1 Semester I Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3
GTU103/3
GTU105/3
GTU106/3 GTX104/4
Structure and Function of Humans I
Fundamental of Health Informatics
Psychology and Behavioral Sciences
Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Medical Radiation
3
3
3
3 4
GTU104/3
GTX105/4
GTX106/3
Structure and Function of Humans II
Medical Radiation Physics I
Mathematics of Radiation Science I
3
4
3
16 10
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 2 Semester I Year 2 Semester II
GTX215/4 Medical Radiation Physics II 4 GTX213/3
GTX214/3
GTX216/3
GTX217/3
Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine
Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology
Radiographic Anatomy
Mathematics of Radiation Science II
3
3
3
3
4 12
Medical Radiation Programme
School of Health Sciences
68
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 3 Semester I Year 3 Semester II
GTU304/3
GTX322/3
GTX323/3
GTX324/4
GTX325/4
Research Methodology
Radiation Protection and Safety I
Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry
Diagnostic Radiology Imaging
Nuclear Medicine Imaging
3
3
3
4
4
GTU301/3
GTU302/3
GTX307/3
GTX321/4
GTX326/4 GTX327/3
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Biostatistics
Radiation Protection and Safety II
Imaging Techniques I
Principles of Radiotherapy Brakiterapi
3
3
3
4
4 3
17 20
Code Courses Unit Code Courses Unit
Year 4 Semester I Year 4 Semester II
GTX410/4
GTX412/3
GTX414/3
GTX415/8
GTX416/4
Imaging Techniques II
Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques
Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I
*Research Project
Professional Training
4
3
3
4
4
GTX415/8
GTX407/3
GTX408/3
GTX411/4
*Research Project
Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II
Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in
Radiotherapy
Radiotherapy Techniques
4
3
3
4
18 14
Nursing Programme
School of Health Sciences
69
5.7 NURSING
Introduction
The Bachelor of Health Science (Nursing) is one of the programmes offered by the School
of Health Sciences, USM.
This is a 4-year (8-semester) programme. It consists of the following components:
(a) Biological Sciences
(b) Behavioural Sciences
(c) Nursing Sciences
(d) Clinical Skills
(e) Computer Skills
(f) Research and Scientific Writing Skills
(g) Communication and Information Distribution Skills
(h) Critical Thinking and Problem Solving Skills
(i) Co-Curricular Activities
(j) Social Skills
(k) Teaching and Patient Management Skills
These components are incorporated into the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic
knowledge of nursing. In addition, scientific knowledge and evidenced-based care aid in
promoting competent, independent and safe practitioners. The graduates of this programme
are expected to be of calibre, innovative, proactive, with critical thinking and problem solving abilities. The university and elective courses enable the graduates to expand their
mind set and horizon.
Nursing Programme
School of Health Sciences
70
List of Core Courses of the Nursing Programme
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Course Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
3. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3
4. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3
5. GTJ101/4 Nursing Foundation I 4
6. GTJ109/4 Nursing Foundation II 4
7. GTU202/3 Health and Society 3
8. GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
9. GTB219/3 Pharmacology I 3
10. GTB212/3 Basic Microbiology 3
11. GTJ205/4 Nursing Foundation III 4
12. GTJ210/3 Primary Health Care, Family and Community 3
13. GTJ213/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum I 3
14. GTJ214/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) 3
15. GTJ215/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastroenterology and Nephro-
Urology)
3
16. GTJ216/3 Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing 3
17. GTJ217/2 Principles of Health Management 2
18. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
19. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
20. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
21. GTJ319/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum II 3
22. GTJ320/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) 3
23. GTJ321/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology
and Ophthalmology)
3
24. GTJ322/3 Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing 3
25. GTJ323/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology,
Hematology and Oncology)
3
26. GTJ324/3 Critical Care Nursing 3
27. GTJ325/3 Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing 3
28. GTJ326/3 Gerontological Nursing 3
29. GTJ327/3 Nursing Education 3
30. GTJ405/5 Medical Nursing Practicum 5
31. GTJ406/4 Surgical Nursing Practicum 4
32. GTJ407/4 Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum 4
33. GTJ408/4 Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum 4
34. GTJ409/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum III 3
35. GTJ410/6 Research Project (one academic session) 6
Total Units 115
Nursing Programme
School of Health Sciences
71
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1 - Demonstrate application of knowledge in nursing profession.
PO2 - Practice holistic, competent and safe nursing practices.
PO3 - Acquire critical thinking and problem solving skills to make appropriate decision in
nursing practice and management.
PO4 - Communicate effectively in every level of the organisation and society.
PO5 - Practice social responsibilities as a team member in nursing managment of patients.
PO6 - Apply learned nursing knowledge in a professional and ethical manner.
PO7 - Practice continous lifelong learning in nursing profession.
PO8 - Apply scientific and analytical thinking in research and entrepreneurship for
sustainability.
PO9 - Acquire effective management principles and demonstrate effective leadership.
Nursing Programme
School of Health Sciences
72
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 1 Semester 1 Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3 GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3 GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3 GTJ109/4 Nursing Foundation II 4
GTJ101/4 Nursing Foundation I 4
13 10
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 2 Semester 1 Year 2 Semester II
GTU202/3 Health and Society 3 GTB212/3 Basic Microbiology 3
GTJ205/4 Nursing Foundation III 4 GTB219/3 Pharmacology I 3
GTJ210/3 Primary Health Care, Family and Community 3 GTJ214/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and
Respiratory)
3
GTJ213/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum I 3 GTJ215/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastroenterology
and Nephro/Urology)
3
GTJ216/3 Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing 3
GTJ217/2 Principles of Health Management 2
13 17
Nursing Programme
School of Health Sciences
73
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 3 Semester 1 Year 3 Semester II
GTU301/3
GTU302/3
GTU304/3
GTJ319/3
Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals
Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Nursing Foundation Practicum II
3
3
3
3
GTJ323/3
GTJ324/3
GTJ325/3
Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology,
Immunology, Hematology and Oncology)
Critical Care Nursing
Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing
3
3
3
GTJ320/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and
Musculoskeletal)
3 GTJ326/3 Gerontological Nursing 3
GTJ321/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology,
Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology)
3 GTJ327/3 Nursing Education 3
GTJ322/3 Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing 3
21 15
Code Core Course Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 4 Semester 1 Year 4 Semester II
GTJ405/5
GTJ406/4
Medical Nursing Practicum
Surgical Nursing Practicum
5
4
GTJ407/4 Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum 4
GTJ409/3
*GTJ410/6
Nursing Foundation Practicum III
Research Project (one academic session)
3
3
GTJ408/4 Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing
Practicum 4
*GTJ410/6 Research Project (one academic session) 3
15 11
*Registered nurses are required to undertake research project (one academic session) in Year 3 (Semester 1) and are exempted from the practicum courses (the whole
of Year 4). While matriculation and STPM students must undertake these courses in Year 4 (Semester 1 and 2).
Nutrition Programme
School of Health Sciences
74
5.8 NUTRITION
Introduction
The Nutrition programme offers a 4-year (8 semesters) full time course leading to a
Bachelor of Health Science (Nutrition). The offering of the programme is to cater the needs
of nutritionists in Malaysia.
The purpose of the programme is to deliver knowledge in the human nutrition. It focuses
towards community nutrition as well as new emerging nutrition area in Malaysia. It
provides an academic platform, able to produce versatile graduates and fulfil the needs of future job market. The programme applies multidisciplinary approaches, and is taught by
experts from basic sciences, food science and dietetics, medical, social science and
community services.
Students will be taught of every aspect of food, dietary and nutrient requirement, evaluation
of nutritional status and issues of lifelong nutrition cycle. Students will also learn the
problems of nutrition in a community and methods in overcoming these problems. The
research component will also be covered and students are required to conduct a research
project in the final year. Teaching is conducted via lectures, seminar, practical, problem-
based learning and self-directed learning.
List of Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU103/3 Fundamental of Health Informatics 3
3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
4. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3
5. GTU202/3 Health and Society 3
6. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3
7. GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
8. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
9. GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
10. GTN102/4 Food Science 4
11. GTN202/3 Principle of Food Preparation 3
12. GTN208/3 Nutrition Biochemistry 3
13. GTN213/4 Principle of Nutrition 4
14. GTN214/4 Nutrition in a Life Cycle 4
15. GTN215/3 Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3
16. GTN216/4 Food Analysis 4
17. GTN217/4 Assessment of Nutritional Status 4
18. GTN309/3 Nutrition and Disease 3
19. GTN311/3 Food Service Management 3
Nutrition Programme
School of Health Sciences
75
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme Unit
20. GTN315/4 Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum 4
21. GTN316/3 Food and Nutritional Toxicology 3
22. GTN317/4 Food Microbiology 4
23. GTN318/3 Nutrition Anthropology 3
24. GTN405/3 Current Issues in Nutrition 3
25. GTN407/3 Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars 3
26. GTN408/4 Food Services and Industry Practicum 4
27. GTN409/12 Research Project in Nutrition 12
28. GTD212/3 Dietetic Skills and Communication 3
29. GTD311/3 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I 3
30. GTD323/3 Principles in Medical Nutrition Therapy II 3
Total Unit for Core Courses 107
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1 : Apply comprehensive theoritical knowledge in the field of nutrition to solve
nutrition issues and challenges in the related field.
PO2 : Demonstrate technical skills in analysing, applying and solving nutritional
problems in community and uptake intervension and research.
PO3 : Apply critical and scientific skills in promoting nutritional intervension and
produce educational tools and guideline in nutritional field.
PO4 : Apply communication skills in presenting results of analysis to stakeholder.
PO5 : Work in groups as healthcare profesionals and sensitivite towards community
during routine work.
PO6 : Demonstrate ethical and profesional values in nutritional field and abide by safety
rules.
PO7 : Demonstrate ability using communicational and knowledge management for
lifelong career development.
PO8 : Display interpreneurship skills to cultivate innovation and creativity as well as
good management practice in decision making and planning.
PO9 : Demonstrate and apply leadership skills during community projects in promoting
nutritional knowledge for healthcare purposes.
Nutrition Programme
School of Health Sciences
76
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 1 Semester 1 Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3 GTU103/3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics 3
GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3 GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
GTN102/4 Food Science 4 GTU202/3 Health and Society 3
GTB225/3 Epidemiology 3
GTN213/4 Principles of Nutrition 4
10 16
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 2 Semester 1 Year 2 Semester II
GTN202/3 Principles of Food Preparation 3 GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health
Professionals
3
GTN208/3 Nutrition Biochemistry 3 GTN216/4 Food Analysis 4
GTN214/4 Nutrition in a Life Cycle 4 GTN217/4 Assessment of Nutritional Status 4
GTN215/3 Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3 GTD212/3 Dietetic Skills and Communication 3
13 14
Nutrition Programme
School of Health Sciences
77
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 3 Semester 1 Year 3 Semester II
GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3 GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
GTN309/3
GTN315/4
GTN316/3
GTD311/3
Nutrition and Disease
Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services
Practicum
Food and Nutritional Toxicology
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
3
4
3
3
GTN311/3
GTN317/4
GTN318/3
GTD323/3
Food Service Management
Food Microbiology
Nutrition Anthropology
Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy
II
3
4
3
3
16 16
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 4 Semester 1 Year 4 Semester II
GTN408/4 Food Services and Industry Practicum 4 GTN405/3
GTN407/3
Current Issues in Nutrition
Nutrition and Dietetic Seminar
3
3
GTN409/12 Research Project in Nutrition (6) GTN409/12 Research Project in Nutrition (6)
10 12
Speech Pathology Programme
School of Health Sciences
78
5.9 SPEECH PATHOLOGY
Introduction
Speech pathology is a health science profession that deals with the identification,
assessment, diagnosis, intervention and management of communication disorders
(disorders of language, speech sounds, fluency and voice) and swallowing problems.
Speech Pathology Programme provides an academic programme for students to obtain
Bachelor of Health Science (Speech Pathology) as a qualification to work as the speech-
language pathologist. The main aim of this programme is to produce professionals who
have the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. The students will
also develop a sense of professionalism to ensure ethical practices are provided to the
public and to disseminate the knowledge of speech sciences for sustainable development
and society welfare. In this 4-year professional programme, students will undertake
programme core courses that cover topics on communication sciences and disorders,
medical and health sciences, linguistics, education, psychology and research, plus several
elective and university courses. The students will also have to accumulate 400 clinical educational hours and 250 clinical contact hours during clinical years, i.e. from Year 2 to
Year 4 and to complete a research project during the final year.
List of Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Speech Pathology
Programme
Unit
1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
3. GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3
4. GTU302/3 Biostatistic 3
5. GTA104/2 Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech I 2
6. GTA105/2 Acoustic for Hearing and Speech 2
7. GTA109/2 Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech II 2
8. GTA107/2 Psychoacoustics 2
9. GTA108/2 Basic Audiology Techniques 2
10. GTP104/3 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing 3
11. GTP100/3 Basic Linguistics 3
12. GTP109/3 Language Development 3
13. GTP110/2 Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology 2
14. GTP111/3 Applied Linguistics for Speech Pathology 3
15. GTA205/2 Neurology for Hearing and Speech 2
16. GTA210/3 Otology 3
17. GTP202/3 Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders 3
18. GTP203/2 Speech Pathology Clinic I 2
19. GTP207/2 Speech Pathology Clinic II 2
20. GTP209/2 Phonetics and Phonology 2
Speech Pathology Programme
School of Health Sciences
79
No. Course
Code
Title of Core Courses in the Speech Pathology
Programme
Unit
21. GTP210/2 Clinical Linguistics 2
22. GTP211/3 Pediatric for Hearing and Speech 3
23. GTP212/2 Abnormal Psychology 2
24. GTP213/3 Pediatrics Language Disorders 3
25. GTP214/3 Speech Sound Disorders 3
26. GTP215/3 Hearing Impairment 3
27. GTP216/2 Psycholinguistics 2
28. GTP303/2 Neuropsychology 2
29. GTP304/3 Speech Pathology Clinic III 3
30. GTP306/3 Voice and Resonance Disorders 3
31. GTP311/3 Counseling for Communication Disorders 3
32. GTP312/2 Augmentative and Alternative Communication 2
33. GTP313/3 Acquired Language Disorders 3
34. GTP314/2 Motor Speech Disorders 2
35. GTP315/3 Speech Pathology Clinic IV 3
36. GTP316/3 Learning Disabilities 3
37. GTP317/2 Swallowing Problems 2
38. GTP402/6 Research Project 6
39. GTP403/6 Speech Pathology Clinic V 6
40. GTP406/6 Speech Pathology Clinic VI 6
41. GTP408/2 Fluency Disorders 2
42. GTP409/6 Speech Pathology Clinical Placement 6
43. GTP410/2 Ethics and Professionalism for Speech Pathology 2
Total Unit of Core Courses 122
Speech Pathology Programme
School of Health Sciences
80
Programme Learning Outcome
Upon completion of the programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Possess theoretical knowledge of the principles and methods of assessment,
intervention, and prevention for individual with communication disorders and
swallowing problems.
PO2: Demonstrate a comprehensive clinical competence in evaluation, intervention, and prevention of communication disorders and swallowing problems.
PO3: Identify, formulate, provide solutions and effective decisions in the management
process; and demonstrate good clinical reflection and reasoning skills.
PO4: Demonstrate good communication and interpersonal skills in providing effective
counseling to patients, family members, and health professionals; both in verbal and
written forms.
PO5: Demonstrate the ability to serve individually and/or collaborate with other team
members of healthcare professionals with good interpersonal and social skills.
PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conduct and ethical standards and demonstrate
sensitivity to differences in cultural and religious practices.
PO7: Apply current development in speech sciences, clinical skills and utilise ICT
knowledge to enhance their profession and support lifelong learning.
PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills and practice systemic management in speech
sciences.
PO9: Demonstrate leadership and social skills both in the workplace and community.
Speech Pathology Programme
School of Health Sciences
81
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 1 Semester 1 Year 1 Semester II
GTU101/3
GTA104/2
GTA105/2
GTP100/3 GTP109/3
Structure and Function of Humans I
Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and
Speech I
Acoustic for Hearing and Speech
Basic Linguistics Language Development
3
2
2
3 3
GTU104/3
GTA109/2
GTA107/2
GTA108/2
GTP104/3
GTP110/2
GTP111/3
Structure and Function of Humans II
Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing
and Speech II
Psychoacoustics
Basic Audiology Techniques Developmental Psychology for
Speech and Hearing
Clinical Bases for Audiology and
Speech Pathology
Applied Linguistics for Speech
Pathology
3
2
2
2 3
2
3
13 17
Speech Pathology Programme
School of Health Sciences
82
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 2 Semester 1 Year 2 Semester II
GTP202/3
GTP203/2
Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders
Speech Pathology Clinic I
3
2
GTA210/3
GTP207/2
Otology
Speech Pathology Clinic II
3
2
GTP209/2 Phonetics and Phonology 2 GTP213/3 Pediatrics Language Disorders 3
GTP210/2
GTP211/3
Clinical Linguistics
Pediatrics for Hearing and Speech
2
3
GTP214/3
GTP215/3
Speech Sound Disorders
Hearing Impairment
3
3 GTP212/2 Abnormal Psychology 2 GTP216/2 Psycholinguistics 2
GTA205/2 Neurology for Hearing and Speech 2
16 16
Speech Pathology Programme
School of Health Sciences
83
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 3 Semester 1 Year 3 Semester II
GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3 GTP313/3 Acquired Language Disorders 3
GTU304/3 Research Methodology 3 GTP314/2 Motor Speech Disorders 2
GTP303/2 Neuropsychology 2 GTP315/3 Speech Pathology Clinic IV 3
GTP304/3 Speech Pathology Clinic III 3 GTP316/3 Learning Disabilities 3
GTP306/3 Voice and Resonance Disorders 3 GTP317/2 Swallowing Problems 2
GTP311/3 Counseling for Communication Disorders 3
GTP312/2 Augmentative and Alternative Communication 2
19 13
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Course Unit
Year 4 Semester 1 Year 4 Semester II
GTP402/6
GTP403/6 GTP408/2
GTP409/6
Research Project
Speech Pathology Clinic V Fluency Disorders
Speech Pathology Clinical Placement
3
6 2
6
GTP402/6
GTP406/6 GTP410/2
Research Project
Speech Pathology Clinic VI Ethics and Professionalism for
Speech Pathology
3
6 2
17 11
Forensic Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
84
5.10 FORENSIC SCIENCE
Introduction
The Forensic Science programme is the first forensic science programme offered in
Malaysia that offers a 4-year (8 semesters) full time course leading to a Bachelor of Science
(Forensic Science). The programme is designed to nurture intellectual and professional
forensic science graduates with the necessary theoretical knowledge and practical
experience in Forensic Sciences disciplines. We aim to produce forensic science graduates
who are responsible and possess high ethical standards with good communication skills
through organised and dynamic curriculum, forensic practicum training sessions and a
research project. We provide strong foundation for the graduates to transform knowledge
to develop and sustain social well-being, enhanced by extensive collaboration in teaching,
learning and research with Royal Malaysia Police, Department of Chemistry Malaysia, Fire
and Rescue Department and other stakeholders. A total of 145 credit units is required for
graduation as explained under the course structure section.
List of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme
No. Course
Code Title of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme Unit
1. GTU101 Structure and Function of Humans I 3
2. GTU104 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
3. GTU106 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3
4. GTB204 Molecular Biology Techniques 3
5. GTU302 Biostatistics 3
6. GTU304 Research Methodology 3
7. GTU105 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3
8. GTF110 Physical Chemistry 4
9. GTF104 Inorganic Chemistry 3
10. GTF105 General Chemistry Practical I 2
11. GTF111 Analytical Chemistry I 4
12. GTF107 Organic Chemistry I 3
13. GTF108 General Chemistry Practical II 2
14. GTF109 Organic Chemistry Practical 2
15. GTF200 Criminalistic 3
16. GTF213 Introduction to Criminology 3
17. GTF204 Forensic Psychology 3
18. GTF212 Analytical Chemistry II 4
19. GTF206 Organic Chemistry II 3
20. GTF207 Analytical Chemistry Practical 2
21. GTF214 Pollutions and Environment Chemistry 3
Forensic Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
85
No. Course
Code Title of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme Unit
22. GTF210 Material Chemistry 3
23. GTF215 Natural Products Chemistry 3
24. GTF315 Biological Evidence 3
25. GTF301 Physical Evidence 3
26. GTF305 Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs 4
27. GTF306 Fire Investigation 3
28. GTF309 Forensic DNA Analysis 3
29. GTF311 Forensic Antropology 3
30. GTF312 Organic Chemistry III 3
31. GTF313 Food Chemistry 3
32. GTF314 Forensic Serology 2
33. GTF400 Forensic medicine 3
34. GTF402 Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives 4
35. GTF411 Research Project 8
36. GTF408 Forensic Documents Examination 2
37. GTF409 Statistics For Forensic Science 2
38. GTF410 Forensic Digital Evidence 2
39. GTF407 Forensic Practicum 8
Total Unit of Core Courses 124
Programme Learning Outcome
At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply the core knowledge of forensic sciences together with the other specialty
areas of forensic sciences and display the ability to organize them specifically in the
analysis of evidence in forensic investigations.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills required in the process of analysis, application and
problem solving in forensic laboratory and/or at the real scene of crime.
PO3: Demonstrate the ability to use scientific critical thinking skills to obtain necessary
information, investigate and conduct experiment or research in solving forensic
related problems.
PO4: Communicate clearly and manage the scene of crime, and identify other associated
skills in determining the type of forensic investigations with ethics and professional
manners.
Forensic Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
86
PO5: Work in groups or peers in different stages of criminal investigations; searching for
forensic evidences, forensic analysis, crime scene management, and reporting the
findings.
PO6: Display ethics and professional manners in the practice of forensic investigation and
case presentation.
PO7: Identify and adapt with the most recent technologies and resources and
opportunities for the advancement of forensic science services and lifelong
education.
PO8: Apply good management skills and demonstrate entrepreneurship capaticities
particularly in decisión making and planning.
PO9: Demonstrate leadership skills through active involvement in social projects and the
employment of fundamental knowledge in forensic sciences for the purpose of crime prevention.
Forensic Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
87
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 1 Semester 1 Year 1 Semester 1I
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I 3 GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II 3
GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3 GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3
GTF110/4 Physical Chemistry 4 GTF104/3 Inorganic Chemistry 3
GTF111/4 Analytical Chemistry I 4 GTF107/3 Organic Chemistry I 3
GTF105/2 General Chemistry Practical I 2 GTF108/2 General Chemistry Practical II 2
GTF109/2 Organic Chemistry Practical 2
16 16
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 2 Semester 1 Year 2 Semester 1I
GTB204/3 Molecule Biology Techniques 3 GTF200/3 Criminalistic 3 GTF204/3 Forensic Psychology 3 GTF213/3 Introduction to Criminology 3
GTF212/4
GTF206/3
Analytical Chemistry II
Organic Chemistry II
4
3
GTF214/3 Pollutions and Environment
Chemistry
3
GTF207/2 Analytical Chemistry Practical 2 GTF210/3 Material Chemistry 3
GTF215/3 Natural Products Chemistry 3
15 15
Forensic Science Programme
School of Health Sciences
88
Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 3 Semester 1 Year 3 Semester 1I
GTF315/3 Biological Evidence 3 GTU302/3 Biostatistics 3
GTF301/3 Physical Evidence 3 GTU304/3 Research Metodology 3
GTF306/3
GTF312/3
Fire Investigation
Organic Chemistry III
3
3
GTF305/4 Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry
of Drugs
4
GTF313/3 Food Chemistry 3 GTF314/2 Forensic Serology 2
GTF309/3 Forensic DNA Analysis 3
GTF311/3 Forensic Anthropology 3
15 18
Code Core Courses Unit Code Core Courses Unit
Year 4 Semester 1 Year 4 Semester 1I
GTF400/3 Forensic Medicine 3 GTF402/4 Balistic and Chemistry of Explosives 4
GTF409/2 Statistics For Forensic Science 2 GTF407/8 Forensic Practicum 8
GTF410/2 Forensic Digital Evidence 2 GTF408/2 Forensic Documents Examination 2
GTF411/8 Research Project 8
15 14
91
GTU101/3-Structure and Function of Humans I
This course introduces students to basic anatomy and physiology of humans. It covers the
anatomical and physiological aspects of the various human organ systems, which includes
cell and tissue, skeletal system, muscular system, cardiovascular system, nervous system
and special senses such as vision, hearing, smell and taste. It also includes basic teaching
and dynamic transfer of knowledge that emphasis on human health. The course will be
conducted via lecture, practical and discussion. Students’ knowledge will be assessed
through tests, practical tests/OSPE and final exam, while their thinking skill will be
assessed through assignments.
List of text/reference books:
1. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology, (13th
Ed.), New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2011.
2. Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N., Human Anatomy & Physiology, (7th Ed.), San
Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co., 2008.
3. Young, B. & Heath, J.W., Wheater’s Functional Histology: A Text and Color
Atlas, (5th Ed.), Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone, 2006.
4. Barrett, K.E., Barman, S.M., Boitano, S. & Brooks, H.L., Ganong’s Review of
Medical Physiology, (23rd Ed.), United States: McGraw Hill Lange, 2010.
GTU103/3-Fundamentals of Health Informatics
The course introduces students to health informatics emphasizing the fundamental concept
and application of information and communication technology (ICT) in the field of health
sciences. The lectures cover computer system (computer hardware, operating system,
software and networking), introduction to data structure, multimedia, health information
technology, security and cyber-crime. The practical covers e-learning, Office Suite
Application (Word Processor, Presentation and Spreadsheet), cloud office application,
survey tool, website development, graphic and animation editing applications. Integrating
the knowledge on software, hardware and its usage for daily activities also for health
research purposes in interdisciplinary practical environment will eventually transform ICT
known-how for better quality of life in future. Best practice is also introduced to let the
students appreciate the positive values of innovativeness and creativity, thus creating
culture for more intellectual usage, with the purpose of adopting the technology for future
generation’s sustainable life. The course will be conducted via lecture, practical and group
discussions including electronic forum. The students will be evaluated through tests,
assignments, presentation, practical test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ralph M. S. and George W. R., Fundamentals of Information Systems, (8th Ed.), Cengage Learning, 2014.
2. Joos I., Nelson R., Smith M. J., Introduction to Computers for Healthcare
Professionals, (5th Ed.), Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2010.
92
3. Hoyt R. E., Bailey N., Yoshihashi A., Health Informatics: Practical Guide for
Healthcare and Information Technology Professionals, (5th Ed.), Lulu.com, 2012.
4. Health Care Management, John Wiley & Sons
5. Hebda, T. L., Czar P., Handbook of Informatics for Nurses & Healthcare
Professionals, (5th Ed.), 2012.
6. Laudon K., Laudon J., Essentials of Management Information Systems, (10th Ed.),
Prentice Hall, 2012.
GTU104/3-Structure and Function of Humans II
This course introduces students to basic anatomy and physiology of human’s body. It
covers anatomical and physiological aspects of the respiratory, renal, gastrointestinal,
endocrine and reproductive systems as well as the skin. It also includes basic teaching and
dynamic transfer of knowledge that emphasis on human health. The course is conducted
via lecture, practical and discussion. Students’ knowledge will be assessed through tests,
practical tests/OSPE and final examination, while their thinking skill will be assessed
through assignments.
List of text/reference books:
1. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology, (13th Ed.), New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2011.
2. Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N., Human Anatomy & Physiology, (7th Ed.), San
Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co., 2008.
3. Young, B. & Heath, J.W., Wheater’s Functional Histology: A Text and Color
Atlas, (5th Ed.), Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone, 2006.
4. Barrett, K.E., Barman, S.M., Boitano, S. & Brooks, H.L., Ganong’s Review of
Medical Physiology, (23rd Ed.), United States: McGraw Hill Lange, 2010.
5. Marieb, E.N., Anatomy and Physiology Coloring Workbook: A Complete Study
Guide, (12th Ed.), San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings, 2015.
GTU105/3-Psychology and Behavioural Science
This course introduces students to the basic theoretical knowledge and principles of
psychology. It also covers developmental psychology including psychology of infants;
children and adolescents together with factors that influence them like familial and external
factors will be covered. Principles of behavioural sciences with respect to personality,
motivation, emotion, attitude, management of mental stress and counseling techniques will
also be taught. The course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students
will be assessed through assignments, test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Comer, R. & Gould, E. Psychology Around Us, (2nd Ed.), John Wiley and Sons,
2013.
2. Eysenck, M. W. Simply Psychology, (3rd Ed.), Psychology Press, 2013.
3. Feldman, R.S., Understanding Psychology, (11th Ed.), Mc Graw-Hill, 2013.
93
GTU106/3-Biochemistry and Basic Genetics
This course introduces students to fundamental principles of biochemistry and genetics. It
covers the structures and functions of cellular organelles, chemical bonds, structures and
functions of biomolecules as well as the basic genetics, which includes the structures and
functions of DNA and RNA as the genetic materials, replication, transcription, translation,
Mendel’ Law and other traits inheritance as well as population genetics. This course is
conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and assignments. Activity that will be
conducted to achieve sustainability is through assignments that emphasize on quality of
life by vitamin intake, the importance of water in terms of biology and life transformation in the genetic field. The students are evaluated through tests, assignment, laboratory reports
and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Devlin, T.M. Textbook of Biochemistry: With Clinical Correlations, (7th Ed.),
New York: Wiley-Liss, 2010.
2. Moran, L.A, Horton, R.A., Scremgeour, G. & Perry, M Principles of Biochemistry
(5th Ed.), Pearson Education Limited, 2013.
3. Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R.. Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life, (5th Ed.),
Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2011.
4. Murray, R., Bender, D., Botham, K.M., Kennelly, P.J., Rodwell, V. & Weil, P.A.
Harper's Biochemistry, (2th Ed.), McGraw-Hill Medical, 2012.
5. Strachan, T & and Read, A. Human Molecular Genetics, (4th Ed.), New York:
Taylor & Francis Group, 2011.
GTU202/3- Health and Society
This course scrutinises problems and development of health from the sociological and
anthropological underpinnings as an alternative to biomedical perspectives. Lectures and discussions will examine the concepts of health and disease, the relationship between
health and behaviour, the influence of culture, health literacy and poverty in the prevention
of disease. Students will also be introduced to the concept of "marginalised groups" as well
as health system which is associated with the welfare of society and its impact on certain
groups in society.
List of text/reference books:
1. Albrecht, G.L., Fitzpatrick, R. & Scrimshaw, S.C.Handbook of Social Studies In
Health And Medicine. London: SAGE Publications 2000.
2. Helman, C. Culture Health and Illness. Oxford: Butterworth Heinemann, 2000.
3. Scrambler, G. Sociology as applied to Medicine. (6th Ed.), Saunders Elsevier,
London: 2008.
4. Weiss, Gregory L. & Lynne E. Lonnquist. The Sociology of Health, Healing, and
Illness, (6th. Ed.), Pearson Education Inc. New Jersey, 2006.
5. Weitz, R. The Sociology of Health, Illness and Health Care a Critical Approach.
Belmont, CA: Wadswarth/Thomson Learning, 2001.
94
GTU301/3- Ethics and Law for Health Care Professionals
This course introduces students to the relationship of morality, ethics and law, and the
importance of ethics in their daily life as well as in their professional setting. It covers basic
moral and ethical concepts, research ethics as well introductory understanding of law and
ethics. The relationship between professional and clients will be discussed in details.
Students will be exposed to ethical theories as well as case examples to assist their
understanding on the subject matter. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and
discussion. Students will be assessed through test, essay, presentation and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Beuchamp, T.L. & Leroy, W. Bioethics, (6th Ed.), Thomson, Australia, 2003.
2. Di Leo, J.R. Morality Matters. McGraw Hill, Boston, 2002.
3. Jecker, N., Jonsen, AR., Pearlman, RA., Bioethics. (2nd.Ed.), Jones and Bartlett,
Sudbury Masachuset, 2007
4. Judson, K., Harrison, C., Law &Ethics for Health Profession, (6th. Ed.), McGraw
Hill, New York, 2013
5. Steinback, B. et al. Ethical issues in Modern Medicine, (6th Ed.), McGraw Hill,
Boston, 2003.
GTU302/3-Biostatistics
This course introduces the students on basic knowledge of biostatistics in medicine and
health science fields. It also covers the fundamental application of statistical tools in health
data collection, quantitative data analysis and interpretation of results. The course will be
conducted through lectures and other student centred learning activities, based on the
simulation of data related with current health issues in Malaysia. This could enhance
students’ awareness on the importance of health and then enabling them to have sustainable
healthy lifestyle. The students will be assessed through continuous assessments,
assignments, and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Daniel, W.W. A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences, (8th Ed.), John
Wiley & Sons, 2008.
2. Motulsky, H. Intuitive Biostatistics, (2nd Ed.), Oxford University Press, 2010.
3. Nor Azwany, Y. et al. Research Methodology in Health Sciences, (1st Ed.),
Pustaka Aman Press Sdn Bhd, Kelantan, 2012.
4. Norman, G.R., Streiner, D.L. & Norman, G.R. Biostatistics - The Bare Essentials,
(3rd Ed.), Ontario: B.C. Decker Inc., 2008. 5. Norsa’adah, B. Basic Statistics Step by Step using PASW 18, (1st Ed.), Fazwan
Enterprise, Kelantan, 2011.
95
GTU304/3-Research Methodology
This course introduces students to various important concepts and aspects in research
methodology. It encompasses the characteristics, types and approaches in research usually
employed by the researchers. Students will also be exposed to the integration of Health
Science research mechanism with the Social Science counterpart as a comprehensive
research. The process of scientific calculation of sample size, preparation and critical
evaluation of research proposal, data analysis and research report writing will be given
greater emphasis.
List of text/reference books:
1. Chua, Y. P., Mastering Research Methods. Kuala Lumpur: McGraw Hill
Education, 2012.
2. Abdul Aziz Al-Safi, I., Kamarul Imran, M., Mohamed Rusli, A., Nor Azwany,
Y., & Wan Mohd Zahiruddin, W. M., Research Methodology in Health Sciences
(Y. Nor Azwany & W. M. Wan Mohd Zahiruddin Eds. (2nd Ed.). University Sains
Malaysia, Kubang Kerian: PPSP Publication, 2014.
3. Minichiello, V., Sullivan, G., & Greenwood, K., Research Methods for Nursing
and Health Sciences, (2nd Ed.), Australia: Pearson education Australia, 2004.
4. Chua, Y. P., Kaedah dan Statistik Penyelidikan: Buku 2 – Asas Statistik Penyelidikan. Kuala Lumpur McGraw Hill Education, 2006.
5. Montgomery, D. D., Design and Analysis of Experiments, (5th Ed.), New York:
John Wiley and Sons, 2000.
97
GTA105/2-Acoustics for Hearing and Speech
This course introduces students to the mechanism of sound generation, fundamental sound
parameters, types and characteristics of sounds such as pure tones and complex sounds and
fundamental acoustics instrumentation. It also covers the production of speech sounds and
acoustics perception. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through test, presentation, practical reports and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Johnson, K., Acoustic and Auditory Phonetics (3rd Ed.): Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.
2. Warren, R. M., Auditory Perception: An Analysis and Synthesis (3rd Ed.):
Cambridge University Press, 2008.
3. Howard, D., & Angus, J., Acoustics and Psychoacoustics (4th Ed.): Focal Press,
2009
GTA106/2-Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech I
This course introduces students to the fundamental aspects and terminologies related to
body orientation, cell structures, primary tissues and organization of the human organ
systems. It also covers the applied anatomy and physiology of the respiratory, phonatory,
articulation and swallowing systems which involves in the speech mechanism. This course
will be taught via lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and problem based learning (PBL).
The students will be assessed through test, practical exam (OSPE), practical reports,
presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Fuller D.R., Pimentel J.T. & Peregoy B.M., Applied Anatomy & Physiology for
Speech-Language Pathology & Audiology. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
2. Seikel J.A., King D.W. & Drumright D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for Speech,
Language, and Hearing (4th Ed.). Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010.
3. Booth K.A. & Wyman T.D., Anatomy, Physiology and Pathophysiology for Allied
Health (2nd Ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2009.
4. Gelfand, S. A., Hearing: An Introduction to Psychological and Physiological
Acoustics (5th Ed.) Informa Healthcare, 2009.
5. Schnupp, J., Nelken, I., & King, A., Auditory Neuroscience: Making Sense of
Sound, The MIT Press, 2012.
GTA107/2-Psychoacoustics
This course introduces students to fundamental elements of psychoacoustics including
auditory response area, concept of hearing threshold, concept of loudness, pitch, masking,
temporal and space perception. It also covers the effects of auditory disorders on the
psychoacoustics functions. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports and final
examination.
98
List of text/reference books:
1. Johnson, K., Acoustic and Auditory Phonetics (3rd Ed.): Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.
2. Warren, R. M., Auditory Perception: An Analysis and Synthesis (3rd Ed.).
Cambridge University Press, 2008.
3. Howard, D., & Angus, J., Acoustics and Psychoacoustics (4th Ed.). Focal Press,
2009.
4. Gelfand, S. A., Hearing: An Introduction to Psychological and Physiological
Acoustics (5th Ed.) Informa Healthcare, 2009.
5. Schnupp, J., Nelken, I., & King, A., Auditory Neuroscience: Making Sense of
Sound. The MIT Press, 2012.
GTA108/2-Basic Audiology Techniques
This course introduces students to the fundamental audiology diagnostic procedures such
as history taking, otoscopic examination, pure tone audiometry, tympanometry and speech
audiometry. It also covers the introduction to the audiology diagnostic and auditory system
disorders. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials, case study and practical.
Students will be assessed through test, assignment, practical report and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gelfand, S. A., Essentials of Audiology. United States of America: Thieme, 2009.
2. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R., & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. United States of America: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
3. Kramer, S., & Guthrie, L., Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing
Inc., 2008.
4. Roeser, R. J., Valente, M., &Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Diagnosis. United
States of America: Thieme, 2007.
5. Hunter, L., & Shahnaz, N., Acoustic Immittance Measures Basic and Advanced
Practice. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.
GTA109/2-Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech II
This course introduces students to the aspects of applied human anatomy and physiology
which covers the nervous, auditory and vestibular systems. This course will be taught via
lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and problem based learning (PBL). The students will
be assessed through test, practical exam (OSPE), practical reports, presentation and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Fuller D.R., Pimentel J.T. & Peregoy B.M., Applied Anatomy & Physiology for
Speech-Language Pathology & Audiology. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
2. Seikel J.A., King D.W. & Drumright D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for Speech,
Language, and Hearing (4th Ed.). Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010.
99
3. Booth K.A. & Wyman T.D., Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for
Allied Health (2nd Ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2009.
4. Clark, W. F., & Ohlemiller, K., Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing for
Audiologist. Singular Publishing Group, 2004.
5. Linda M Luxon., Textbook of Audiological Medicine: Clinical Aspects of Hearing
and Balance, Martin Dinitz, 2003.
GTB105/3-Human Biochemistry
This course introduces students to the aspects of human biochemistry. It covers knowledge
and principles in protein, carbohydrate and lipid metabolism, hormones and their
mechanisms, water and electrolyte balance, acid and base balance, types, functions and
mechanisms of macro and micro minerals. The elements of occupational health and safety
of working in a laboratory are incorporated into the course during practical sessions. This
course is conducted through lectures, tutorials, discussions and practical. The students are
evaluated through tests, assignments, laboratory reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Garrett, R., & Grisham, C.M. Biochemistry (5th Ed.). Belmont, California:
Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning, 2013.
2. Moran, L.A. Principles of Biochemistry (5 th Ed.). Boston: Pearson, 2012.
3. Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life (5th Ed.).
Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2011.
4. Murray, R., Bender, D., Botham, K.M., Kennelly, P.J., Rodwell, V. & Weil, P.A.
Harper's Biochemistry (29th Ed.). McGraw-Hill Medical, 2012.
GTB106/3-Laboratory Science
This course introduces students to aspect of laboratory safety the basic laboratory
techniques, management and maintenance of laboratory equipment which covers
professional attitude and ethics, safety methods and disposal of dangerous chemicals,
storage and maintenance of chemicals and reagents, keeping and record, use of laboratory
plastics and glasses, sterilization and disinfection, principle of quality management,
receiving and managing specimens. Students will also be trained in using and maintenance
of laboratory equipments such as micropipette, centrifuge, pH meter, balances,
spectrophotometer and other common laboratory analytical equipments. This course will
also emphasis on the reduction in energy and disposable item used. This course is
conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and discussions. The students are evaluated through tests, laboratory reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bishop, M.L., Schoeff, L.E. & Fody, E.P. Clinical Chemistry-Principles, Procedures & Correlations (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2004.
2. Burtis, C.A., Ashwood, E.R. & Bruns, D.E. Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry
and Molecular Diagnostics (4th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2005.
100
3. Kaplan, L.A., Pesce, A.J. & Kazmierczak, S. Clinical Chemistry: Theory,
Analysis, Correlation (5th Ed.). Delmar Learning, 2002.
4. Ramnik, S. Textbook of Medical Laboratory Technology. India: Jaypee Brothers,
2006.
GTB109/3-Cell Biology Techniques
This course introduces students to fundamental knowledge in cell biology and cell culture
techniques. It covers the skills and instrumentation related to somatic cell, cancer cell and
stem cell culture which can be applied in cell biology related research. The course will be conducted via lecture and practical. The students will be assessed through tests,
assignments, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Aschner, Michael, Suñol, Cristina, Bal-price & Anna. Cell Culture Techniques.
Springer, 2011.
2. Gerald, K. Cell and Molecular Biology: Concepts and Experiments (7th Ed.).
John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2013.
3. John, D. & Mike, l. Essentials of Cells Biology (3rd Ed.). Garland Science, Taylor
& Francis Group, 2009.
4. Butler, M. Animal Cell Culture and Technology (2nd Ed.). London and New
York: Bios scientific Publishers, 2004.
5. Cheryl D. Helgason & Cindy L. Miller. Basic Cell Culture Protocols (Methods in
Molecular Biology). Humana Press, 2005.
GTF101/3-Basic Chemistry
This course will introduce students to various topics on basic knowledge of chemistry such
as atom, molecules, ions, gases, reactions in aqueous solutions, chemical kinetics, entropy,
free energy, acid base equilibrium, periodic table, nuclear chemistry, electrochemistry and
chemistry in atmosphere.
List of text/reference books:
1. R. Baner, J. Birk and P. S. Mark, A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry (2nd
Ed.). McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. R. Chang, General Chemistry: The Essential Concept (4th Ed.). McGraw Hill,
2013.
3. R. Chang, Chemistry (10th Ed.). Pearson Education, 2015.
GTF104/3-Inorganic Chemistry
This course introduces students to stoichiometry, atomic structure, nuclear chemistry,
periodic table, chemical bonding and properties of matter, including innovative invention
in polymer and nano-technology. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and case
studies. The students will assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final
examination.
101
List of text/reference books:
1. C. Hoasecroft and A. G. Shaspe, Inorganic Chemistry (5th Ed.). Prentice-Hall,
2013.
2. G. L. Miessler and D. A. Tarr, Inorganic Chemistry (3rd Ed.,). Prentice-Hall,
2003.
3. T. L. Brown, H. E. LeMay, B. E. Bursten and J. R. Burdge, Chemistry: The
Central Science, (9th Ed.). Pearson Education Inc., 2003.
4. R. H. Petrucci, W. S. Harwood and F. G. Herring, General Chemistry: Principles
and Modern Applications, (11th Ed.). Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 2016.
GTF105/2-General Chemistry Practical I
This course introduces students to general chemistry practical such as fundamental
laboratory techniques, identification of substances based on physical properties, separation
of component mixture, chemical formula, gravimetric analysis of a chloride salt, paper
chromatography for separation of cations and dyes, acid-base titration, salt in water and pH
of buffer solutions, determination of the dissociation constant of a weak acid, determination
of solubility product constant for sparingly soluble salt in water, reactions in aqueous
solutions and oxidation-reduction titrations. The course will be taught via briefings and
practical sessions, where students are encouraged in group collaboration to solve problems. Students will be assessed through test and practical reports.
List of text/reference books:
1. J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments–Chemistry: The Central
Science (13 th Ed.). Pearson Education Inc., 2014.
GTF107/3-Organic Chemistry I
This course introduces students to study the basic concepts of electronic structure and
bonding. It also covers the structures and properties of organic molecules, chemistry of
alkane, alkene and alkyne, reactions in organic chemistry and stereochemistry. The course
will be taught via lectures, tutorials and discussion on selected topics such as petroleum as
energy source and the importance of organic chemistry education. Students will be assessed
through test, assignments and final examination.
Main references supporting this course:
1. Wade L.G. Organic Chemistry, (9th Ed.), Pearson Prentice Hall, 2016.
2. Solomons T.W.G., Fryhle C.B, and Snyder S.A. Organic Chemistry, (12th Ed.).
Wiley, 2016. 3. Smith J.G and Smith J.G. Organic Chemistry, (3rd Ed.). McGraw Hill, 2011.
102
GTF108/2-General Chemistry Practical II
This course introduces students the general chemistry practical knowledge which is
continued from GTF105 General Chemistry Practical 1. It covers chemical reactions,
gravimetric determination of phosphorus in plant food, chemical reactions of copper and
percent yield, chemicals that improve quality of life and use daily, colorimetric
determination of an equilibrium constant in aqueous solution, oxidation-reduction titration
of bleach, analysis of aspirin, chemical equilibrium: Le Chatelier Principle, titration curves
of polyprotic acids, activity series, determination of orthophosphate in water and
colorimetric determination of iron. The course will be taught via briefings and practical
sessions, where students are encouraged to collaborate and maintain partnership in solving
problems. Students will be assessed through test and practical reports.
List of text/reference books:
1. N.Kerner and R. Lamba, Guided Inquiry Experiments for General Chemistry:
Practical Problems and Applications, Wiley., 2007.
2. W.McPherson, A Course in General Chemistry, Read Books., 2011.
3. J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments – Chemistry: The Central
Science, (13th Ed.). Pearson Education Inc., 2014.
4. B.Stanton, L.Zhu and C.H.Atwood, Experiments in General Chemistry: Featuring Measurenet, (2nd Ed.). Brooks/Cole Cengage Learning., 2009.
5. J. Dean, Practical Skills in Chemistry, (2nd Ed.). Pearson Education Ltd., 2011.
GTF109/2-Organic Chemistry Practical
This course exposes students to organic chemistry practicals such as application of thin
layer chromatography and column chromatography for analysis of organic compounds
found in water, agriculture products or from the ecosystem, qualitative analysis of organic
compounds, identification of functional groups, distillation of organic samples, gas
chromatographic analysis of caffeine, forensic chemistry: identification of trace materials
in blood, extraction of trimyristin, photo-reduction of benzophenon to benzophinacole,
application of high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) for anaylsis of natural product
samples, extraction and crystallation, acid-base properties, homophatalic acid, oxidative
cleavage of double bond and Michael addition reaction. The course will be taught via
briefings, demonstration teaching sessions and practical classes. Students will be assessed
through test and practical reports.
List of text/reference books:
1. J.A. Landgrebe, Theory and Practice in Organic Laboratory with Microscale and
Standard (5th Ed.), Thomson/Wadsworth 2009. 2. Randall G. Engel. George S. Kriz, Gary M. Lampman, Donald L. Pavia,
Introduction to Organic Laboratory Techniques. A Small Scale Approach, (3rd
Ed.). Books/Cole 2010.
103
3. Lehman, J. W. The Student's Lab Companion: Laboratory Techniques for
Organic Chemistry, Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 2004.
4. J.B. Cohen, Practical Organic Chemistry, Nabu Press, 2012.
GTF110/4-Physical Chemistry
This course introduces students to properties of gas and liquid, matter state principles, gas
kinetic theory, chemical kinetic, and chemistry thermodynamic, including efficiency of
heat engine and renewable energy. The course will be taught via lectures tutorials and
discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. P. Atkins and J. D. Paula, Physical Chemistry, (10th Ed.), Oxford University Press,
2014.
2. Thomas Engel and Philip Reid, Physical Chemistry, (3rd Ed.), Pearson, 2012.
3. D. B. Ball, Physical Chemistry, (1st Ed.), Brooks/ Cole, 2003.
4. J. Laider, J. H. Meiser and B. C. Sanctuary, Physical Chemistry, (4th Ed.),
Houghton Mifflin Co., 2003.
GTF111/4-Analytical Chemistry I
This course introduces students to basic knowledge on chemical análysis which covers
concentration expression, statistic for analytical chemistry, chemical equilibrium, acid-
base equilibrium, acid-base titration and titration, complexometry titration, gravimetry
analysis, precipitation titration, redoxs equilibrium and redox titration. Occupational health
and safety in an analytical laboratory will also be emphasised, including the best practices
to disposed hazardous materials. The course will be taught via lectures tutorials and
discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. J. Holler and S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of
Analytical Chemistry, (9th Ed.). Thomson Brooks/ Cole, 2014.
2. G. D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry, (7th Ed.). John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
3. D. B. Harvey, Modern Analytical Chemistry. International Ed., Mc-Graw Hill,
2000.
GTJ101/4-Nursing Foundation 1
This course introduces students to nursing history and development; nursing practice and
nursing process. It also incorporates the concept of health assessment to maintain sustainability across patient care and culture. This course is taught via student centered
learning: lectures, small group discussion, e-learning, and practical sessions. Students will
be assessed through assignment, presentation, quiz, log book, OSCE and final examination.
104
List of text/reference books:
1. DeWit, S. C. & O’Neill, P., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, (4th
Ed.) St. Louis: Elservier Saunders, 2014.
2. Estes, M. E. Z. Health Assessment & Physical Examination, (5th Ed.) New York:
Cengage Learning. 2014.
3. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B., & Erb, G., Fundamental of Nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice, (9th Ed.), USA: New Jersey, Pearson, 2012.
4. Christensen, B.L. & Kockrow, E.O. Foundation and Adult Health Nursing, (6th
Ed.), Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2011. 5. Delaune, S.C. & Ladner, P.K. Fundamental of Nursing: Standard & Practice, (4th
Ed.), Delmar Cengage Learning: York.
GTJ109/4-Nursing Foundation II
This course introduces students to the Nursing Foundation II. It covers the concept related
to activities of daily living with emphasis on patient’s quality of life, safety, and security.
This course is taught via student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, e-learning, and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through assignment,
presentation, log book, OSCE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G., Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts,
Process and Practice, (9th Ed.), New Jersey, Pearson, 2012.
2. Craven, R. Hirnle, C. & Henshaw, C. M., Fundamentals of Nursing. Human
Health and Function. (8th Ed.), Wolters Kluwer, 2017.
3. Smith, S.F., Duel, D.J., & Martin, B.C., Clinical Nursing Skills. New Jersey:
Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. Holland, K., Jenhins, J. Solomon, J., Whittam, S., Applying the Roper. Logan.
Tierney Model in Practice. (2nd Eds). Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier, 2008.
5. Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A., Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th Ed.).
Mosby, USA, 2004.
6. Taylor, C.R., Lilis, C., LeMone, P. & Lynn, P., Fundamental of Nursing: The Art and Science Of Nursing Care, (7th Ed.), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Tokyo,
2011.
GTK101/3-Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health
This course introduces students to the area of environmental health, occupational health,
environmental safety, and occupational safety. This course will discuss the importance of
responsibility and civil liberties of an individual towards the environment. Current issues
on environmental disaster will be discussed towards its implications on water quality,
community health and biodiversity. Students will be introduced to the disaster risk
management for maintaining the sustainability of the environment, health and biodiversity.
The implication and significant of nurturing environmental and occupational health will be
also highlighted. This course will be taught via lectures and seminars. Students will be
assessed through test, presentation and final examination.
105
List of text/reference books:
1. Harper C. L., Environment And Society; Human Perspectives On Environmental
Issues, Pearson Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, 2004.
2. Megan L., Environment, Health And Sustainable. Open London: University Press,
2006.
3. Yassri A., Kjellstrom T., Theo de Kok & Guidotti T., Basic Environmental
Health. New York: Oxford University Press, 2001.
4. Benarde, Melvin A. Our Precarious Habitat – It’s in Your Hands. John Wiley &
Sons, Inc. (US), 2007.
5. Waldron, H. A. & Edling, C. Occupational Health Practice, Hodder Education
Publisher, 2004.
6. Koren, H., Illustrated Dictionary and Resource Directory of Environmental &
Occupational Health, (2nd Ed.). London: CRC Press, 2005.
GTK104/3-Environmental Health
This course introduces the ecological components and its relationship with the environment
and public health. Students will be clarified on the environmental aspects including water
quality management; food preparation and storage in terms of hygiene and safety and
prevention methods of food poisoning; types of pests and vector-borne disease control methods; and study of population exposure to environmental agents as well as occupational
related disease or injury. The key components that will be learned which include water,
health, agriculture and biodiversity are the critical issues that should be controlled and
managed efficiently as to prevent crisis of depleted natural resources, poverty and
environmental disaster. It is also a vital element to support sustainable development.
Students are also exposed to techniques of water sampling, food inspection and sampling
of mosquitoes. The course will be taught via lectures, field visits and practical sessions.
Students will be assessed through quiz, test, field study report, presentation and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Arduser L. & Brown D. R., HACCP And Sanitation In Restaurants And Food
Service Operations. Atlantic Publishing. 2005.
2. Cunningham W. P. & Cunningham M. A., Environmental Science: A Global
Concern (11th Ed.). McGraw-Hill, New York, 2010.
3. Frumkin H., ed. Environmental Health – From Local To Global (2nd Ed.). John-
Wiley & Sons, 2010.
4. Lee C. Y., Urban Pest Control: A Malaysian Perspective (2nd Ed.). Penerbit
USM, Malaysia, 2003.
5. Meggitt C., Food Hygiene And Safety. Oxford: Heinemann Education Publishers, 2003.
106
GTN102/4-Food Science
This course will introduce students to foods and the different kinds of fundamental changes
in foods as a result of food processing. It also covers the practical session pertaining to
basic food science as well as new emerging methods in food processing. This course will
be taught via lecture, practical and discussion sessions. Students will be assessed through
continuous assessment, practical report and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Amy Brown. Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation (4th Ed.). Thomson
Wardsworth Pub., 2011.
2. Kay Mehas and Sharon Rodgers. Food Science: Biochemistry of Food and
Nutrition (5th Ed.). McGraw-Hill Companies, 2005.
3. Norman N. Potter and Joseph H. Hotchkiss. Food Sciences (5th Ed.). Aspen
Publishers, Inc., 2012.
GTP100/3- Basic Linguistics
This course introduces students to basic linguistics. It covers fundamental knowledge in
linguistics such as phonetics, phonology, morphology, syntax, semantic, and pragmatics
and their integration. Teaching of first language acquisition and sociolinguistic
perspectives are also introduced. This course is taught via lecture and tutorial. Students are
assessed through assignment, test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Akmajian, A., Demers, R.A., Farmer, A.K., & Harnish, R.M., Linguistics: An
Introduction to Language and Communication (6th Ed.). Cambridge: The MIT
Press, 2010.
2. Fasold, R. & Connor-Linton, J. (Eds), An Introduction to Language & Linguistics.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006.
3. Cruse, A., Meaning in Language: An Introduction to Semantic and Pragmatics.
Oxford University Press, 2004. 4. Nik Safiah Karim, Farid M. Onn, & Hashim Musa., Tatabahasa Dewan. Kuala
Lumpur: DBP, 2003.
5. Black, M., & Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinician. A Practical Introduction.
London: Hodder Arnold, 2003.
GTP104/3- Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing
This is a theoretical course that gives an initial exposure to the field of psychology. It
focuses on the developmental psychology of the human from prenatal to late adulthood.
The topics covered include theories in developmental psychology and human development
in relation to biological, cognitive, personality and social aspects according to the level of
development. This course is taught via lecture and tutorial. Students are assessed through
assignment, test and final examination.
107
List of text/reference books:
1. Slater, A., & Bremner, J.G. (Eds.), An Introduction to Developmental Psychology.
New Jersey: Blackwell Publishing, 2003.
2. Papalia, D.E., Olds, S.W., & Feldman, R.D., Human Development (8th Ed.).
Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2001.
3. Shaffer, D.R., Blanchard- Fields, F., & Cavanaugh, J.C., Developmental
Psychology: Childhood and Adolescence (6th Ed.). Belmont: Wadsworth, 2001.
GTP107/3- Language Development
This course introduces students to fundamental theories related to the normal acquisition
and development of language. It also discusses the influence of social, culture, perception,
cognition and bilingualism on language development. This course is taught via lecture,
tutorial, and seminar. Students are assessed through assignments, presentations, tests and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Owens, R.E., Language Dvelopment: An Introduction (8th Ed.). New Jersey:
Pearson Education, 2011.
2. Owens, R.E., Language Disorders: A Functional Approach to Assessment and
Intervention (4th Ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2003.
3. Bennet-Kastor, T., Analysing Children’s Language. Oxford: Basil Blackwell,
1990.
GTP108/2- Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology
This is a clinicalorientation course which provides fundamental clinical training in
preparation to the common procedures and patient/case managements in audiology and
speech therapy. It covers on scope of practice of audiologists and speech-language
pathologist, overview on the best practice in audiology and speech pathology and clinical
observation skills.This course is taught via lecture, tutorial, clinical observation session
and small group discussion. Students are assessed through quiz, presentation, observation
report and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Flasher, L.V., & Fogel, P.T., Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist
and Audiologist. Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.
2. Gillam, R.B., Marquardt, T.P., & Martin, F.N., Communication Sciences and
Dsorders: From Science to Clinical Practice. San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, 2010.
3. Hedge, M.N., & Davis, D., Clinical Method and Practicum in Speech-Language
Pathology. New York: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2005.
4. McCrea, E.S. & Brasseur, J.A., The Supervisory Process in Speech-Language
Pathology and Audiology. New York: Allyn and Bacon, 2003
108
GTP109/3- Applied Linguistics for Speech Pathology
This course introduces students to the fundamental knowledge of the science of linguistic.
It focuses on the systematic study of language structure, the first and second language
acquisition, colloquial language, changes and development of languages from the social,
cultural, rhetoric and resistence perspectives. This course is taught via lectures and
discussion sessions. Students are assessed through assignments reports, discussions and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Schmidt, N., Applied Linguistic (2nd Ed.). Oxon: Hodder Education Pub., 2010.
2. Ortega, L., Understanding Second Language Acquisition. New York: Routledge,
2009.
3. Davies, A., & Elder, C., The Handbook of Applied Linguistic. New Jersey:
Blackwell Publishing Ltd., 2006.
4. Ellis, R., & Widdowson, H.G., Second Language Acquisition (Oxford
Introduction to Language Study Series). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1997.
GTS101/2-Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science
This fundamental course introduces students to the general knowledge in exercise and
sports science field. It provides an interdisciplinary overview (e.g., physiology,
psychology, nutirion, biomechanics, etc.) of the components in the field of exercise and
sports science. It also introduces students to the application of exercise and sport science
in facilitating athletes and improving fitness and health of individual as well as their quality
of life. This course will be taught via lectures and practical. Students will be assessed
through assignment, test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Pekka Oja and Jan Borms. (Eds.). Health Enhancing Physical Activity: The
Multidisciplinary Series of Physical Education and Sports Science. UK: Meyer &
Meyer Sports Ltd, 2004.
2. Jan Borms. Directory of Sports Science. (5th Ed.). Germany: H &P Druck, 2008.
3. Scott Wikgren, Cheri Scott and Anna Rinalsi. (Eds.). Health and Wellness for
Life. USA: Human Kinetics, 2010.
4. Leslie Bonci. Sports Nutrition for Coaches. USA: Human Kinetics, 2009.
5. Timothy R. Ackland, Bruce C. Elliott and John Bloomfield (Eds.) Applied
Anatomy and Biomechanics in Sport (2nd Ed.). USA: Human Kinetics, 2009.
6. Brian J Sharkey and Steven E. Gaskill. Sport Physiology for Coaches. USA:
Human Kinetics, 2006.
109
GTS102/3-Sociology and Philosophy of Sports
This course introduces students to the basic sociological and philosophical concepts related
to sport. It also discusses the sociological and philosophical implications of ancient and
modern developments in sports competition and sportmanship. This course also covers the
human interactions, support and social purpose of exercise and sports in different
communities worldwide. This course will be taught through lectures and discussions.
Students will be assessed through test, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Barry D McPherson, James E Curtis, & John W Loy. The Social Significance of
Sport: An Introduction to the Sociology of Sport, Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics, 1989.
2. Coakley, J. Sports in Society: Issues and Controversies, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
3. Wirdati M. R. Muslim Women and Sports in the Malay World, Aman Silkworm
Book. 2006.
4. Mangan JA, Hong Fan, 2003. Sports in Asian Society: Past and Present, (Chapter
5). CASS.McNamee M.J., Philosophy and the Science of Exercise, Health and
Sport: Critical Perspectives on Research Methods, New York, NY: Routledge,
2005. 5. Morgan, W., Meier, K. and Schneider, A., Ethics in Sport, Champaign (2nd Ed.).
IL: Human Kinetics, 2007.
GTX104/4-Introduction to Medical Radiation
This course introduces students to the fundamental of electromagnetic radiation (EMR)
and its applications in health and medicine. EMR includes the ionising radiation (gamma
ray and x-ray) and non-ionising radiation (ultraviolet, visible light, infrared, microwave
and radiofrequency). This course provides knowledge regarding the modern concept of
atom, radioactivity, classification, source, production and properties of radiation as well as
their interaction with matter and effects on biological tissues. The innovative applications
of ionising and non-ionising radiation for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes will also be
discussed. The course will be conducted via lectures and tutorials. The students will be
assessed through test, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bushberg, J.T. and et al, The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging (3rd Ed.).
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
2. William R Hendee, E Russell Ritenour, Medical Imaging Physics (4th Ed.).Wiley-
Liss, 2002. 3. Johnston, J.N. and Fauber, T.L., Essential of Radiographic Physics and Imaging
(1st Ed.) Mosby, 2012.
110
GTX105/4-Medical Radiation Physics I
This course introduces students to the basic concept of classical physics and relativity. The
topics of this course include physical measurement, vector, motion in one dimension,
motion in a plane, particle dynamics, energy and work, conservation of energy,
conservation of linear momentum, collision, circular motion, rigid body static and
gravitation and relativity. The contribution of this physics knowledge to medical radiation
research and practice will also be discussed. The course will be conducted via lecture and
tutorial. The students will be assessed through test, quiz, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, (10th Ed.).
Wiley, 2014.
2. Tippens, P.E., Physics, (7th Ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3. Giancoli, D. C., Physics: Principles with Applications, (7th Ed.). Prentice Hall,
2013.
GTX106/3-Mathematics of Radiation Science I
This course introduces students to the advanced mathematics and calculus applied in health and research. It will focus on topics like function and graph, advance function and equality
solution, advance geometry, matrix, vector, complex number, limit and the use of first
principles in polynomial differentiation, differentiation, differentiation techniques and
applications, integration, advance differentiation and integration. This course will be
conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students will be assessed through test, assignment,
quiz and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Lay, D. C. and Lay, S.R., Linear Algebra and Its Application. (5th Ed.). Pearson
Higher Education, 2015.
2. Larson, R., Hostetler, R. and Edwards, B.H., Calculus with Analytic Geometry:
Multivariable Calculus. (7th Ed.). Houghton Mifflin Company College Division,
2002.
3. Anton, H., Calculus, Combined, Student Resource. (6th Ed.). John Wiley and
Sons, 1998.
112
GTA201/2-Audiological Instrumentation
This course introduces students to best practice of room acoustics in audiology, typical
audiological instrumentations and their fundamental components. It also covers the
calibration procedure of each audiology device using specific calibrators. This course will
be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through
tests, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bess, F.H., & Humes, L.E., Audiology: The Fundamentals (4th Ed.). USA:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.
2. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R, & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. USA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
3. Martin, F.N., & Clark, J.G., Introduction to Audiology (11th Ed.). Allyn & Bacon
Communication Sciences and Disorders, 2011.
GTA203/3-Advanced Audiology Techniques
This course introduces students to the auditory lesions, the fundamental of pure tone
audiometry with clinical masking, high frequency tympanometry, acoustic reflex and advanced speech tests. It also covers the results integration of the mentioned tests, non-
organic hearing loss (NOHL) and site of lesion tests. This course will be taught via lectures,
tutorials, problem-based learning and practical. Students will be assessed through tests,
assignments, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gelfand, S.A., Essentials of Audiology. USA: Thieme, 2009.
2. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R., & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. USA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
3. Kramer, S. & Guthrie, L., Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing
Inc., 2008.
4. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Diagnosis. USA:
Thieme, 2007.
5. Hunter, L. & Shahnaz, N., Acoustic Immittance Measures Basic and Advanced
Practice. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2012
113
GTA205/2-Neurology for Hearing and Speech
This course introduces students to fundamental principles of neurology, central nervous
system and peripheral system related to hearing (neuroaudiology) and speech. It also covers
the related neurological diseases, basic clinical examinations and the importance of
interdisciplinary approach in managing patients. This course will be taught via lectures,
tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through tests, presentation,
practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Berlin, C. I., The Brain And Sensory Plasticity: Language Acquisition And
Hearing. San Diego: Singular Pub-lishing Group, Inc., 2003.
2. Ray, J., Review of Neurology - A Workbook for Speech and Hearing Students. St.
Louis: Mosby-Year Book, Inc., 2003
Medical Otology and Neurotology: A Clinical Guide to Auditory and Vestibular
Disorders New York: Thieme, 2006.
3. Luxon, L.M., Furman, J.M., Martini, A., Stephens, D., Textbook of Audiological
Medicine : Clinical Aaspects of Hearing and Balance. London: Martin Dunitz,
2003.
4. Furman, J.M., Cass, S.P., Vestibular Disorders : A Case-Study Approach. New
York: Oxford University Press Barbara, 2003. 5. Herlihy, B., The Human Body in Health and Illness (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B.
Saunders Company, 2006.
GTA208/4-Pediatric Audiology
This course introduces students to hearing health aspects of pediatric population including
medical evaluation and management, hearing test protocols, rehabilitation, education
management of children with hearing loss and the importance of interdisciplinary
approach. This course also covers acoustic speech signal and speech perception assessment
of infants and children as well as audiological procedures such as Behavioural Observation
Audiometry (BOA), Visual Reinforcement Audiometry (VRA), Play Audiometry and
eletrophysiological testing. This course will be taught through lectures, tutorials, practical
and case study. Students will be evaluated through tests, assignments, presentation and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Madell, J.R. & Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology,
and Management. USA: Thieme, 2008.
2. Madell, J.R. & Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology Casebook. USA: Thieme,
2011.
3. Northern, J.L. & Downs, M.P., Hearing in Children (6th Ed.). San Diego: Plural
Publishing Inc., 2013.
4. Seewald, R. & Tharpe, A.M., Comprehensive Handbook of Pediatric Audiology.
San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010
5. Niparko, J.K. (Ed.), Cochlear Implants: Principles and Practices (2nd Ed.):
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
114
GTA209/3-Audiology Clinic I
This course introduces students to the fundamental audiology clinical practice. It includes
preparation of the students to the clinic and clinical practicum. Students will be taught
about clinical communication, reflective practice and review of the audiology tests and its
integration during the first half of semester. In the second half of the semester, students
will be supervised by experienced audiologist on weekly basis. Students are expected to
observe the clinical session and conduct fundamental tests on cooperative patients. This
course will be taught via lectures, tutorials, problem-based learning (PBL), practical, and
supervision during practicum. Students will be assessed through test, practical reports,
report (reflective journal), logbook, practicum and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R., & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. USA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
2. Taylor, B., Reflective Practice for Health Care Professionals: A Practical Guide
(3rd Ed.). Open University Press, 2010.
3. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.) Singular Publishing,
2010.
4. Goldfarb, R. & Serpanos, Y.C., Professional Writing in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg and Sippola, E., The Communication Skills Workbook.
USA: Whole Person Associates, Inc., 2008
6. Ghaye, T., Teaching and Learning Through Reflective Practice: A Practical
Guide for Positive Action (2nd Ed.). Routledge, 2011.
GTA210/3-Otology
This course introduces students to principles of clinical otology, pathologies related to
hearing and balance system, otological and audiological examinations, other disorders
related ear, nose and throat as well basic health management of patients with otological
disorders. This course also covers the relationship between ear pathologies and otological
and audiological test results. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Browning, G.G., Clinical Otology and Audiology (2nd Ed.). Oxford: Butterworth
Heinemann, 1998.
2. Berlin, C.I., and Keats, B.J.B., Genetics and Hearing Loss. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.
3. Canalis, R.F. and Lambert, P.R.H. (Eds.), Ear: Comprehensive Otology.
Maryland: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000.
115
4. Rockeinstein, M.J., Comprehenssive Review of Otolaryngology. Philadephia:
Elsevier, Inc., 2004.
5. Roush, J. (Ed.), Screening for Hearing Loss and Otitis Media in Children. San
Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc
6. Tyler, R.S., Tinnitus Handbook. San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc.,
2000.
GTA211/2-Hearing Screening
This course introduces students to the concepts of hearing screening including its principle,
objectives and methods of screening tests of all stages of life. It also covers the sensitivity
and specificity, advantages and disadvantages of various hearing screening tests as well as
the importance of collaboration for a successsful hearing screening program. This course
will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed
through test, presentation, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hall, J.W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses. Boston, MA : Pearson,
2007.
2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
3. Seewald, R. & Tharpe, A.M., Comprehensive Handbook of Pediatric Audiology.
San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010.
4. Madell, J.R. & Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology,
and Management. USA: Thieme, 2008.
GTA212/3-Basic Hearing Amplification Technology
This course introduces students to the fundamental aspects of hearing amplification system
including its concept, types, components, system, prescription and electroacoustic
measurement of hearing aids, and earmolds, ear shells, and coupling systems. It also covers
the importance of bilateral fitting, patient education and counselling for hearing aids
wearers. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical. Students will be
assessed through test, assignments, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Dillon, H., Hearing Aids (2nd Ed.). Hong Kong: Thieme, 2012.
2. Ricketts, T., Bentler, R., & Mueller, H. G. (Eds.), Modern Hearing Aids Function,
Features, and Advanced Algorithms. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2014.
3. Mueller, H.G., Ricketts, T., & Bentler, R. (Eds.), Modern Hearing Aids Pre-Fitting Testing and Selection Considerations. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc.,
2012.
116
4. Bentler, R., Mueller, H.G., & Ricketts, T., (Eds.), Modern Hearing Aids
Verification, Outcome Measures, and Follow-Up. San Diego: Plural Publishing
Inc., 2013.
5. Taylor, B., & Mueller, H.G., Fitting and Dispensing Hearing Aids. San Diego:
Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
GTA213/3-Electrophysiological Tests
This course introduces students to different types of electrophysiological tests,
fundamental test parameters, procedures to perform the tests and factors that can affect the electrophysiological test results. It also covers the relationship between the test results and
ear pathologies. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions.
Students will be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports and final
examination
List of text/reference books:
1. Hall, J. W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses. Boston, Mass.: Pearson, 2007.
2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
GTB204/3-Molecular Biology Techniques
This course introduces students to fundamental knowledge and application of molecular
biology technologies in research and diagnostic laboratory. It covers all aspects of
molecular genetics, chemical bonding, genetic microbe, modification enzymes, digestion
enzyme, cloning genotype vehicle, genes manipulation methods, molecular cloning,
protein/gene sequencing, PCR and post-PCR technique, microarray, protein interaction,
Western/Northern/Far-Western analysis, protein-DNA interaction, yeast two hybrid
system and transgenic technology. Students will be trained to use Bioinformatics software
such as Gene-being through the cloning simulation project. The course will be taught via
lectures, discussion and practical sessions. The students will be assessed through
assignment, practical sessions, practical test, test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Dale, J.W. & Park, S.F., Molecular Genetics of Bacteria (5th Ed.). West Sussex:
John Wiley and Sons, 2010.
2. Primrose, S.B. & Twyman, R.M., Principles of Gene Manipulation and Genomics
(7th Ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications, 2012.
3. Green, M. R. & Sambrook, J., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (4th
Ed.). USA: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, 2012.
4. Watson, J.D., Bell, S.P., Baker, A., Gann, A., Levine, M. & Losick, R., Molecular
Biology of the Gene (6th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings,
2014.
117
GTB212/3-Basic Microbiology
This course introduces students to basic principles in microbiology which covers bacteria,
viruses, fungus and parasites. It covers microbial diversity, genetic, physiology,
biochemistry, reproduction, host-microorganism interaction and basic clinical
microbiology. Health and safety aspects will be highlighted. The course will be conducted
via lecture, practical and seminar. The students will be assessed through tests, assignments,
presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Black, J.G. & Black, L. J., Microbiology: Principles and Explorations (9th Ed.).
New York: John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2016.
2. Nester, E.W., Anderson, D.G., Roberts, C.E. & Nester, M.T., Microbiology, A
Human Perspective (8th Ed). McGraw Hill, USA, 2015.
3. Talaro, K.P., Foundations in Microbiology (9th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill
Companies, 2014.
4. Willey, J.M., Sherwood, L.M. & Woolverton, C.J. Prescott, Harley, and Klein’s
Microbiology (10th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill Companies, 2016.
GTB218/3-Immunology II
This course introduces the students to the advanced knowledge of immunology in health
and disease. The involvement of immunological mechanisms in various diseases such as
autoimmune diseases, immunodeficiency, HIV infection, transplantation and tumour
immunology will be discussed. The students will also be exposed to the principles and
immunological methods used in research and diagnostic immunology laboratories such as
immunoprecipitation and agglutination reactions, ELISA and flow cytometry as well as the
production of monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies. The course will be conducted via
lectures, laboratory practicals and group discussion. The students will be assessed through tests, OSPE, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. & Pillai, S., Cellular and Molecular Immunology
(8th Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders, Co., 2014.
2. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. & Pillai, S., Basic Immunology: Functions and
Disorders of the Immune System (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders, Co.,
2015.
3. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. & Shlomchik, M., Immunobiology: The
Immune System in Health and Disease (9th Ed.). New York: Garland Publishing
Co., 2016.
4. Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. & Roitt, I., Immunology (8th Ed.). Edinburgh:
Mosby, 2012.
5. Sompayrac, L.M., How the Immune System Works (4th Ed.) UK: John Wiley &
Sons Ltd, 2012.
118
GTB219/3-Pharmacology I
This course introduces students to basic knowledge and principles of pharmacology, uses
and effects of drugs to human health and quality of life. It covers fundamental aspects such
as pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, cellular pharmacology, biochemistry,
physiology, quantitative pharmacology and systemic pharmacology (autonomic and
central nervous system, cardiovascular, respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine,
antimicrobials and anti-inflammatory). This course will be conducted through lectures,
tutorial and practical approaches. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments,
practical reports, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Tripathy, K.D., Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (7th Ed.) New Delhi:
Jaypee Brothers, 2013.
2. Harvey, R.A., Clark, M.A., Finkel, R., Ray, J.A., Whalen, K., Lippincott’s
Illustrated Reviews (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011.
3. Katzung, B.G., Masters, S.B., Trevor, A.J., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology
(12th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill Professional Publishing, 2012.
4. Hitner, H. and Nagle, B.T., Pharmacology: An Introduction (6th Ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2011. 5. Rang, H.P., Ritter, J.M. & Flower, R.J., Henderson, G., Rang & Dale’s
Pharmacology. (7th Ed.). Philadelphia: Churchill Livingstone, 2011.
GTB221/3-Basic Haematology
This course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of basic principles in
haematology. It covers topics pertaining structure and function of blood cells,
haematopoiesis, introduction to anaemia and haemostasis. The course will be conducted
via integrated teaching and learning approach, which comprise of lectures, practical,
seminar, intellectual discussion or mini project regarding health awareness specifically in
the area of hematology. The students will be continuously evaluated on theoretical
knowledge, practical skills (SPOT/OSPE), presentation on health sustainability and final
examination. At the end of the course, the students will be equipped with the concepts and
knowledge for the best practices in discipline of basic haematology.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bain, B.J. Bates, I., Laffan, M.A. & Lewis S.M., Dacie and Lewis Practical
Haematology (11th Ed.). Churchill Livingstone Elservier, 2012.
2. Harmening, D.M., Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis (5th
Ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Co., 2008. 3. Hoffbrand, A.V. & Moss, P.A.H., Essential Haematology (6th Ed). Wiley-
Blackwell, 2011.
4. Hoffbrand, A.V., Catovsky, D., Tuddenham, E.G.D., & Green, A.R.,
Postgraduate Haematology (6th Ed.). Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.
119
5. Lewis, S.M., Bain, B.J. & Bates, I., Dacie and Lewis Practical Haematology (10th
Ed.). Philadelphia: Elsevier Science, 2007.
6. Moore, G., Knight, G. & Blann, A., Haematology (Fundamentals of Biomedical
Science). Oxford University Press, 2010
7. Rodak, B.F., Fritsma, G.A. & Doig, K., Haematology: Clinical Principles and
Applications (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia: Elsevier Science, 2007.
GTB222/4-Pathology
This course introduces students to the scope and history of pathology, organization and
nomenclature used in pathology, fundamental mechanisms and the types of cell injuries,
inflammation, haemodynamic disturbances, neoplasia, as well as health diagnostic tests
conducted in the pathology laboratory such as histopathology, cytology, enzyme
histochemistry and immunohistochemistry. Students will be provided with practical
knowledge on tissue fixation, processing, microtomy, staining and museum techniques.
This course is conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and discussions. The
students’ knowledge is evaluated through tests, assignments, laboratory reports and final
examination. Their communication skills and team work performance will be assessed
through group presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Kumar V., Abbas, A.K., Aster, JC, Robbins Basic Pathology, (9th Ed.), Elsevier,
2013.
2. Underwood, J.C.E and Cross S.S., General and Systemic Pathology, (5th Ed.),
Churchill Livingston/ Elsevier, 2009.
3. Kumar, V., Abbas, K., Fausto, N. & Aster, C., Robbins and Cotran Pathologic
Basis of Disease (8th Ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders, Elsevier, 2010.
4. Young, B., Stewart, W., and O’Dowd, G., Wheater’s Basic Pathology: A Text,
Atlas and Review of Histopathology (4th Ed.), London : Churchill Livingstone,
EIsevier, 2005.
GTB224/3-Imunology I
This course introduces the students to the basic concepts of the immune system and its
involvement in health and disease. It covers the development of the immune system,
component of the immune system, innate immunity, immunoglobulin structure, antigen-
antibody reactions, cytokines, complement components and immune response. The
concept of immunization and, the role and importance of the immune system in infectious
diseases and hypersensitivity reactions will also be discussed. The course will be conducted
via lectures and seminar. The students will be assessed through tests, assignments,
presentation and final examination.
120
List of text/reference books:
1. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. & Pillai, S., Cellular and Molecular Immunology
(8th Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders, Co., 2014.
2. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. & Pillai, S., Basic Immunology: Functions and
Disorders of the Immune System (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders, Co.,
2015.
3. Ingale, A. Basic Immunology. New Central Book Agency (P) Ltd., 2012.
4. Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. & Roitt, I., Immunology (8th Ed.). Edinburgh:
Mosby, 2012.
5. Sompayrac, L.M., How the Immune System Works (4th Ed.) UK: John Wiley &
Sons Ltd, 2012.
GTB225/3-Epidemiology
This course aims to provide students a comprehensive introduction to the principles and
methods of epidemiology which covers the causes of disease and how epidemiology can
be used for the prevention of disease. It also covers health promotion, including
environmental and occupational health. This course will be taught through lectures and
tutorials. Students’ knowledge will be assessed through quiz, tests and final examination,
while their soft skills such as scientific thinking and communication skills will be assessed through assignment and tutorial exercises.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ray M. Merrill., Introduction to Epidemiology (6th Ed.). Jones & Bartlett
Learning, 2013.
2. Webb, P. & Bain, C., Essential Epidemiology: An Introduction for Students and
Health Professionals (2nd Ed.). Cambridge University Press, 2011.
3. Robert H. Friis & Thomas A. Sellers., Epidemiology for Public Health Practice
(5th Ed.), Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2014.
4. Gordis, L., Epidemiology (4th Ed.). Saunders Elsevier, 2009.
GTD212/3-Dietetics Skills and Communication
This course focuses on the theoretical and practical aspects of dietetics and communication
skills. This course will also enhance individual skills in communicating with individual
clients and a group of clients both verbally and in written form, establishing rapport with
the health care team, obtaining and evaluating food records, planning menus, using relevant
equations for the determining of calories, documentation of nutritional care process using
the SOAP and ADIME formats and other educational tools. This course also exposes
students to many activities such as development of educational tools, conducting mock diet interviews, case presentations, case discussions and case report writing. The students will
also attend various tutorial sessions emphasing on the aspects of nutritional education and
cultural factors which influences the patients’ diet.
121
List of text/reference books:
1. Bauer, K.D and Sokolik, C.A., Basic Nutrtition Counseling Skills Development,
America Wadsworth Group, 2002.
2. Alpers, D.H., Stenson, W.F. and Bier, D.M., Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics,
(4th Ed.), Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008.
3. Winterfeldt, E.A. Bogle, M.L and Lea L. Dietetics: Practical and Future Trends,
Wadsworth Publisher Co. 2005.
GTF200/3-Criminalistics
This course introduces students to basic elements of forensic science. It provides
information on physical evidence and its collection and preservation from crime scenes.
Impression evidence--finger prints, ear and lip prints, foot prints, tool marks, and tyre
prints-- used in identification of individuals and objects is taught. A brief account on trace
evidence materials such as dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included. Introductory
topics on biological evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned documents
also form part of the syllabus. The students also learn principles of photographic
techniques, digital cameras, microscopy, and uses of invisible radiation (UV, IR and X-
rays) in crime detection. The contents of the course are interdisciplinary that would enable
the students to have sufficient knowledge and intellectual level to take up the advance forensic courses in their third and fourth years. The course will be taught via lectures,
tutorial, practical and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments,
practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Kaye B.H., Science and the Detective, VCH, New York, Wiley, 1995.
2. Houck M.M. & Siegel J.A., Fundamentals of Forensic Science (3rd Ed.).
Academic Press, 2015.
3. Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science, An Introduction to Scientific
and Investigative Techniques, (4th. Ed.), CRC Press, 2016.
4. Bertino, A.J., Forensic Science: Fundamentals and Investigations. Cengage
Learning., 2008.
5. Thomson, T. & Black, S., Forensic Human Identification: An Introduction. CRC
Press, 2006.
GTF204/3-Forensic Psychology
This course introduces students to behavioural aspects and human cognitive in crime from
the perspectives of perpetrators and victims. Discussions will be concentrated on
multifarious forms of crimes, juvenile issues, and adult criminals. The role of forensic psychologists, the interdisciplinary connections between psychology and law, the use of
psychological measurements, treatment and rehabilitation will also be clarified. The course
will be taught via lectures, seminar and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests,
assignments, seminar and final examination.
122
List of text/reference books:
1. Matthew, T.H., Forensic Psychology (2nd Ed.). John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
2. Davies, G.M. & Beech, A.R., Forensic Psychology: Crime, Justice, Law,
Interventions (2nd Ed.). John Wiley & Sons, 2012.
3. Turvey B., Criminal Profiling - An Introduction to Behavioral Evidence Analysis.
Academic Press, London, 2002.
GTF206/3-Organic Chemistry II
This course introduces students to aromacity, reactions of benzene and substituted
benzenes, reactions of carbonyl compounds (carboxylic acids and their derivatives,
aldehydes and ketones) with oxygen and nitrogen nucleophiles, carbon nucleophiles and
the hydride ion. The course also covers the identification of organic compounds using
integrated techniques, such as mass spectrometry, infrared spectroscopy, ultraviolet/visible
spectroscopy and NMR. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and discussion.
Students will be assessed through test, assignments, presentation of work from internet
sources, reading materials or research articles and final examination.
Main references supporting this course:
1. Wade L.G. Organic Chemistry, (9th Ed.), Pearson Prentice Hall, 2016.
2. Solomons T.W.G., Fryhle C.B, and Snyder S.A. Organic Chemistry, (12th Ed.).
Wiley, 2016.
3. Smith J.G and Smith J.G. Organic Chemistry, (3rd Ed.). McGraw Hill, 2011.
Additional references supporting the course:
1. McMurry J. E.,Organic Chemistry (8th Ed.). Brooks/ Cole, 2012.
2. Bruice P. Y., Organic Chemistry (7th Ed.). Prentice Hall, USA, 2012.
GTF207/2-Analytical Chemistry Practical
This course exposes student to various analytical chemistry practical such as absorption
spectroscopy for determination of iron complex with 1,10-phenanthroline, application of
polarographic technique for determination of ascorbic acid in fruit juice samples,
voltammetric technique for determination of plumbum in water samples, separation of
mixing acid using ion exchange resin, electrogravimetry technique for determination of
copper in unknown sample, application of infrared spectrometry technique for quantitative
analysis of m-xylene dan p-xylene in xylene mixing sample, application of gas
chromatography (GC) for separation and quantitative identification of a mixing solution of
cyclohexane, methylene chloride in toulene, HPLC technique for separation of
hydrocarbon mixture, visible spectrometry technique for determination of mole ratio of
1,10-phenanthroline in complex form, atomic absorption spectrometry for determination
of calcium and also determination of sodium using flame spectroscopy technique. The
course will be taught via briefings and practical sessions, where students are encouraged
in group collaboration to solve problems. Students will be assessed through test and
practical reports.
123
List of text/reference books:
1. Shirley B. & Michelle C., Forensic Application of High Pressure Liquid
Chromatography. USA: CRP Press/Taylor and Francais, 2010
2. Christian G.D., Analytical Chemistry (6th Ed.). John Wiley and Sons, 2004.
3. Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel
Dekker, 2004.
4. Robert, L.G. & Eugene, F.B., Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography (4th Ed.)
Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-Interscience, 2004.
5. Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications (3rd Ed.) West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007
6. Trimm H.H., Analytical Chemistry: Methods and Applications. Apple Academic
Press, 2011.
7. Kenkel J., Analytical Chemistry for Technicians (4th Ed.). CRC Press, 2014.
GTF210/3-Material Chemistry
This course introduces students to the characteristics of materials, processing and the uses of metals, alloys, polymers, ceramics and composites as well as their sustainability uses. It
also covers the importance of material chemistry in daily life to ensure the quality of life,
and its knowledge in forensic application and research. The course will be taught via
lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignments and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Allcock H.R., Introduction to Materials Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, USA,
2008.
2. Callister W.D., Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction (8th Ed.).
USA: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.
3. Fahlman B.D., Materials Chemistry (2nd Ed.). New York: Springer, 2011.
4. Lewis P.R., Reynolds K. and Gagg C., Forensic Materials Engineering.
Washington DC: CRC Press, 2004.
5. Temenoff J.S. & Mikos A.G., Biomaterials: The Intersection of Biology and Material Science. Pearson International Edition, 2008.
GTF212/4-Analytical Chemistry II
This course introduces students to analytical chemistry knowledge and best practice that
has not been covered in Analytical Chemistry I which include spectrochemistry topics such
as introduction to spectrochemistry methods, instrumentation of optical spectrometry,
molecular absorption spectrometry, molecular flourescence spectroscopy and atomic
spectroscopy. For absorbtion methods, it covers introduction of solvent extraction, gas
chromatography and high performance liquid of chromatography (HPLC). Under
electrochemistry methods, it covers new and innovative analysis that can be explored in
potentiometry and voltammetry in water analysis. The course will be taught via lectures
tutorials and discussion, where students are encouraged in group collaboration to solve
problems. Students will be assessed through test, assignments and final examination.
124
List of text/reference books:
1. Niessen, W.M., Liquid Chromatography--Mass Spectrometry (3rd Ed.), Boca
Raton: CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006.
2. Hoffmann, E., Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications (3rd Ed.). West
Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007.
3. Welz, B., Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (3rd Ed.). Weinheim: Wiley-VCH,
1999.
4. Aguilar, M., Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel
Dekker, 2004.
5. Robert, L.G. & Eugene, F.B., Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography (4th Ed.),
Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-Interscience, 2004.
6. Lough, W.J. & Wainer, I.W., High Performance Liquid Chromatography:
Fundamental, Principles and Practice. London: Blackie Academic &
Professional, 1996.
7. Mitra S., Sample Preparation Technique in Analytical Chemistry. USA : John
Wiley, 2003
8. Gosser, D. K., Cyclic Voltammetry Simulation and Analysis of Reaction Mechanisms. Weinheim: VCH, 1993.
GTF213/3-Introduction to Criminology
This course provides knowledge on basic concepts and theories in criminology. This
knowledge would enable students to understand issues and problems of specific crime
clusters for example youth, environment, media, technology, and others. It also explores
fundamental research on equality, human rights and security. The course will be taught via
lectures, tutorial and discussion, Students will be assessed through assignments, report and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Siegel, L.J., Criminology: Theories, Patterns and Typologies (11th Ed.). CA:
Nadworth, 2012
2. Doerner, W.G and Lab, S.P., Victimology (6th Ed.). Anderson, 2011.
3. Berkan, S.E., Criminology: A Sociological Understanding (5th Ed.). Prentice Hall,
2011.
GTF214/3-Pollutions and Environmental Chemistry
This course introduces student to pollutant agents and environment which covers
introduction to component of environment, including water, energy, health, agriculture and
biodiversity as general, environmental quality act and wáter quality standard, nutrient and
eutrofication, heavy metals, disolved oxygen (DO) biology oxygen demand (BOD),
chemical oxygen demand (COD), meteorology of air pollution, concept of water pollution,
water and air chemical pollutants, distribution of air pollutant, fundamental environmental
forensic and its current research. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and
discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final
examination.
125
List of text/reference books:
1. Daniel, B.B & Edward, A.K., Environmental Science: Earth as a Living Planet.
USA : John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.
2. William, P.C. and Barbara, W.S., Environmental Science: A Global Concern.
USA: McGraw Hill, 1997.
3. Shradha, S., Manisha, S. & Ranjana, S., A Text Book of Environmental Studies.
New Delhi: AITBS Publishers, 2005.
4. Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) & Subsidiary Legislation. Kuala
Lumpur: International Law Book Services, 2007.
5. Suzanna, M. I., Environmental Law in Malaysia. Bangi: Penerbit UKM, 2006.
6. Winfield, A., Environmental Chemistry. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press, 2000.
7. Roy, M.H., Principles of Environmental Chemistry. Cambridge, UK: RSC
Publishing, 2007.
GTF215/3-Natural Product Chemistry
This course introduces students to the characteristics of materials, processing and the uses
of metals, alloys, polymers, ceramics and composites as well as their sustainability uses. It
also covers the importance of material chemistry in daily life to ensure the quality of life, and its knowledge in forensic application and research. The course will be taught via
lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignments and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Stanforth, S.P., Natural Product Chemistry at a Glance, Blackwell Publishing,
2006.
2. Torssel, K.B.G., Natural Product Chemistry: Mechanic and Biosynthetic
Approach to Secondary Metabolism. John Wiley & Sons, 1982.
3. Sarker, S.D. and Nahar, L., Chemistry for Pharmacy Students: General Organic
and Natural Product Chemistry. John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
4. Hornback, J. M., Organic Chemistry. Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005.
GTJ205/4-Nursing Foundation III
This course introduces students to the nursing foundation III. It covers the concept related
to activities of therapeutic interventions in nursing with emphasis on sustaining universal
precaution, patient’s right, and safety. This course is taught via student centered learning:
lectures, small group discussion, e-learning, and practical sessions. Students will be
assessed through assignments (e-learning), presentation, OSCE and final examination.
126
List of text/reference books:
1. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G., Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts,
Process and Practice (9th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson, 2012.
2. deWit, S.C. & O’neill, P., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing (4th Ed.).
St. Louis: Elservier Saunders, 2014.
3. Estes, M.E., Health Assessment & Physical Examination (4th Ed.). New York:
Delmar, 2010.
4. Smith, S.F., Duell, D.J., & Martin, B.C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills (8th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
5. White, L., Duncan, G., & Baurmle, G., Foundations of Basic Nursing (3rd Ed.).
USA: Delmar, 2011.
6. Wilkinson, J.M., Treas, L. S., Barnett, K. & Smith, M., Fundamentals of Nursing:
Thinking and doing, (3th Ed.). Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Publishers, (2015).
GTJ210/3-Primary Health Care, Family and Community
This course introduces students to the concept of primary health care and community by
incorporating biodiversity and environmental issues. It covers the management/
administration of public health/population problems and strategies to overcome the
problems. This course will be taught via lectures and student centered learning; small group discussion and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through assignments, test,
seminar and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Allender, J.A., Rector, C. & Warner, K.D., Community Health Nursing:
Promoting & Protecting the Public Health (7th Ed.). China: Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins, 2010.
2. Clark, M. J., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health (5th
Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. Maville, J. A. & Huerta, C. G., Health Promotion in Nursing (2nd Ed.). New York:
Thomson Delmar Learning, 2008.
GTJ213/3-Nursing Foundation Practicum I
This course introduces student to practicum nursing foundation I. It integrates skills in
nursing process, health assessment, human structures, and activities of daily living with
engagement of best practice as well as communication skills for sustainability of patient’s
quality of life. It also encourages cultural diversity and safety in nursing. Students will be
assessed through clinical performance, log book and case presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B., & Erb, G., Fundamental of Nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice (9th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson, 2012.
127
2. Estes, M.E. Health Assessment & Physical Examination, 4th Ed., Delmar: New
York, 2010.
3. Wilson, S.F & Giddens, J.F. Health Assessment for Nursing Practice, (5th Ed.),
Mosby Elsevier: St.Louis, 2013.
GTJ214/3-Medical -Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory)
This course introduces students to medical-surgical management of patient’s with
cardiovascular and respiratory diseases. The nursing care incorporates the concept of
patient-nurse partnership with multi-disciplinary approach. This course will be taught via
student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical sessions. Students
will be assessed through assignment, OSCE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Barbara, K.T., & Nancy, E.S., Introductory Medical-Surgical Nursing.
Philadelphia: W.W. Lippincott, 2010.
2. LeMone, P., Burke, K. & Bauldoff, G., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking in Patient Care (5th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2014.
3. Hinkle, J.L, & Cheever, K.H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical-
Surgical Nursing (13th Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2013 4. Smith, S.F., Duell, D.J., & Martin, B.C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills (8th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
GTJ215/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastroenterology and Nephro/ Urology)
This course introduces students to medical-surgical management of patient’s with
gastroenterology and nephron/ urology diseases. The nursing care incorporates the concept
of patient-nurse partnership with multi-disciplinary approach. Students will be assigned
into small groups to ensure equal and effective delivery of knowledge. This course will be
taught via student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical
sessions in nursing skills lab. Students will be assessed through assignment, OSCE and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Barbara, K. T., & Nancy, E. S., Introductory Medical-Surgical Nursing, (11th
Ed.) Philadelphia: W. W. Lippincott, 2014.
2. LeMone, P., Burke, K., & Bauldoff, G., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking in Patient Care, (6th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2015.
3. Smeltzer, S. C., & Bare, B. G., Hinkle, J. L., & Cheever, K. H., Brunner &
Suddarth's Textbook of Medical-Surgical Mursing, (13th Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2013.
4. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J., & Martin, B. C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills, (9th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2015.
128
GTJ216/3-Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing
This course introduces students to the theory and practices of obstetrics and gynecology
nursing. It also covers maternal and newborn care. The nursing care incorporates the
concept of patient-nurse partnership with multi-disciplinary approach. This course will be
taught via student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through assignment, OSCE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hogan MA, Low M & Tarbel MM. Maternal-Newborn Nursing, (3rd Ed.),
Pearson: New Jersey, 2013.
2. Ricci SS. Essential of Maternity, Newborn, & Women’s Health Nursing, (3rd Ed.),
Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2013.
3. Bindler, RC. Clinical Skills Manual for Maternal & Child Nursing Care, (3rd Ed.),
Pearson: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey, 2011.
4. Littleton-Gibbs LY & Engebretson JC. Maternity Nursing Care, (2nd Ed.),
Delmar, Cengage Learning: Clifton Park, New York, 2013.
5. McKinney ES. Maternal-Child Nursing, (4th Ed.), Elsevier/Saunders: St. Louis,
2013.
6. Kulenthran A. A Practical Approach to Problems in Gynecology for Undergraduates, University Malaya Press: Kuala Lumpur, 2012.
GTJ217/2-Principles of Health Management
This course introduces students to the basic knowledge of health management principles
with emphasis on transformation on current practice. It incorporates issues such as
management concepts and evolutions, organizations process, basic functions of a manager,
financial management, leadership, change, motivation, work group, team building,
decision making, conflict resolution, job satisfaction and organisation development. This
course will be taught via student centered learning: lectures and small group discussion.
Students will be assessed through assignments, presentation, and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Weiss, SA & Tappen, RM, Essentials of Nursing Leadership and Management,
(6th Ed.) F.A. Davis Company, Philadelphia, 2014.
2. Sullivan, EJ. Effective Leadership and Management in Nursing. (9th Ed.). Pearson
Education Publisher, 2017.
3. Huber, D. Leadership and Nursing Care Management. (5th Ed.), Elsevier
Saunders, St. Louis, Missouri, 2014.
4. Marquis, BL. & Huston, CJ. Leadership Roles and Management Functions in Nursing Theory And Application (8th Ed.). Lippincott William & Wilkins: USA,
2016.
129
5. Dahlkemper, TR. Anderson’s Nursing Management, and Professional Practice
for the LPB/LVN in Nursing School and Beyond, (5th Ed.). F.A. Davis Company,
Philadelphia, 2013.
6. Rigolosi MEL. Management and Leadership in Nursing And Health Care: An
Experiential Approach (3rd Ed.). Springer Publishing Company, 2012.
GTK201/3-Occupational Safety
This course introduces student to various safety hazards knowledge at workplaces.
Measures required to minimise risks of work injury due to these hazards will be discussed.
Aspects of sustainability also highlighted through component of energy, health,
agriculture, climate Change and disaster risk management, production and consumption,
population and poverty. Content of this course is streamlined with content of module IV
of the Safety and Health Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational
Safety and Health (DOSH). This course will be conducted in the form of lectures, tutorials
and field trips. Students will be tested with tests, quizz, assignments, presentations and
final examinations. Introduction to hazards, risk assessment and improvement measures
are important basic concepts need to be understood by students in the context of job safety
that takes into account the safety of employees, visitors and people who work in or the
working environment.
List of text/reference books:
1. Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994
dan Peraturan-Peraturan, ILBS, 2005.
2. Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 dan Peraturan-
Peraturan, ILBS, 2005.
3. Lingard H. & Rowlinson S. M., Occupational Health And Safety In Construction
Project Management, Taylor & Francis, 2005.
4. Manuele F.A., On The Practice Of Safety (3rd Ed.). Wiley-IEEE, 2003.
5. Reese C. D., Occupational Health And Safety Management: A Practical
Approach. CRC Press, 2003.
6. NIOSH., Keselamatan Pekerjaan-Manual Kursus Pegawai Keselamatan Dan
Kesihatan, Modul 4, 2003.
GTK202/3-Pollution And Health
This course introduces students to environmental pollution and its impact on health. It also
covers management and pollution control strategies pollutants. Emphasis is given to the
problems of pollution prevailing in Malaysia customs. These include soil pollution, air
pollution and chemical pollution. To ensure that students get a good exposure, this course
also includes some elements of sustainability during teaching and learning. Elements that encompass the entire interdisciplinary environment are emphasized. Soil pollution, for
example, is extended with a series of sampling in areas that have been identified. Aspects
that cause soil pollution such as the elements of water, air, chemicals and geographical
condition of a place also identified. In addition, the uses of soil for a variety of agricultural
130
activities are discussed in greater depth. Special emphasis on the effects of some types of
pollution on human health are taken into account and discussed during lectures and tutorial
sessions. Pollution has also generally been known to be a major cause of human health
problems. Increased production and use of a substance is reviewed and discussed to get a
more efficient solution. In addition, the pollution problems related to health, which is
usually affected by climate change and disaster management also used as a topic of
discussion during the lecture session. This course will be delivered through lectures, field
trips and practical (physical and chemical parameters of sampling environment). Students
will be assessed through assignments, seminar/seminar papers and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Calhoun Y., Water Pollution. Chelsea House Pub., 2005.
2. Ganesan Kumar., Air Toxics: Problems And Solution. Gordon & Breach Science
Publishers, 2004.
3. Mirsal I. A., Soil Pollution: Origin, Monitoring & Remediation. Springer Verlag,
2004.
4. Harrison R. M., Pollution: Causes, Effects And Control (4th Ed.). Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.
5. Behar A., Noise Control: A Primer. San Diego, CA: Singular Pub-Group, 2000.
6. Glenn F. K., Radiation Detection And Measurement, John Wiley & Sons, 1999.
GTK203/3-Occupational Health
This course introduces types of occupational hazard knowledge which are physical,
biological, chemical, ergonomic and psychosocial that could be harmful to worker’s health.
This course is also explains the methods for identification of the cause of exposure to those
risks hazard, risk assessment and its preventive measures. The contents of the course are
interdisciplinary that would enable the students to have sufficient knowledge and
intellectual level to take up the advance of occupational problems as preparatory to the next
study levels. This course will be taught via lectures, practical and field visit. Students will
be assessed through report, lab report, assignments, presentation, tests and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Barling J., Kelloway E. K. & Frone M. R., Handbook Of Work Stress. SAGE,
2004.
2. Koh D., Chia K.S. & Jeyaratnam J., Textbook Of Occupational Medicine Practice (2nd Ed.). Singapore: World Scientific Publishing Co Pte Ltd., 2001.
3. Sadhra S.S. & Rampal K.G., Occupational Health: Risk Assessment And
Management. Oxford: Blackwell Science, 1999.
4. Stranks J.W., Health And Safety At Work : Key Terms., Butterworth-Heinemann,
2002.
5. Westerholm P., Professional Ethics In Occupational Health-Western European
Perspectives, Radcliffe Medical Press, 2007.
6. Westerholm P., Nilstun T. & Øvretveit J., Practical Ethics In Occupational
Health. Radcliffe Medical Press, 2004.
131
GTK204/4-Environmental and Occupational Law
This course focuses on laws and enforcement of existing laws in Malaysia in relation to its
environmental protection, occupational safety and health. Problems encountered in law
enforcement will also be discussed. Students are also described in detail the legal
requirements and the documentation involved and their implications. The course content is
aligned with the content of Module II Course Occupational Health and Safety Officer as
appointed by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Ministry of Human
Resources, Malaysia. Environmental laws and regulations relating to food, insect and
disease control, and municipal services were also discussed. This course will be taught via
lectures, tutorial and case study discussion. Students are assessed through law case report,
assignments, mock trial presentation, tests and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Abraham R.H. et al., Environmental Law and Policy: Nature, Law and Society.
Aspen Publishers, 2004.
2. Akta Keselamatan & Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan Peraturan-
Peraturan dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS),
2009.
3. Destruction of Disease-Bearing Insects Act 1975 (Act 154). ILBS, 2001. 4. Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) & Regulations, Rules & Orders. ILBS,
2009.
5. Food Act 1983 (Act 281) And Food Regulations 1985. ILBS.
6. JKKP GP (BM)., Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan & Kesihatan, Modul
II. Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara, Malaysia, 2003.
7. Lazarus R. J., The Making of Environmental Law. University of Chicago Press,
2004.
8. Local Government Act 1976 (Act 171). ILBS. 2001.
9. Pesticides Act 1974 (Act 149). Percetakan Nasional Malaysia Berhad, 2006.
10. Prevention and Control of Communicable Diseases Act 1988 (Act 342). ILBS,
2006.
11. Street, Drainage and Building Act 1974 (Act 133). ILBS, 2000.
12. Town and Country Planning Act 1976 (Act 172). ILBS, 2006.
GTN202/3-Principles of Food Preparation
This course introduces students to food chemistry aspect and the basic cooking of various
foods such as meat, chicken, fish, vegetables, cereals and bakery products, and also the
aspect of cleanliness, sanitation and safety during food preparation. It also covers new
technique in food preparation and factors which influence the texture, colour and sensory
evaluation of foods. This course will be taught via lecture, practical and discussion session. Students will be assessed through continuous assessment, practical report and final
examination.
132
List of text/reference books:
1. Brown A., Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation (4th Ed.). Thomson
Wardsworth Pub., 2011.
2. Smith W. & Gisslen J.G., Professional Cooking (7th Ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley
& Sons Inc, 2010.
3. Mizer D.A., Porter M., Sonner B. & Drummond K.E., Food Preparation for the
Professional (3rd Ed.). USA: John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2000.
GTN207/3-Principles of Nutrition
This course focuses on the importance of essential nutrients and optimal nutrition in the
growth process and human development. Students will be introduced to functions, needs
and food sources for essential nutrients of the human diet. They will also learn the role of
food and its relationship with the economy, psychology, sociology and culture. The
students are expected to exhibit proper knowledge application and updates towards
nutrition in terms of personal, family and community health.
List of text/reference book:
1. McGuire M. & Beerman K.A.. Nutritional Sciences: From Fundamentals to Food
(Custom Edition). Thomson Woodsworth, 2011.
2. Gibney M.J., Hester, H.V. and Kok F.J., Introduction to Human Nutrition (1st
Ed.). Blackwell Sciences Limited, 2002.
3. Mahan L.K. & Arlin M., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy (11th Ed.).
Philadelphia: Elsevier Science, 2003.
4. Boyle M.A. & Roth S.L., Personal Nutrition (8th Ed.). Thomson Learning, 2012.
GTN208/3-Nutritional Biochemistry
This course will introduce students to biochemical reactions and metabolism of several key
nutrients of macronutrients and micronutrients such as vitamins and minerals, body fluid
and electrolyte balance, inter-interaction between nutrients. It also covers the relationships
between nutrients metabolism and its effects on heath and disease occurrence such as
obesity and chronic diseases as well as utilization and adaptation regulation of nutrients
metabolism in maintaining human general health. This course will be taught via lecture
and discussion session. Students will be assessed through countinuous assessment,
assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gropper S.S. & Smith J.L., Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism (6th Ed.).
USA: Thomson Wadsworth, 2012.
2. Kohlmeier M., Nutrient Metabolism. London, UK: Academic Press, 2015.
3. Shils M.E., Shike M., Ross A.C. and Caballero B., Modern Nutrition in Health
and Disease (10th Ed.). Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2006.
4. Gibney M.J., Macdonald I.A. & Roche H.M., Nutrition and Metabolism.
Blackwell Science Publishing, UK, 2003.
133
GTN213/4-Principles of Nutrition
This course introduces students to the structure and role of major macro and micro-
nutrients in human health. It also covers function, requirement and source of each nutrient.
This course will be taught via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through
test, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference book:
1. McGuire M. & Beerman K.A., Nutritional Sciences: From Fundamentals to Food
(Custom Edition). Thomson Woodsworth, 2011.
2. Gibney M.J., Hester, H.V.and Kok F.J., Introduction to Human Nutrition (1st Ed.).
Blackwell Sciences Limited, 2002.
3. Mahan L.K. & Arlin M., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy (11st Ed.).
Philadelphia: Elsevier Science, 2003.
4. Boyle M.A. & Roth S.L., Personal Nutrition (8th Ed.). Thomson Learning, 2012.
GTN214/4-Nutrition in a Life Cycle
The course introduces students to nutritional aspects related to human physical growth and
development throughout life cycle and nutritional needs and requirements in different life
cycle populations. It also covers the whole range of current issues of nutritional risks and
disorders throughout the life cycle ranging from foetus to ageing as well as relationship
between nutritional disorders and the occurrence of chronic diseases. This course will be
taught via lectures and discussion session. Students will be assessed through continuous
assessment, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Sarlin J. & Edelstein S., Essentials of Life Cycle Nutrition. USA: Jones and
Bartlett Publishers, 2010. 2. Brown J.E., Issacs J., Krinke B., Lechtenberg E. & Murtaugh M., Nutrition
Through the Life Cycle. CA: Wadworth Group, 2013.
3. Shils M.E., Shike M., Ross A.C. & Caballero B.. Modern Nutrition in Health and
Disease (10th Ed.). Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2006.
GTN215/3-Nutrition for Health and Fitness
This course introduces students to the role of nutrition in enhancing one's health, fitness
and sport performance. It also covers the role of energy and nutrients as the key to all
exercise and sports activities. Body composition and weight control will be discussed in
relation to losing or gaining weight through diet and exercise. This course will be taught
via lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignments,
quiz and final examination.
4. Mann J. & Trustwell S., Essentials of Human Nutrition (4th Ed.). Oxford
University Press, 2012.
5. Gibney M.J., Macdonald I.A. & Roche H.M., Nutrition and Metabolism. UK:
Blackwell Science Publishing, 2003.
134
List of text/reference books:
1. Williams M.H., Nutrition for Health, Fitness & Sport (10th Ed.). McGraw-Hill,
2013.
2. Manore M.M. & Thompson J.L., Sport Nutrition for Health and Performance.
Human Kinetics, 2005.
3. Judy A. Driskell, Ira Wolinsky. Nutritional concerns in recreation, exercise, and
sport. Boca Raton, 2009.
GTN216/4-Food Analysis
This course introduces students to sampling methods, preservation, processing of food
samples for analysis and the principal involved in determining physicochemical properties
of foods. It also covers chemical analyses include proximate, fat properties, the presence
of preservatives, physical analyses include determination of colour and texture in foods.
This course will be taught via student centred learning (SCL) lectures, tutorials, practical
sessions and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, practical reports and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Neilsen S., Food Analysis (4th Ed.). New York: Springer, 2014.
2. Pomeranz Y. & Meloan C.E., Food Analysis: Theory and Practice (3rd Ed.). New
York: Aspen Publishers, 2000.
3. Multon J.L., Analysis of Food Constituents. John Wiley & Sons, 1997.
GTN217/4-Assessment of Nutritional Status
This course introduces students to nutritional evaluation in the individual and community.
It also covers direct and indirect methods of assessment of nutritional status, food
calculation and nutrient intake, anthropometric measurement, dietary evaluation,
biochemical evaluation and clinical assessment. The students will have to collect data and
use reference standards for the different stages of age and classification criteria. This course
will be taught via lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and discussion. Students will be
assessed through tests, individual assignment, group assignment, practical reports and final
exam.
List of text/reference books:
1. Lee R. & Neiman D., Nutritional Assessment. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. Jelliffe D.B., The Assessment of Nutritional Status in the Community. Geneva:
WHO, 2007.
3. Horwerde, E.S., Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status (2nd
Ed.). CRC Press, 1999.
4. Tee E.S. et al., Nutrition Composition of Malaysian Food (4th Ed.). Kuala
Lumpur: Malaysian Food Composistion Database Programme, 1997.
5. Bendich A. & Deckelbaum R.J. (Eds.), Primary & Secondary Preventive
Nutrition. Totowa, NJ: Humana Press, 2010.
135
GTP202/3- Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders
This course introduces students to the fundamental theories of communication disorders.
It covers basic procedures in the screening, assessment, and intervention of communication
disorders cases. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials, and seminars. Students
will be assessed through assignment, presentations, quiz and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gillam, R.B., Marquardt, T.P. & Martin, F.N., Communication Sciences and Disorders: From Science to Cinical Practice. San Diego: Singular Publishing
Group, 2010.
2. Hedge, M.N., Introduction to Communicative Disorders. Austin: Pro-ed, 2010.
3. Shames, G.H., Anderson, N.B., Human Communication Cisorders: An
Introduction (3rd Ed.). Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2006.
GTP203/2- Speech Pathology Clinic I
This course trains students to the clinical procedure for history taking, formal and informal
assessments, intervention techniques for speech and language disorders. It prepares student
to the fundamental clinical skills, which is needed to qualify as a speech-language
pathologist.This course also emphasizes critical thinking through clinical reflection
sessions, and encourages creative thinking through the development of therapy materials.
This course will be delivered through lectures, discussions, and clinical observation
sessions. Students will be assessed through the material development, presentations,
observation skills, and observation reports.
List of text/reference books:
1. Paul, R., Introduction to Clinical Methods in Communication Disorders. London: Paul H Brookes Pub. Co., 2002.
2. Owens, R.E., Language Disorders: A Functional Approach to Assessment and
Intervention (4th Ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2003.
3. Shipley, K.G. & McAfee, J.G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A
Resource Manual (3rd Ed.). New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004.
GTP207/2- Speech Pathology Clinic II
This course trains students to partially conduct clinical session under one to one
supervision. The students are trained to design part of the assessment and intervention
plans. In the clinical session, the students are required to administer some basic and simple
procedures such case history interview session, rapport building with patients and assist
the clinician-in-charge during assessment and intervention. This course will be delivered
through supervised clinical session and case discussion. Students will be assessed on their
clinical performance, log book, case history reports and case presentation.
136
List of text/reference books:
1. Shipley, K.G. & McAfee, J.G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A
Resource Manual (3rd Ed.). New York: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.
2. Philips, B.J. & Ruscello, D.M., Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language
Pathology. Massachusetts: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1998.
3. Hegde, M.N., Pocket Guide to Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology.
London: Singular Publishing Group, 1998.
GTP209/2- Phonetics and Phonology
This course offers an in depth focus on the fundamental aspects of phonetics and segmental
features of spoken language by referring to the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). It
also emphasizes on the transcription practices and analysis of normal as well as dialectal
variations in the Malay Language. This course will be taught via lectures and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through assignments, practical exercises and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ladefoged, P., A Course of Phonetics (6th Ed.). Fort Worth: Harcourt Ace
Jovanovich, 2011.
2. Clark, J., Yallop, C., & Fletcher, J., An Introduction to Phonetics and Phonology
(3rd Ed.). New Jersey: Blackwell Publishers, 2007.
3. Shriberg, L.D., & Kent, R.D., Clinical Phonetics (3rd Ed.). New York: Allyn &
Bacon, 2002.
4. Edward, H.T., Applied Phonetics: The Sounds of American English (3rd Ed.).
London: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2002.
5. Roach, P., English Phonetics and Phonology: A Practical Course (3rd Ed.).
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003
GTP210/2- Clinical Linguistics
This course exposes students to various assessments of speech and language from the
linguistic perspective with reference to the standard Malay language and dialectal
variations. It also emphasizes on the application of knowledge in the management of
speech pathology cases.This course will be taught via lecture and problem-based learning.
Students will be assessed through quizz, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Boehm, J., Daley, G., Harvey, S., Hawkins, A., & Tsap, B., LARSP (Language
Assessment Remediation Screening Procedure). Users Manual, 2005.
2. Crystal, D., Profiling Linguistic Disability. London: Whurr, 1992.
3. Black, M., & Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinicians. London: Arnold, 2003.
137
GTP211/3- Pediatrics for Hearing and Speech
This course introduces students to the important aspects of pediatric that are relevant to the
field of audiology and speech pathology.Students learn about embryology; the pre, peri
and post-natal processes and its complication; and the normal as well as the abnormal
development of children. These include various syndromic cases. Inputs from other
professionals such as psychiatric, paediatrician, geneticist and occupational therapist are
also incorporated in this course to introduce the students with the concept of teamwork
approach. The course will be taught via lecture and tutorial. Students will be assessed
through quiz, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Sadler, T.W., Langman’s Medical Embryology (12th Ed.). Philadelphia: Wolters
Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
2. Haddad. D., Greene, S. & Oliver R., Core Pediatrics and Child Health. London:
Churchill Livingstone, 2000.
4. Berry, C. (Ed), Pediatric Pathology. New York: Springer-Verlag, 1981.
GTP212/2- Abnormal Psychology
This course introduces students to abnormal psychology. It also covers diagnostic
criteria and application DSM-V in identifying types of abnormal psychology and its
effects on communication. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorial and practical
session. Students will be assessed through assignment, presentation, quiz and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Butcher, J., Mineka, S., & Hooley, J., Abnormal Psychology (14th Ed.).
London: Pearson, 2010. 2. Halgin, R.P., & Whitbourne, S.K., Abnormal Psychology: Clinical Perspectives
on Psychological Disorders. Dubuque: McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3. Durand, V.M., & Barlow, D.H., Essentials of Abnormal Psychology (4th Ed.).
Pacific Grove: Wadsworth–Thompson Learning, 2006.
4. American Psychiatric Association, Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental
Disorders (5th Ed.). Arlington: American Psychiatric Association, 2013.
5. Davison, G. & Neale, J., Abnormal Psychology (8th Ed.). New York: John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., 2003
GTP213/3- Paediatrics Language Disorders
This course discusses in depth regarding pediatric language disorders such as
developmental receptive or/and expressive language disorders. It also covers on methods
of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with these types of
language disorders. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorial and problem based
learning. Students will be assessed through assignment, presentation, quiz and final
examination.
138
List of text/reference books:
1. Reed, V., An introduction to Children With Language Disorders (3rd Ed.). Boston:
Pearson/ Allyn and Bacon, 2005.
2. Owens, R.E., Language Disorders: A Functional Approach to Assessment and
Intervention (5th Ed.). Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.
3. Vinson, B.P., Language Disorders Across the Lifespan: An Introduction (2nd Ed.).
San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2008.
4. Paul, R., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment
and Intervention (3rd Ed.). St. Louis: Mosby, 2006.
GTP214/3- Speech Sound Disorders
This course prepares students in managing speech sounds disorder cases in their clinical
practice. It covers on the fundamental aspects and characteristics of articulation disorders,
cleft speech, phonological disorders and childhood apraxia of speech. The assessment and
intervention techniques are also emphasized in this course. This course will be taught via
lecture, tutorial and problem based learning. Students will be assessed through assignment,
presentation, quiz and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gordon-Brannan, M. E. & Weiss, C. E., Clinical Management of Articulatory and
Phonologic Disorders (3rd Ed.). Baltimore: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2007.
2. Bleile, K. M., The Manual of Speech Sound Disorders: A Book for Students and
Clinicians (3rd Ed). Stamford, CT: Cengage Learning, 2014.
3. Bernthal, J. E. & Bankson, N. W., Articulation and Phonological Disorders (6th
Ed.). Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2008.
4. Peterson-Falzone, S. J., Hardin-Jones, M. A. & Karnell, M. P., Cleft Palate
Speech (4th Ed.). St. Louis: Mosby, 2009.
5. Russell, J. & Albery, J., Practical Intervention for Cleft Palate Speech. Bicester,
UK: Speechmark, 2005
GTP215/3- Hearing Impairment
This course focuses on the fundamental theories of hearing impairment and its
rehabilitation. It emphasizes on paediatrics aural re/habilitation with an additional exposure
on adults’ aural rehabilitation. This course will be taught via lecture, demonstration and
problem based learning. Students will be assessed through assignments reports, test,
presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Schow, R. L. & Nerbonne, M. A., Introduction to Audiologic Rehabilitation (5th
Ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2006.
2. Tye-Murray, N., Foundation of Aural Rehabilitation: Children, Adults and Their
Family (3rd Ed.). San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2008.
3. Doyle, J., Practical Audiology for Speech Language Therapists. London: Whurr
Publisher, 2005.
139
GTP216/2- Psycholinguistics
This is an advanced course in linguistics that discusses the metalinguistic, psychological
and neurobiological processes in the acquisition, understanding and collaborative use of
language. The topics covered are language processing and production, first and second
language acquisition and bilingualism. This course also emphasises on the integration of
this knowledge into the field of speech pathology. This course will be taught via lecture,
tutorial and group discussion. Students will be assessed through assignment, quiz and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Menn, L., Psycholinguistics: Introduction and Application. San Diego: Plural
Publishing, 2010.
2. Altmann, G.T.M., Psycholinguistics Critical Concepts in Psychology. London:
Routledge, 2002.
3. Field, J., Psycholinguistics: A resource book for students. London: Routledge,
2003.
GTS201/3-Exercise Physiology
This course introduces students to physiological response in exercise and sports. This
course will provide students knowledge on basics of diverse physiological systems and
their differential impacts on exercise and sports adjustments and adaptations. The
discussions include the effects of training and exercise on various systems such as
cardiorespiratory, muscular, endocrine, metabolic systems as well as bioenergetics. This
course will be taught via lectures and practical sessions that integrates fundamental
knowledge into application. Students will be assessed through test, practical reports and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Powers S.K. & Howley E.T., Exercise Physiology: Theory and Application to
Fitness and Performanc (8th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill, 2012.
2. Katch, V.L., Katch, F.I. & McArdle, W.D., Essential of Exercise Physiology (4th
Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011.
3. Sewell D., Watkins P. and Griffin M., Sports and Exercise Science: An
Introduction (2nd Ed.). London: Hodder Education, 2012. 4. William J. Kraemer, Steven J. Fleck, Michael R. Deschenes., Exercise
Physiology: Integrating Theory and Application. Philadelphia: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2011
GTS202/2-First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
This course introduces the students to first-aid techniques and cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR) methods used in various situations with the emphasis on sports related
incidences.
140
List of text/reference books:
1. Flegel, M., Sport First Aids, (5th Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2014
2. Austin, M., Crawford, R. & Amstrong, V.J., First Aid Manual: The Authorised
Manual of St. John Ambulance, St. Andrew’s First Aid and The British Red Cross
(10th Ed.). London: Dorling Kindersley, 2014
3. National Safety Council, Standard First Aid, CPR, and AED (2nd Rev Ed.).
McGraw-Hill Companies, 2007
4. National Safety Council, Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED (2nd Ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
GTS205/3-Sports Psychology
This course introduces students to the theories and concepts in the field of sports
psychology. The course will emphasise on the significance of emotional, cognitive and
social processess in understanding sporting behaviour. Apart from that, sports psychology
also deals with mental health, community engagement, cultural conformity and well
being.This course also covers the skills and strategies to be employed for enhancement in
the ability of the athletes and in performance in competitive situations. Apart from that,
study of sport psychology also deals with mental hygiene and well being. This course will
be taught via lectures, discussions and practicals. Students will be assessed through tests, practical reports, presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Moran, A.P., Sport and Exercise Psychology: A Critical Introduction. New York,
NY: Psychology Press, 2012.
2. Eklund R.C. and Tenenbaum G., Handbook of Sport Psychology (3rd Ed.).
Hoboken, NJ: Wiley, 2007.
3. Roberts, G.C. & Treasure D.C., Advances in Motivation in Sport and Exercise (3rd
Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2012.
4. Williams, J., Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak Performance
with Powerweb (6th Ed.). Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill, 2010.
GTS206/3-Sports Training Methodology
This course introduces students to the principle of structured training based on scientific
method. This course also introduces students to the planing and integration in practice
transfer of knowledge into real world settings and analysis of athlete’s achievement in
sports. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students will be
assessed through test, assignments, presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bompa, T.O. and Haff, G., Periodization: Theory and Methodology of Training
(5th Ed.). Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2009.
141
2. Krasilshcikov O., Basics of Sports Training Methodology. New Delhi: SSS
Publications, 2014.
3. Brown L.E. & Chandler T.J., Conditioning for Strenght and Human Performance.
Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2013.
4. Cissik J., Strength and Conditioning: A Concise Introduction. London:
Routledge, 2012.
GTS207/2-Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports
This course introduces students to basic skills and game play for some sports including
badminton, soccer, volleyball and archery, by relating with the principles in kinesiology,
physiology, biomechanic and socio-psychology. This course will also emphasise on skills
acquisition, performance, competition and analysis of the games.
List of text/reference books:
1. Haywood K.M. & Lewis C.F., Archery: Steps to Success (4th Ed.). Champaign IL:
Human Kinetic, 2014.
2. Lennox, J.W., Soccer Skills and Drills. Champaign IL: Human Kinetics, 2006.
3. Grice T., Badminton: Steps to Success (2nd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics,
2008. 4. Zartman, S., Youth Volleyball: The Guide for Coaches, Parents, and Athletes.
Betterway Books, 2006.
GTS208/3-Kinanthropometry, Test and Measurements for Sport Science
This course introduces student to concepts of kinanthropometry for physical evaluation
among athletes. This course also introduces students to the important of tests and
measurements to determine athletes’ health and fitness. This course will be taught via
lecture and practical. Students will be assessed through test, practical repors and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Eston R.G. and Reilly T., Kinanthropometry and Exercise Physiology Laboratory
manual: Tests, Procedures and Data (3rd Ed.). London, UK: Routledge, 2009.
2. Pescatello L.S., ACSM’s Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription (9th
Ed.). Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer/ Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2014.
3. Lacy, A.C. and Hastad, D.N., Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education
and Exercise Science (5th Ed.). San Francisco, CA: Pearson Benjamin Cummings,
2007.
4. Morrow, Jr. J. R., Measurement and Evaluation in Human Performance. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005.
142
GTX213/3-Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine
This course introduces students to the basic principles of nuclear medicine in health.
Students will obtain basic knowledge of radioactivity, radioactive decays, radionuclide and
radiopharmaceutical production methods, types of radiopharmaceuticals used in nuclear
medicine. It also covers radiation detection and radiation monitoring statistics and internal
dose calculations in nuclear medicine imaging. The course will be conducted via lectures,
tutorials and student-centered learning like PBL. The students will be assessed through test,
presentation, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Saha, G.B., Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine (4th Ed.). Springer-
Verlag, New York, 2012.
2. Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics (7th Ed.). Lippincott William
& Wilkins, 2012.
3. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. & Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine (4th
Ed.). Elsevier, 2012.
GTX214/3-Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology
This course introduces students to the fundamentals of production of ionising radiation,
interaction of x-ray with matter, grids, intensifying screens and radiographic films. It also
covers manual film processing, automatic film processing and quality control of x-ray
films. This course will be conducted via lecture/tutorial/SCL. The students will be assessed
through continuous assessments, practical exercise, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hendee, W.R. & Ritenour E.R., Medical Imaging Physics (4th Ed.). John Wiley
& Sons Inc., 2002.
2. Allisy-Roberts, P., Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging (2nd Ed.). Elsevier, 2008.
3. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. & Boone, J.M., The Essential
Physics of Medical Imaging (3rd Ed.). Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2012.
GTX215/4-Medical Radiation Physics II
This course introduces students to the basic fundamentals of electricity, magnetism and
modern physics and its role in the modern world and important connections with almost
all areas of technological developments. The contribution of this physics knowledge to
medical radiation research and practice will also be discussed. The course will be
conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students will be assessed through test, quiz, assignment and final examination.
143
List of text/reference books:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics (10th Ed.).
Wiley, 2014.
2. Taylor, J., Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers (2nd Ed.). Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2004.
3. Beiser, A., Concepts of Modern Physics (6th Ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2003.
4. Morrison, J., Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers, (2nd Ed.). Academic
Press, 2015.
GTX216/3-Radiographic Anatomy
This course introduces students to the knowledge of basic radiographic and sectional
anatomy of the human body as perceived through the different imaging techniques of
general radiography, fluoroscopy, computed tomography (CT), magnetic resonance
imaging (MRI), ultrasonography, mammography and nuclear medicine imaging. The
course will be conducted via lecture, tutorial, PBL and practical classes. The students will
be assessed through test, presentation, OSPE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ryan S., Mc Nicholas M., & Eustace S.J., Anatomy for Diagnostic Imaging (3rd
Ed.). Saunders-Elsevier, 2011.
2. Elis H. and Logan B.M., Human Sectional Anatomy (3rd Ed.). Hodder Arnold,
2009.
3. Roman L.E., Computed Tomography for Technologists: A Comprehensive Text.
Wolter Kluwer Health/ Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011.
GTX217/3-Mathematics of Radiation Science II
This course introduces students to the ordinary differential equations (ODE) of first and
second orders, their solutions, meanings and methods of solutions that include Laplace
transforms, series solution. It also introduces Fourier series and method of separation of
variable for the partial differential equation (PDE). Simple applications relevant to medical
imaging science and research in health that will be covered such as vibrating string,
vibrating membrane. The course will be conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students
will be assessed through test, quiz, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Zill, D.G., A First Course in Differential Equations with Modeling Applications
(10th Ed.). Brooks Cole, 2012. 2. Boyce, W.E. & Diprima, R.C., Elementary Differential Equations (10th Ed.).
Wiley, 2012.
3. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics (10th Ed.). John Wiley and
Sons, 2011.
145
GTA305/3- Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology
This course introduces students to the electroacoustic measurement, compression system,
directional microphone, innovative signal processing schemes, prescription and outcome
measurement of hearing aids, and special issues in hearing aids for children and adults. It
also covers the assistive listening devices (ALDs), contralateral routing of signal (CROS),
bone conduction hearing aids, bone anchored hearing aids (BAHA), cochlear implant,
middle ear implant, and auditory brainstem implant. Physiology, components, medical and
surgical aspects, selection of candidates, programming, rehabilitation, outcome and
predictive factors cochlear implants are also emphasised. This course will be taught via
lectures, tutorials, practical and problem-based learning (PBL). Students will be assessed
through test, assignments, practical report and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
2. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
3. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis, Treatment,
Practice Management Volumes I-III (2nd Ed.). New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2008.
4. Goldfarb, R. & Serpanos, Y.C., Professional Writing in Speech-Language
Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg, E., Sippola, C., Brodsky, A.L. & LISW, The
Communication Skills Workbook. USA: Whole Person Associates, Inc., 2008.
GTA307/3-Audiology Clinic II
This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic l. In this course, students are attached
to Audiology Clinic of HUSM for two days clinic per week and supervised via experienced
Audiologists for 14 weeks. This clinical training will cover the best practice of Audiology
for both adult and pediatric cases including interviewing session for history taking,
fundamental tests such as otoscopic examination, tympanometry, acoustic reflex and pure
tone auidometry (with and without masking). This course will be taught through clinical
supervision and discussions. Students will be assessed through supervisor’s evaluation
(practical), reports, presentation, test (clinical quiz), practical test (OSCE) and log book.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. 2. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
146
3. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis,
Treatment, Practice Management Volumes I-III (2nd Ed.). New York: Thieme
Medical Publishers, 2008.
4. Goldfarb, R. & Serpanos, Y.C., Professional Writing in Speech-language
Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg, E., Sippola, C., Brodsky, A.L. & LISW, The
Communication Skills Workbook. United States of America: Whole Person
Associates, Inc., 2008.
GTA308/2-Evaluation of Balance System
This course introduces students to the fundamental aspects of balance and vestibular
system, related diseases and their pathophysiology, the importance of nystagmus in clinical
diagnosis, neuro-otological and vestibular evaluations as well as the interdisciplinary
management of patients with balance and vestibular disorders. This course also covers the
relationship between the vestibular test results and the related ear pathologies. This course
will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed
through tests, presentation, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hamid M. & Sismanis A., Medical Otology and Neurotology: A Clinical Guide
to Auditory and Vestibular Disorders. New York: Thieme, 2006.
2. Luxon, L.M., Furman, J.M., Martini A. & Stephens D., Textbook of Audiological
Medicine: Clinical Aspects of Hearing and Balance. London : Martin Dunitz,
2003.
3. Furman J.M. & Cass S.P., Vestibular Disorders: A Case-Study Approach. New
York: Oxford University Press, 2003.
GTA309/4-Audiology Clinic III
This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic I and II. Students are attached to
Audiology Clinic of HUSM for two days clinic per week and supervised via experienced
Audiologists for 14 weeks. Apart from conducting history taking and fundamental
audiological tests, students are also involved in prescribing, fitting and evaluating hearing
aid performance as well as taking ear impression. Besides students are also trained in
explaining test results and giving counseling to patients. This course will be taught through
clinical supervision and discussions. Students will be assessed through supervisor’s
evaluation (practical), reports, presentation, test (clinical quiz), practical test (OSCE) and
log book.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
147
2. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
3. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis, Treatment,
Practice Management Volumes I-III (2nd Ed.). New York: Thieme Medical
Publishers, 2008.
4. Goldfarb, R., & Serpanos, Y.C., Professional Writing in Speech-language
Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg, E., Sippola, C., Brodsky, A.L., & LISW, The
Communication Skills Workbook. USA: Whole Person Associates, Inc., 2008.
GTA310/2-Basic Medical Management for Audiologist and Speech Pathologist
This course introduces students to the aspects of fundamental human anatomy and
physiology and fundamental clinical examination that covers the respiratory,
cardiovascular and neurology systems, and special senses (smell, vision and sensation).
This course also introduces fundamental laboratory and radiological investigations and
treatment options such as pharmacology, operation, physiotherapy and occupational
therapy. This course also covers fundamental emergency procedures. This course will be
taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. The students will be assessed through
test, practical exam (OSPE), practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Herlihy, B.B., The Human Body in Health and Illness (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:
W.B. Saunders Company, 2006.
2. Marieb, E. N., Anatomy & Physiology Coloring Workbook: A Complete Study
Guide (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings, 2008.
3. Sembulingam K. & Sembulingam P., Essentials of Medical Physiology (3rd Ed.).
India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers, 2004.
4. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (12th
Ed.). New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2009.
GTA311/4-Audiological Rehabilitation
This course introduces students to the importance of audiological rehabilitation,
interdisciplinary roles of the involved professionals, auditory and visual aspects in
communication, psychosocial aspects of hearing loss, rehabilitation techniques for children
and adults with hearing loss, tinnitus and vestibular disorders. It also covers important
issues such as the effects of hearing loss on language development and the communication
modes for individuals with pre-lingual and post-lingual hearing loss. This course will be
taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through test,
presentation, practical reports and final examination.
148
List of text/reference books:
1. Johnson, C.E., Introduction to Auditory Rehabilitation: A Contemporary Issues
Approach. Allyn & Bacon, 2011.
2. Wolfe, J. & Schafer, E., Programming Cochlear Implants (Core Clincal Concepts
in Audiology). San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010.
3. Seewald, R. & Tharpe, A. M., Comprehensive Handbook of Pediatric Audiology.
San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010
4. Herdman, S. J., Vestibular Rehabilitation (3rd Ed.). F.A. Davis Company, 2007.
5. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
GTB307/3-Medical Parasitology
This course covers the definitions, classifications and nomenclatures of protozoa and
helminths that infect humans. In addition, focus will be on the theoretical and practical
aspects of routine and molecular diagnosis of parasites that affects human health. The
knowledge on morphology, life cycle, epidemiology, brief pathogenesis, prevention and
control of protozoal and helminthic infections will be integrated during discussion sessions.
Furthermore, identification keys such as unique characteristics of eggs, larvae and pupae
in water environment; and the principles of controlling the four medically important genera of Malaysian mosquitoes will also be discussed. The final topic will cover the structure,
function and administration of a typical parasitology laboratory. The course will be
conducted via lecture, tutorial and practical. The students will be evaluated through tests,
SPOT/OSPE (practical tests), assignment, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bogitsh, B. J., Carter, C. E. & Oeltmann, T. N., Human Parasitology. (4th Ed.),
Elsevier Academic Press, San Diego, 2013.
2. Ng, F.S.P. & Yong, H.S., Mosquitoes and Mosquito-Borne Diseases. Academy
of Sciences Malaysia, 2000.
3. Palmer, S.R., Soulsby, L., Torgerson, P.R. & Brown, D.W.G., Eds., Oxford
Textbook of Zoonoses: Biology, Clinical Practice, and Public Health Control.
Oxford University Press, 2011.
4. Parija, S.C., Textbook of Medical Parasitology: Protozoology & Helminthology,
(4th Ed.), All India Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi, 2013.
GTB310/3-Clinical Biochemistry
This course covers the theory and pathophysiological biochemistry of the human body.
Students will be exposed to the principles of biochemical tests in the laboratory and the interpretation of results from laboratory analyses. The students will also be exposed to
some skills in performing laboratory diagnostic procedures in chemical pathology such as
liver function test, renal test, pancreas and gastrointestinal tract test and other major
biochemical parameters, either using manual diagnostic procedures or automation. Quality
149
control program and laboratory administration in chemical pathology laboratory including
specimen receiving and processing will also be covered. The course will be conducted via
lecture, practical and tutorial. The students will be evaluated through tests, practical
reports, OSPE (practical tests) and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ahmed, N. Clinical Biochemistry. New York: Oxford University Press, 2011
2. Allan, G., Michael, J.M., Robert, A.C., Denis St. J.O., Michael, J.S. & James, S.,
Clinical Biochemistry; An Illustrated Coluor Text (4th Ed.). Churchill
Livingstone, Elseiver, 2008.
3. Harold, V., Practical Clinical Biochemistry (4th Ed.). New Delhi: CBS Publishers
& Distributors Pvt. Ltd, 2005.
4. Lieberman, M., Marks, A.D. & Peet, A., Marks' Basic Medical Biochemistry: A
Clinical Approach (4th Ed.). Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2013.
5. Nancy A. Brunzel. Fundamentals of Urine and Body Fluid Analysis (3rd Ed.).
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company, 2012.
6. Swaminathan, R., Handbook of Clinical Biochemistry (2nd Ed.). New Jersey:
World Scientific, 2011.
7. Nessar, A. (Ed), Clinical Biochemistry: Fundamentals of Biomedical Science. Oxford University Press. 2011.
GTB316/3-Transfusion Science and Blood Banking
This course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of transfusion science and
blood banking. It covers topics of blood group, blood component, pretransfusion testing,
laboratory management and complication of blood transfusion. The course will be
conducted via integrated teaching and learning approach, which comprise of lectures,
practicals, seminar, intellectual discussion or mini project especially regarding blood
donation awareness in improving patient health and quality of life. The students will be
evaluated through test, practical test (SPOT/OSPE), presentation, test and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Blaney, K.D. & Howard, P.R., Basic and Applied Concepts of Blood Banking and
Transfusion Practices (3rd Ed.). Elsevier Saunders, 2012.
2. Gretchen, J., Zundel, W. & Gockel-Blessing, E., Clinical Laboratory Blood
Banking and Transfusion Medicine Practices. Pearson 2014.
3. Harmening, D.M., Modern Blood Banking and Transfusion Practices (6th Ed.).
F.A. Davis Company, 2012. 4. Knight, R., Transfusion and Transplant Science (Fundamentals of Biomedical
Science). Oxford University Press, 2013.
5. Quinley E. D., Immunohematology: Principles and Practice (3rd Ed.). Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2010.
150
6. Roback, J.D. (Ed.), Technical Manual, American Association of Blood Bank (16th
Ed.). American Association of Blood Banks (AABB), 2008.
7. Rudmann, S.V., Textbook of Blood Banking and Transfusion Medicine (2nd Ed.).
NY: Elsevier Science, 2005.
GTB317/3-Cinical and Laboratory Haematology
This course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of clinical and laboratory
haematology. It covers topics on haematological diseases, laboratory investigations,
laboratory management and instrumentations. The course will be conducted via integrated
teaching and learning approach, which comprise of lectures, practicals, seminar,
intellectual discussion or mini project regarding health awareness especially in
haematological diseases. The students will be evaluated throught test, practical test
(SPOT/OSPE), presentation, test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bain, B.J., Bates, I., Laffan, M.A. & Lewis S.M., Dacie and Lewis Practical
Haematology (11th Ed.). Churchill Livingstone Elservier, 2012.
2. Harmening, D.M., Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis (5th
Ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Co., 2008. 3. Hoffbrand, A.V. & Moss, P.A.H., Essential Haematology (6th Ed). Wiley-
Blackwell, 2011.
4. Hoffbrand, A.V., Catovsky, D., Tuddenham, E.G.D. & Green, A.R., Postgraduate
Haematology (6th Ed.). Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.
5. Lewis, S.M., Bain, B.J. & Bates, I., Dacie and Lewis Practical Haematology (10th
Ed.). Philadelphia: Elsevier Science, 2007.
6. Moore, G., Knight, G. & Blann, A., Haematology (Fundamentals of Biomedical
Science). Oxford University Press, 2010
7. Rodak, B.F., Fritsma, G.A. & Koehane, E.M., Hematology-Clinical Principles
and Applications (4th Ed.). Elservier, 2011.
8. Simmons A., Hematology- A Combined Theoretical and Technical Approach (2nd
Ed.). Butterworth Heinemann, 1996.
GTB318/3-Pharmacology II
This course introduces students to the concept of advance pharmacology and application
in health. It covers pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, pharmacogenetic, quantitative
pharmacology, systemic pharmacology and an introduction to pharmacology research. The
final topic including the research in drug discovery and post-marketing surveillance.The
course will be conducted via lecture, practical, discussions and field trip when possible.
The students will be evaluated through tests, assignment, practical reports, presentation and final examination.
151
List of text/reference books:
1. Rang HP et al., Rang & Dale’s Pharmacology. (8th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone
Katzung, B.G Masters S.B., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (13rd Ed.). NY:
McGraw-Hill Co., 2015.
2. Whalen K, Lippincott’s Illustrated Reviews: Pharmacology. (6th Ed.), Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2014.
3. Katzung B & Trevor AJ, Basic and Clinical Pharmacology. (13th Ed.), McGraw-
Hill Education / Medical, 2015.
4. Rosenbaum SE, Basic Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics: An Integrated Textbook and Computer Simulations. (2nd revised ed.), John Wiley & Sons Inc.,
2016.
GTB319/3-Toxicology
This course introduces students to the fundamental concept of toxicology. Students are
given opportunity to acquire knowledge, experience and innovative ideas in order to
improve their skills in health, research andquality of life.This course covers the quantitative aspects and kinetics including the effects of dose, effect and tissue responses to toxic
agents, the excretion of toxic substances, toxic reaction compounds, toxic substances such
as solvent, food additives, herbicides and pesticides, detergents and materials other
materials, the size of the levels of toxicity testing, in vitro and in vivo, toxicokinetic,
toxicity to target organs, particularly the human, carcinogen, mutagen teratogen, the
mechanism of toxicity, laboratory tests, an antidote, and treatment. The course will be
conducted via lecture, practical and discussion. The students will be evaluated through
tests, assignments, presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Casarett & Doull's, Essentials of Toxicology, (3rd Ed.), (Lange), 2015.
2. Tripathy, K.D., Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (7th Ed.) New Delhi: Jaypee
Brothers, 2013.
3. Harvey, R.A., Clark, M.A., Finkel, R., Ray, J.A., Whalen, K., Lippincott’s
Illustrated Reviews (5th Ed.).Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011. 4. Katzung, B.G., Masters, S.B., Trevor, A.J., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology
(12th Ed.). New York:McGraw-Hill Professional Publishing, 2012.
5. Hitner, H. and Nagle, B.T., Pharmacology: An introduction (6th Ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2011.
6. Rang, H.P., Ritter, J.M. & Flower, R.J., Henderson, G., Rang & Dale’s
Pharmacology. (7th Ed.). Philadelphia: Churchill Livingstone, 2011.
GTB320/3-Medical Virology and Mycology
This course introduces students to the knowledge of virology and medical mycology that
includes the type of disease caused by a virus and mycoplasma, reservoirs of infection and
transmission of infection detrimental to the health and quality of life. It also includes
laboratory diagnosis, type of treatment, and prevention of viral or mycoplasma infections.
152
This course will be conducted through lectures, practical and seminar. Students will be
assessed through tests, OSPE (practical test), presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Betty, A.F., Daniel, F.S. & Alice, S.W. Bailey and Scott’s Diagnostic
Microbiology (13th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press, 2013.
2. Borgers, M., Hay, R. & Rinaldi, M.G., Current Topics in Medical Mycology (Vol.
4). German: Springer. 2011
3. Carter, J. & Saunders, V., Virology: Principles and Applications (2nd Ed.). USA:
John Wiley & Sons, 2013.
4. Cheesbrough, M., District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part 1 (2nd
Ed.). U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press, 2010.
5. Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M., Jawetz, Melnick and
Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (26th Ed.). USA: Mc Graw Hill, 2013.
6. Gerald, L.M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D., Mandell, Douglas, and Bennett’s
Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (8th Ed.). London: Churchill
Livingstone, 2014.
GTB321/3-Clinical Diagnostic Laboratory Management
The course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of total quality management
(TQM) in clinical diagnostic laboratory. TQM in clinical diagnostic laboratory emphasized
the deployment of quality assurance principles and best practice through the development
and implementation of quality assurance plans and phases. This course also covers topics
on the concept of occupational health and safety, the quality systems, ISO 9001 and MS
ISO 15189, in relation to the management of clinical diagnostic laboratory. The course will
be conducted via blended learning approach, which comprise of lectures, seminars, online
learning activities and management attachment in various clinical diagnostic laboratories.
The students will be evaluated through online collaboration assignment, written test,
electronic forum, seminar presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Centre for Global Sustainability Studies USM Policy on Sustainability 2014.
Universiti Sains Malaysia, 2014.
2. Robbins S. P., De Cenzo D. A., Coulter M. A., Fundamentals of Management:
Essential Concepts and Applications (9th Ed.), Upper Saddle River :
Pearson/Prentice Hall, 2016.
3. Carson, P.A. & Dent. N.J., Good Clinical, Laboratory and Manufacturing
Practices: Techniques for the QA Professional. Cambridge: RSC Publication,
2007. 4. Laposta M & Kinkus C.A., Laboratory Management (Diagnostic Standards of
Care). Demos Medical Publication, 2011.
153
5. Cooper, G. & Gillions, T., Producing Reliable Test Results in the Medical
Laboratory. Irvin, C.A.: Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc., 2007.
6. Department of Standards Malaysia, MS ISO 15189:2007. Medical Laboratories
– Particular Requirements for Quality and Competence. Cyberjaya: Department
of Standards Malaysia, 2008.
7. International Standards Organization. ISO 9001:2008. Quality Management
Systems – Requirement (4th Ed.), ISO, 2008.
8. Singer, D.C., Stefan, R. & Staden, J., Laboratory Auditing for Quality and
Regulatory Compliance. NY: Taylor & Francis Group, 2005.
GTB322/3-Medical Bacteriology
This course covers the details knowledge of general characteristics of medically important
bacteria. It covers fundamental aspects include effect of these organisms to human health,
their role in the course of diseases, epidemiology, reservoirs, bacterial transmission,
pathogenesis of diseases and clinical manifestations. The students will also be taught on
appropriate clinical specimens collection and transportation techniques, the principle and
processing techniques of laboratory detection, isolation and identification of pathogenic
bacteria. Apart from that, student will acquire knowledge concerning on advantages and
disadvantages of available laboratory techniques or tests (such as staining, culture,
serological tests and molecular methods) used for bacterial detection. Prevention, control methods and treatment of the diseases caused by those bacteria are also discussed. The
course will be conducted via lecture, practical and tutorial. The students will be evaluated
through tests, SPOT/OSPE (practical tests), presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Betty, A.F., Daniel, F.S. & Alice, S.W., Bailey and Scott’s Diagnostic
Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press, 2007.
2. Cheesbrough, M., District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part 2 (2nd
Ed.). U.K: Cambridge University Press, 2006.
3. Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M., Jawetz, Melnick &
Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.). USA: Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
4. Gerald, L.M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D., Mandell, Douglas, and Bennett’s
Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.). London: Churchill
Livingstone, 2010.
5. Maria, D.D., Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby, 1997.
GTD311/3-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I
This course explains the rationale of modifying normal diet to therapeutic diet in terms of
nutrient composition, texture and presentation. It enables students to understand the importance of therapeutic diet in the prevention and treatment of various diseases in order
to ensure sustainability of good health. Topics include dietary management of
gastrointestinal diseases, cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, inborn errors of metabolism,
body weight control, eating disorders, failure to thrive, food allergy, food intolerance and
154
rehabilitation. The application of food exchange lists and various dietary guidelines will
also be discussed.
List of text/reference books:
1. Thomas, B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices (The British Dietetic
Association). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
2. Nelson, J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual (8th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2003.
3. Mahan, L.K and Escott-Stump, S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy
(12th Ed.). Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD321/3-Therapeutic Diet Preparation
This course gives practical training in the methods of therapeutic diet preparation for
various disease conditions. Usage of foods for meal preparation and the minimisation of
food wastage will be discussed during diet preparation. Purchase of raw materials,
calculation of the nutrient contents in a prepared food item, preparation methods, food
serving and sensory evaluation will be emphasised. Lectures on therapeutic diet
preparation knowledge and protocols will be given before the practical session. Assessment
will be based on the students’ ability in selecting/purchasing raw materials, nutrient
calculations, demonstration of food serving, innovative and cultural-based dietary modification and sensory evaluation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Nelson, J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual (8th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2003.
2. Thomas, B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices (The British Dietetic
Association). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
3. Alpers, D.H., Stenson, W.F. & Bier D.M., Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics
(5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.
GTD323/3-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II
This course is a continuation of Principles of Diet Therapy I. This course will discuss
fundamental nutrition knowledge, principles and dietary management including the
physiological and biochemical changes that occur during renal diseases, hepatobiliary
diseases, cancer, skeletal and muscle diseases, pre and post operation conditions, trauma
and burns. This course also deals with pediatric nutrition, total enteral and parenteral
nutritions. Each topic will discuss about the theoretical and practical aspects of medical
nutrition therapy that has to be given to the patients which includes assessment, planning,
implementation, evaluation and documentation of the nutritional care processes.
List of text/reference books:
1. Thomas, B. & Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices (The British Dietetic
Association). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
155
2. Nelson, J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual (8th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2003.
3. Mahan, L.K. & Escott-Stump S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy
(12th Ed.). Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD324/3-Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I
This course exposes students to practicals involving the handling of cases in the outpatient
clinics. Students are expected to be able to integrate theoretical diet therapy knowledge
into best practice and understand that diseased condition can be improved by nutritional
intervention. Students will also be taught on how to change patients' nutritional habit by
using counselling techniques and history of prevalence. It is expected that this internship
will effectively improve their skills required for nutritional counselling sessions.
List of text/reference books:
1. Alpers, D.H., Stenson, W.F. & Bier, D.M., Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics
(5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.
2. Rolfes, S.R., Pinna, K., Whitney, E., Understanding Normal and Clinical
Nutrition, (9th Ed.). USA: Wadsworth/ Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. Mahan, L.K. & Escott-Stump, S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy
(12th Ed.). Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD325/3-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I
This course provides clinical training to the students with the intention of enhancing their
dietetic skills while giving medical nutrition therapy to the patients in hospital wards to
improve their quality of life and promote sustainability of health. This internship
programme covers individual patient approach, bed side counseling, nutrient intake
analysis and therapeutic diet planning according to patients' dietary requirements based on
diagnosis and medical report. Activities such as assessment of nutritional status and diet
surveillance are also included. The students are required to give diet education to patients
and their families. The students will understand the role and importance of dietitians in an
interdisciplinary healthcare team. Upon completion of this courses the students are
expected to submit case reports and to give case presentation of their respective case
studies.
List of text/reference books:
1. Mahan, L.K. & Escott-Stump, S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy
(12th Ed.). Saunders Co., 2007.
2. Nelms, M., Long, S. & Lacey, K., Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study
Approach (3rd Ed.). Thomson Wadswoth, 2008. 3. Thomas, B., Manual of Dietetic Practice (4th Ed.). Oxford, UK: Blackwell
Publication, 2007.
156
GTD326/3-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I
This course is a continuation of the Dietetic Internship I which will focus on dietetic
services at special units in hospitals and clinics such as ICU, CCU, pediatric, hypertension
unit and diabetes mellitus clinic. Evaluation of nutritional status, specific diet treatment
and diet surveillance of patients before discharge will also be conducted. Patient diet
management in wards whether normal, therapeutic or effective enteral-parenteral and the
lag of diet regime planning including the evaluation of the effectiveness diet regimes will
also be discussed. Students will be introduced to nutritional status evaluation and
therapeutic care of HIV, kidney, neuro-muscular and skeletal systems diseases patients and
those who suffer from cancer. Those enrolled in this course will also learn about topics
related to operations and burns patients. Ethics and bed side counseling procedures during
diet treatment session will be focussed in order to enhance students’ communication skills.
This will be undertaken with counselors. Emphasis will be on communicative ability with
the patient's family especially on the diet of patients suffering from cancer and HIV.
List of text/reference books:
1. Werbach, M.R. & Moss, J., Textbook of Nutritional Medicine. Third Line Press,
2000.
2. Skipper, A. (Ed.), Dietitian's Handbook of Enteral and Parenteral Nutrition (2nd Ed.). Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011.
3. Nelms, M., Roth, S.L. & Lacey, K., Medical Nutrition Therapy: A Case Study
Approach (3rd Ed.). Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
GTF301/3-Physical Evidence
This course introduces students to characterisation of different kinds of physical evidence
using physicochemical properties. The evidences include: paint, glass, soil, fibres, and
lamp filaments. Comparison microscopy for examination of physical evidence,
experimental techniques for the restoration of erased numbers on different metal surfaces,
and investigations related to cyber crime form part of the curriculum. Introduction to the
use of lasers and electron microscopy in the examination of physical evidence of materials;
and specialised photographic techniques including macrophotography, photomicrography
and invisible radiation photography are also included. On completion of the course the
student would acquire sufficient level of proficiency to carry out the scientific
investigations into the above kinds of physical evidence. The course will be taught via
lectures, tutorial, practical and discussion, Students will be assessed through tests,
assignments, practical reports, practical test/OSPE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Jackson, A.R.W. & Jackson, J.M., Forensic Science (2nd Ed.). Pearson, Prentice
Hall, 2008.
2. James, S.H. & Nordby, J.J., Forensic Science: An Introducion to Scientific and
Investigative Techniques (3rd Ed.). CRC Press, 2009.
157
3. Baker, J.S., Fricke, L.B., Baker, K.S. & Aycock T.L., Lamp Examination for ON
or OFF in Traffic Collisions. IL: North Western University Center for Public
Safety, 2003.
4. Bertino, A.J., Forensic Science: Fundamentals and Investigations. Cengage
Learning, 2008.
GTF305/4-Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs
This course introduces students to fundamental concept of toxicology, forensic toxicology,
poison, multiple poisoned material, chemistry and appearance of poisoned material,
multiple procedures, best practices, conventional and innovative techniques and
equipments employed to extract, identify and profile the poisoned material from biological
and autopsy specimens. Classification and identification of drugs that commonly abused,
modes of action in human body and techniques to identify and detect them will also be
emphasised. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorial, practical and discussion,
Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, practical reports, practical test/OSPE
and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Cole, M.D., The Analysis of Controlled Substance, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
2. Flanagan, R.J., Taylor, A.A., Watson, I.D. & Whelpton, R., Fundamentals of
Analytical Toxicology, New Jersey: Wiley-Interscience, 2008.
3. Jickell, S., Negrusz, A., Moffat, A.C, Osselton, M.D. & Widdop, B., Clarke
Analytical Forensic Toxicology. London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2008.
4. Karch, S.B., Postmorterm Toxicology of Abused Drugs. Boca Raton: CRC Press,
2008.
5. Moffat, A.C., Osselton, M.D. & Widdop, B., Clarke's Analysis of Drugs and
Poisons, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2011.
GTF306/3-Fire Investigation
This course introduces students to basics of fire and the causative factors of fire. The
discussions provide knowledge in fire investigation to differentiate between a fire accident
and arson and the safety measures to be followed during investigation. The lectures shall
provide in detail the different types of material evidences often encountered in structure
fires and forest fires; the methodology and current best practice to collect and pack them
and appropriate instrumental analysis to process the evidence materials. The lectures also
provide knowledge on various toxic substances usually encountered by humans in structure
fires and also explains safety measures to be followed. The course will be taught via
lectures, tutorial, practical and discussion, Students will be assessed through tests, practical report, presentation and final examination.
158
List of text/reference books:
1. David, J.I., Dehaan, J.D. & Haynes, G.A., Forensic Fire Scene Reconstruction
(3rd Ed.). (Brady Fire), New York: Pearson, 2012.
2. DeHaan, J.D., Kirk, P.L. & Icove, J.D., Kirk’s Fire Investigation (7th Ed.). (Brady
Fire), New York: Pearson, 2012.
3. Stauffer, E., Dolan, J.A. & Newman, R., Fire Debris Analysis. Burlington:
Academic Press, 2008.
4. NFPA 921: Guide for Fire and Explosion Investigations. Maryland: National Fire
Protection Agency, 2011.
5. Redsicker, D.R., Practical Fire and Arson Investigation (2nd Ed.). CRC Press,
Boca Raton, 1997.
GTF309/3-Forensic DNA Analysis
This course introduces students to the fundamental knowledge associated to forensic DNA
analysis, including the earlier developments to the most recent advances. Student will also
exposed to problems and cases associated in each technology involving DNA analysis and
ways of troubleshooting to solve the problems. Students will be trained to use apparatus
and latest innovative software invented for DNA analysis and interpret the result
accordingly. At the end of the course, student will also being exposed to real forensic cases involving DNA analysis to improve their understanding of the importance of DNA
technology in the field of Forensic Sciences. The course will be taught via lectures,
practicals and problem-based learnings (PBL). Students will be assessed through tests,
practical tests, experiments, assignments, presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Rudin, N. & Inman, K., An Introduction to Forensic DNA Analysis (2nd Ed.). CRC
Press, 2001.
2. Butler, J. & Butler, J.M., Biology and Technology Behind STR Markers.
Academic Press, 2001.
3. Budowle, B., Smith, J. & Moretti T., DNA Typing Protocols: Molecular Biology
and Forensic Analysis. Eaton Pub. Co., 2000.
4. Butler, J.M., Fundamentals of Forensic DNA Typing. Academic Press, 2009.
5. Butler, J.M, Advanced Topics in Forensic DNA Typing: Methodology. Academic
Press, 2011.
GTF311/3-Forensic Anthropology
This course introduces the students the fundamentals of Forensic Anthropology, the types
of biological and peripheral evidence useful in anthropological analysis, crime scene and excavation techniques, handling the skeletal remains, anthropometric and anthroposcopic
techniques useful for assessing race, sex, age and skull based personal identification using
video superimposition method (hands-on) and applying specific radiological skeletal traits
and the limitation therein, integrated and computer-assisted as well as morphological photo
159
to photo comparison techniques and anthropological reconstruction of population biology.
The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials, problem-based learning (PBL) and
discussions. Students will be assessed through tests, practical reports, assignment and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Komar, D.A. & Buikstra, J.E., Forensic Anthropology, Contemporary Theory and
Practice. Oxford University Press, 2008.
2. Pickering, R. & Bachman, D., The Use of Forensic Anthropology (2nd Ed.).
Florida: Charles C. Thomas, 2009.
3. Krogman, W.M. & Iscan, M.Y., The Human Skeleton in Forensic Medicine (3rd
Ed.). Illinois: Charles C.Thomas, 2013.
4. Iscan, M.Y. & Helmer, R.P. (eds), Forensic Analysis of The Skull-Cranio Facial
Analysis, Reconstruction, and Identification. New York: Wiley Liss Inc., 1993
5. Byers, S.N., Introduction to Forensic Anthropology. Boston: Allyn & Bacon,
2002
6. Christensen, A.M., Passalacqua, N.V. & Bartelink, E.J., Forensic Anthropology:
Current Methods and Practice. Academic Press, 2014.
GTF312/3-Organic Chemistry III
This course provides knowledge about the structure, nomenclature, synthesis, and reactions
of amines, phenols and alcohols. This course also covers the study of carbohydrates and
nucleic acids. The course would emphasize understanding of amino acids, peptides,
proteins, lipids and synthetic polymers and their importance in increasing the quality of
life. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students will be
assessed through test, assignments, presentation of work from internet sources, reading
materials or research articles and final examination.
Main references supporting this course:
1. Wade L.G. Organic Chemistry, (9th Ed.), Pearson Prentice Hall, 2016.
2. Solomons T.W.G., Fryhle C.B, and Snyder S.A. Organic Chemistry, (12th Ed.).
Wiley, 2016.
3. Smith J.G and Smith J.G. Organic Chemistry, (3rd Ed.). McGraw Hill, 2011.
GTF313/3-Food Chemistry
This course introduces students to the classification and structure of carbohydrates,
proteins, oils and fats. It also covers food flavour and food additives, food forensics and
the importance of quality control in food, consequence of food fraud to quality of life and food security issues. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and discussion.
Students will be assessed through test, seminar, assignment on research articles and final
examination.
160
List of text/reference books:
1. Belitz, H-D., Grosch, W. & Schieberle, P., Food Chemistry. Springer, 2009
2. Damodaran, S., Parkin, K.L. & Fennema, O.R., Fennema's Food Chemistry, CRC
Press, 2007
3. Akoh, C.C. & Min, D.B., Food Lipids: Chemistry, Nutrition, and Biotechnology.
Boca Raton: CRC, 2008.
4. Frey, C. & Rouseff, R., Natural Flavors and Fragrances: Chemistry, Analysis,
and Production. Washington, DC: American Chemical Society, 2005.
5. Otles, S., Methods of Analysis of Food Components and Additives. Boca Raton:
CRC Press, 2011.
GTF314/2-Forensic Serology
This course introduces students to the concept of antigens and antibodies and various
blood-proteins and enzymes present in the blood and body fluid. It also provides practical
knowledge to group the body fluids from crime scene and its associate health hazards, to
identify and individualise the samples. It also covers HLA system and its application to
identify individuals, the identification of patterns and effects of blood value as evidence.
The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. The students will be
assessed via test, experiments, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bidwell, J.L., Navarrete, C. & Bodmer, W.F., Histocompatibility Testing.
Imperial College Press, 2000.
2. Saferstein, R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II and III. New Jersey:
Regents/Prentice HalL, 2009.
3. Issitt, P.D., Applied Blood Group Serology (3rd Ed.). Montgomery Scientific
Publication, 1985
GTF315/3-Biological Evidence
This course introduces the students to the multiple biological evidence types of both plant
and animal origin that are found at the crime scenes, the methods of observing, describing
and collecting them, their salient morphological features useful for identification and the
procedures and best practice used in the laboratory to investigate these evidence. The
evidence types focused include, among others, pollen grains, diatoms, wood, hairs and
natural fibres, damages in cloth and necrophagous insects. Emerging areas in forensic
biology such as wild life and marine forensics and bioterrorism are also included. The
course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and problem-based learning (PBL). Students
will be assessed through tests, practical reports, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gunn A. Essentials of Forensic Biology (2nd Edition). Wiley. 2009.
161
2. Saferstein, R. (Ed.), Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II & III, (2nd Ed.). New
Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 2009.
4. Byrd, J.H. & Castner, J.L., Forensic Entomology: The Utility of Arthropods in
Legal Investigations (2nd Edition). CRC Press, 2009.
5. Ogle, R.R. & Fox, M.J., Atlas of Human Hair Microscopic Characteristics. Boca
Raton: CRC Press, 1999.
6. Robertson, J. & Grieve, M., Forensic Examination of Fibres. London: Taylor &
Francis, 1999.
GTJ319/3-Nursing Foundation Practicum II
This course introduces student to practicum nursing foundation II. It covers the concept
related to activities of daily living, therapeutic interventions in nursing, medical and
surgical management of patients with cardiovascular, respiratory, gastroenterology and
nephrology/urology problems. It also encourages cultural diversity and safety in nursing.
Students will be assessed through clinical performance, practical tests and log book.
List of text/reference books:
1. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B., & Erb, G., Fundamental of Nursing:
Concepts, Process and Practice, (10th Ed.), USA: New Jersey, Pearson, 2016. 2. deWit, S. C., & O’neill, P., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, (4th
Ed.) St. Louis: Elservier Saunders, 2014.
3. Potter, P. A., & Perry, A. G. P., Fundamentals of Nursing, (9th Ed.), Singapore:
Elseiver Mosby, 2017.
4. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J., & Martin, B. C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills, (9th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2016.
GTJ320/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal)
This course introduces students to medical-surgical management of patient’s with
endocrine and musculoskeletal diseases. The nursing care incorporates the concept of best
practice with multi-disciplinary approach. This course is taught via student centered
learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical sessions. Students will be assessed
through assignments, presentation, OSCE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client
Care (4th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008.
2. Timby, B.K. & Smith, N., Introductory Medical Surgical Nursing (10th Ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2010. 3. Sublett, C. & Blair, M., Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical Management for
Positive Outcomes (8th Ed.). St. Louis: Saunders Elsevier, 2008.
4. Smith, S.F., Duell, D.J., & Martin, B.C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills (8th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
162
GTJ321/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and
Opthalmology)
This course introduces students to medical-surgical management of patient’s with neuro,
otorhinolaryngology and ophthalmology diseases. The nursing care incorporates the
concept of best practice with multi-disciplinary approach. This course is taught via student
centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical sessions. Students will be
assessed through assignments, presentation, OSCE and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Timby, B. K. & Smith, N. E., Introductory Medical Surgical Nursing.
Philadelphia: W. W. Lippincott, 2010.
2. LeMone, P., Burke, K. & Bauldoff, G., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking in Ppatient Care (5th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. Smeltzer, S.C., & Bare, B.G., Hinkle, J.L. & Cheever, K.H., Brunner &
Suddarth's Ttextbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing (12th Ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2010.
4. Smith, S.F., Duell, D.J. & Martin, B.C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills (8th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
GTJ322/3- Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing
This course introduces students to the mental health and psychiatric conditions. The
nursing care exposes students to the biopsychosocial model in psychiatric care as well as
incorporates collaborative partnership with community engagement. The concept of best
practice with innovative approach is emphasised. This course is taught via student centered
learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical sessions. Students will be assessed
through assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Fortinash, K.M. & Warret, H., Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing (5th Ed.). USA:
Mosby, Elsevier Inc., 2012.
2. Kneisl, C.R. & Trigoboff, E., Contemporary Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing
(3rd Ed.). UK: Pearson Education, Inc., 2013.
3. Struart, G.W., Principle and Practice of Psychiatric Nursing (10th Ed.). USA:
Mosby, Elsevier Inc., 2013.
GTJ323/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Haematology
and Oncology)
This course introduces students to the diseases of dermatology, immunology, haematology
and oncology as well as the medical and surgical management. The nursing care
incorporates sustained quality of life, rehabilitation and palliative care with inter-
disciplinary approach. This course is taught via student centered learning: lectures, small
group discussion, and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through assignments,
OSCE and final examination.
163
List of text/reference books:
1. Hinkle, J. L. & Cheever, K. H. Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical-
Surgical Nursing. (13th ed.), Wolters Kluwer Lippincott Willians & Wilkins:
Philadelphia, 2014.
2. Perry, A. G., Potter, P. A. & Ostendorf, W. R. Clinical Nursing Skills &
Techniques. (8th ed.), Elsevier Mosby: St Louis, 2014.
3. deWit, S. C. & O’Neill, P., Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing, (4th
ed.) St. Louis: Elservier Saunders, 2014.
4. LeMone, P., Burke, K., & Bauldoff, G., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical
Thinking in Patient Care, (5th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013.
5. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills, (8th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
6. Barbara, K. T. & Nancy, E. S., Introductory Medical-Surgical Nursing.
Philadelphia: W. W. Lippincott, 2010.
7. Smeltzer, S. C. & Bare, B. G., Hinkle, J. L., & Cheever, K. H., Brunner &
Suddarth's Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, (12th Ed.), Philadelphia:
Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2010.
8. Yarbro, C. H., Frogge, M. H. & Goodman, M. Cancer Nursing: Principles &
Practice. (6th ed.). Boston: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2005.
GTJ324/3-Critical Care Nursing
This course introduces students to critical care nursing. The nursing care incorporates
sustained quality of life, rehabilitation with multi-disciplinary approach. This includes
theoretical knowledge of critical care nursing that relates to patients who need critical
nursing care such as physical care, psychological and physiological support, respiratory
support and hemodynamic support for sustainability of patient’s quality of life. This course
will be taught via student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through assignments, log book, quiz and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical thinking in client
care (4th Ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc, 2008.
2. Cairo, J.M. Pilbeam’s Mechanical Ventilator: Physiological and Clinical
Applications. Elsevier Health Sciences, 2015.
3. Hinkle, J.L. & Cheever, K.H. Brunner & Sunddarth’s Textbook of Medical-
Surgical Nursing (13th. Edition).London: Lisa McAllister, 2014.
GTJ325/3-Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing
This course introduces students to neonatal and pediatric nursing. The nursing care
incorporating sustainability quality of life, safety, security, and rehabilitation with multi-
disciplinary approach. It also collaborate nurse-parents partnership. This course will be
164
taught via student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through assignment, presentation, OSCE and final
examination
List of text/reference books:
1. Ball, J.W., Bindler, R. C. & Cowen, K.J., Principles of Pediatric Nursing: Caring for Children. Boston: Pearson, 2012.
2. Hockenberry, M. J., Wilson, D. & Ridgers, C. Wong’s Essential of Pediatric
Nursing, (10th Ed.), St. Louis: Elservier Saunders, 2016.
3. James, S. R., Nelson, K. A., & Ashwill, J. W. Nursing Care of Children: Principles and Practices, (4th Ed.), St. Louis: Elservier Saunders, 2013.
4. Murray, S. S. & Mckinney, E. S. Foundation of Maternal – Newborn Nursing.
(6th Ed.) Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders Co., 2014.
5. Muscari,M. E. Pediatric Nursing. (5th Ed.), Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott, 2016.
GTJ326/3-Gerontological Nursing
This course introduces students to gerontological nursing. The geriatric nursing care
incorporating sustainability quality of life, safety, security, and rehabilitation with multi-
disciplinary approach. It also collaborate best practice and community engagement. This
course will be taught via student centered learning: lectures, small group discussion, and
practical sessions. Students will be assessed through assignment, presentation, quiz, OSCE
and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Barbara J. E. Explaining Student Interest and Confidence in Providing Care for
Older Adults: The Role of Demographics and Life Experiences. Journal of Gerontological Nursing. Volume 43 (3): 13-18 4, 2017.
2. Meiner, S.E. and Lueckenotte A.G. Gerontologic Nursing (3rd Ed.) Mosby Inc.
St. Louis, 2006.
3. Miller, C.A. Nursing for Wellness in Older Adults (5th Ed.) Lippincott Williams
and Wilkins, Philaldelphia, 2009.
4. Touhy, T.A., & Jeff, K.F. Gerontology Nursing & Health Ageing. Missouri
Elsevier Mosby, 2014.
5. Tabernacle, B. Honey, M and Jinks, A. Oxford Handbook of Nursing Older
People, Oxford University Press, New York, 2009.
6. Kathleen B, Joseph P, Maribeth , Shau Y.L, Ellie H, & Warren W. L Term
effectiveness and safety of once-daily, single-entity, extended-release
hydrocodone in patients of ≥75 years of age with moderate to severe
nonmalignant and nonneuropathic pain. Geriatric Nursing, 38 (1), 2017.
165
GTJ327/3-Nursing Education
This course introduces students to nursing education. It incorporates creative and
innovative teaching and learning. The knowledge transformation will be used for health
promotion in achieving sustainable health. This course will be taught via student centered
learning: lectures, small group discussion, and practical sessions. Students will be assessed
through assignment, presentation, and practical test.
List of text/reference books:
1. DeYoung, C.S. & Miessler G.L., Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators. New
Jersey: Prentice Hall. 2003.
2. Billings, D.M. & Halstead, J.A., Teaching in Nursing: A Guide for Faculty (3rd
Ed.). St. Louis: Sauders Elsevier Publisher, 2009.
3. Hall, G.E., Quinn, L.F. & Gollnick, D.M. Introduction to Teaching: Making a
Difference in Student Learning. California: SAGE Publication, 2014.
4. Lowenstein, A.L. & Bradshaw, M.J., Fuszard’s Innovative Teaching Strategies
in Nursing (3rd Ed). Sudbury: Jones & Bartlett Publisher, 2004.
GTK301/4-Environmental And Occupational Toxicology
This course focuses on understanding the effects of toxic chemicals that can harm and
damage living organisms and their environment. This course also describes the target organ
toxicity (hematotoxicity, neurotoxicity, hepatotoxicity, nephrotoxicity, neurotoxicity,
dermatotoxicity, pulmonary toxicity and reproductive organ toxicity) and chronic toxicity
effects (carcinogenesis, mutagenesis and teratogenesis). The classes of environmental and
occupational toxicants also discussed to develop awareness in conserving and preserving
environmental health to sustain the health of living organism in the entire ecosystem.
Students are trained to think of alternative methods to reduce the production of toxic waste
from multiple sources to the environment. Monitoring of heavy metals contaminants in
biota is also being exaggerated. The course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials and
practical. Students will be assessed through assignments, laboratory reports and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Clements, W.H., Community Ecotoxicology. John Wiley & Son. 2002.
2. Hayes, A.W., Principles and Methods of Toxicology (5th Ed.). Taylor & Francis.
2007.
3. Manahan, E.S., Fundamentals of Environmental and Toxicological Chemistry:
Sustainable Science (4th Ed.). CRC Press. 2013.
4. Paul, I., Toxicity and Risk: Context, Principles and Practice. Routledge, London. 2001.
5. Winder, C. & Stacey, N.H., Occupational Toxicology. CRC Press. 2004.
166
GTK302/3-Environmental And Occupational Health From Engineering Perspective
This course discusses the relevant theory and application of engineering knowledge,
especially mechanical and civil engineering in implementing engineering controls to
reduce the level of pollutants in the workplace environment. This course also explains the
preventive measures against pollution problems in buildings through appropriate selection
of building materials. To sustain a building, elements for the construction, operation,
maintenance and renovation of green buildings is also a major focus of the lessons in this
course. This chapter takes into account the elements of production and consumption for
each of the basic material used in a building. Emphasizing this aspect is important to ensure
that the entire building is built to reduce the impact on the environment as well as human
health. The importance of creating green buildings lead to the efficient use of energy, water
and other resources that may help to reduce waste, pollution and environmental
degradation. In addition, health problems related to ergonomics has also become a major
focus for this course. Understanding related to these topics tested by implementing mini
projects with emphasis on the management of human health problems. The course will be
delivered via lectures, tutorials, problem-based learning and mini projects. Students will
be assessed through assignments, presentations, quizzes, and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Code of Practice, Design and Construction. British Standards Institution, 1997.
2. Code of Practice, Indoor Air Quality. DOSH, Malaysia, 2010.
3. Davis M.L. & Masten S.J., Principles of Environmental Engineering and Science.
McGraw-Hill, 2004.
4. De Nevers N., Air Pollution Control Engineering. McGraw-Hill, 2000.
5. Uniform Building By-Laws, MDC Publishers, 2011.
6. Mohd Zaid Y., Teknologi Industri: Kawalan Mutu dan Peralatan. Dewan Bahasa
& Pustaka, 1996.
GTK303/3-Domestic, Laboratory And Industrial Waste Management
This course introduces legal requirements related to the management of solid waste,
scheduled waste and radioactive waste. The method of quantification, handling, storage,
labelling, transportation, processing and disposal of these wastes are discussed. In addition,
the safety aspects of handling waste and the impact of unsystematic waste management to
environment and human health are also emphasised. Waste-to-energy technologies used in
the incineration, sanitary landfill and refused-derived fuel processes and 3Rs (Reduce,
Reuse, Recycle) concept will be learned. By reducing the amount of waste generated,
reusing product, recycling and use of renewable energy help lessen the impact on the
environment such as climate change. These will also enabling sustainable production and
consumption patterns. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials, and problem based learning. Students will be assessed through assignments, presentation, quizzes, tests and
final examination.
167
List of text/reference books:
1. Atomic Energy Licensing Act 1984 (Act 304) and Atomic Energy Licensing
(Radioactive Waste Management) Regulations 2011. Percetakan Nasional
Malaysia Berhad. 2006.
2. Cheremisioff N.P., Handbook Of Solid Waste Management And Waste
Minimization Technology, Elsevier Science, 2002.
3. Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) Regulations, Rules & Orders.
International Law Books Services. 2011.
4. Hester, R.E & Harisson, R.M., Environmental And Health Impact Of Solid Waste
Management Activities. Royal Society of Chemistry, Cambridge, 2002.
5. Baud, I., Post, J. & Furedy C., Solid Waste Management And Recycling: Actors,
Partnerships & Policies In Hyderabad. India & Nairobi, Kenya: Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2004.
6. Solid Waste and Public Cleansing Management Act 2007 (Act 672). MDC
Publishers. 2009.
GTK305/3-Environmental And Occupational Health Related Diseases
The course discusses on the variety of diseases caused by environmental pollutants and
workplace contaminants. The health of workers is an important particular to ensure good quality of life. This course also introduces students to the types of environmental and
occupational diseases, its symptoms and medical surveillance. The course will be delivered
through lectures and case discussions. Students will be assessed through performance in
practical operation, log books, reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Koran, H., Environmental And Occupational Health (2nd Ed.). CRC Press, 2004.
2. La Dou J., Current Occupational And Environmental Medicine (3rd Ed.). Lange
Medical Books, 2003.
3. Reese, C.D., Occupational, Health And Safety Management: A Practical
Approach. Lewis Publishers, 2003.
4. Yassi, A., Kjellström, T., de Kok, T.L. & Guidotti T.L., Basic Environmental
Health. Oxford University Press, New York, 2001.
GTK307/3-Occupational Rehabilitation
This course introduces students to the theory and application of ergonomic and body
mechanics at workplace in order to prevent workers from injuries. The content of the course
will focus on the role of occupational health and safety officers in monitoring the
application of proper ergonomics and body mechanics as well as the rehabilitation of workers at workplace. The students will be able to understand the rehabilitation process
and return to work program if there are any injuries sustain by the workers. The course will
be delivered through lectures and case discussions. Students will be assessed through
performance in practical operation, log books, reports and final examination.
168
List of text/reference books:
1. Bridger, R.S., Introduction To Ergonomics (2nd Ed.). New York: Taylor & Francis
Group, 2008.
2. Bureau of Labor Statistics. September, 1996. Recordkeeping Guidelines for
Occupational Injuries and Illness. US Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor
Statistics.
3. Karwowski, W. & Marras, W.S. (Eds.), Occupational Ergonomics: Design and
Management of Work Systems. Principles and Applications in Engineering Series.
CRC Press, Florida, 2003.
4. OSHA Ergonomic Standards, Occupational Safety and Health Administration,
2000.
5. US Congress (101st-433), Americans With Disabilities Act (PL 101-336), 1990.
6. US Office of Management and Budget. 1987. Standard Industrial Classification
Manual. National Technical Information Service, PB87-100012.
GTK310/4- Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants
This course introduces the important principle and concept of industrial hygiene, in
evaluating the levels of contaminants both in the environmental and workplace settings,
for control and prevention of ill health. Besides being introduced theoretically in lectures, students are able to have a hands-on fieldwork assessment of environmental air, water and
soil pollution. Observations on climate change factors and disaster management will also
be discussed during the practical session. Hygiene monitoring of workplace exposure
hazards such as dust and particulate matter, chemical, noise, microbiological, heat stress
and indoor air quality monitoring will be practiced. Here, students will learn about the
sampling methods, sample transportation and storage as well as analysis using analytical
instrumentation such as Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer. This course eventually can
help to suggest suitable control and prevention measures of multiple health problems that
may occur among workers who are constantly exposed to unhealthy environments in the
workplace. These will further contribute towards maintaining the sustainability of the
environment and biodiversity, health and safety of workers and the public, conservation of
natural resources, support sustainable development and increase productivity. Overall, the
course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials and practical based learning. Students
will be assessed through assignments, hygiene reports, tests, quizzes, and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Asfahl, C.R., Industrial Safety and Health Management (5th Ed.). New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall Inc., 2004.
2. Fifield, F.W. & Haines P.J., Environmental Analytical Chemistry, UK: Blackwell Science, 2000.
3. Friedrich, R. & Reis, S., Emission Of Air Pollutants: Measurement, Calculation
And Uncertainties.UK: Springer, 2004.
4. Nims, D., Basics of Industrial Hygiene. Canada: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1999.
169
5. Vallero, D., Environmental Contaminant: Assessment and Control, London: AP,
2004.
6. Vincent J.H., Particle Size: Selective Sampling for Particulate Air Contaminants,
London: Academic Press, 1998.
GTK311/4-Environmental And Occupational Emergency
This course describes major accidents and disasters that have had occurred or may occur
in Malaysia and Southeast Asia which could affect the environment and workers’ life. The
concern on workers safety and security are highlighted. Students are also introduced to the
concept of disaster prevention and the establishment of an Emergency Response Plan
(ERP) and Emergency Response Team (ERT). The course will be delivered through
lectures, tutorials and practical. Students will be assessed through assignments, laboratory
reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Erickson, P.A., Emergency Response Planning for Corporate and Municipal
Managers. Academic Press, 1999.
2. Greece, S.A., International Resources Guide To Hazardous Chemicals:
Manufacturers, Agencies, Organizations And Sources of Information. William Andrew Publishing, 2003.
3. Leigh J.P., Markowitz S., Fahe M. & Landrigen P., Costs of Occupational Injuries
And Illnesses (4th Ed.). University of Michigan Press, 2003.
4. Parcell P., Disaster Prep 101: The Ultimate Guided Emergency Readiness. Info
Quest, 2004.
GTN309/3-Nutrition and Diseases
This course introduces students to the terms used in medical field, and the underlying
causes, predisposing factors and pathophysiologic changes during diseases of different
system of our body. It also covers effect of the disease on the nutritional status of the
patient, and relationship of the pathophysiological changes with nutrition intervention. This
course will be taught via lecture and discussion session. Students will be assessed through
continous assessment, assignment, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
4. Geissler C. & Powers H., Human Nutrition (12th Ed.). Elsevier/ Churchil
Livingstone, 2010.
1. Ganong, W., Review of Medical Physiology (21st Ed.). Appleton & Lange, 2005.
2. Kumar, P. & Clark, M. L., Clinical Medicine (8th Ed.). W.B. Saunders Company,
2012.
3. Kumar, V. & Abbas, A.K., Robbins & Cotnan Pathologic Basis of Disease (9th
Ed.). W.B. Saunders Company, 2014.
170
GTN311/3-Food Service Management
This course introduces students to the important aspects of catering, planning and food
service management, menu planning, selection of catering equipments, food service
system, and also methods, principles and preparation techniques of nutritious and tasty
food in bulk quantities. It also covers food safety and sanitation, dynamic flows of food
from the purchasing stage up to the serving of patients or clients with stipulated time. This
course will be taught via lecture, tutorial and discussion session. Students will be assessed
through continuous assessment, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Byers, B.A., Shanklin, C.W. & Hoover, L.A., Food Service Manual for
Healthcare Institutions (4th Ed.). JB-AHA Publishers, 2004.
2. Knight, J.B., & Korschevar, L.H., Quantity Food Production, Planning and
Management. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 2006.
3. Gregoire, M. B. & Spears M.C., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and
Systems Approach (6th Ed.). Prentice Hall, 2006.
GTN315/4-Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum
This course introduces students to communities such as the squatter population, homes for
the handicapped, old olks homes, pregnant mothers, health care clinics and centers for a
period of 8 weeks to promote health activity and to educate the community on imbalance
nutritional habits. It also enables the students to face real life situation as dietitians in the
community and are required to be involved and to conduct educational activity either in
the form of educational talks or demonstrations in order to increase the awareness of
selected populations towards acquiring optimal nutrition and also the students will gather
knowledge about the role of a selected health care agency in a community setup. This
course will be taught via student centred learning (SCL) lectures and discussion session.
Students will be assessed through assignment, report, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Homan, M.S., Promoting Community Change- Making it Happen in the Real
World. Belmont Thompson Higher Education, 2010.
2. Nutrition Society, Gibney, M.J., (Eds), Public Health Nutrition. Blackwell
Publishers, 2003.
3. Heber, D., Nutrition for Primary Care. Saunders W B Co, 2000.
4. Morgan, J.B. & Dickerson, J.W.T. (Eds.), Nutrition in Early Life. John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2003.
171
GTN316/3- Food and Nutritional Toxicology
This course consists of basic review of toxicology related to food and the human food
chain. The discussion touches on the fundamental concepts that will be covered absorption
of toxicants, distribution and storage of toxicants, biotransformation and elimination of
toxicants, and target organ toxicity. This course also will examine chemicals of food
interest, such as natural products (plants and fungi), toxicants from food processing, food
additives, and heavy metal, and how they are tested and regulated. This course will be
taught via lecture and discussion session. Students will be assessed through continuous
assessment, assignments and final examination.
List of text/ reference books:
1. Shibamoto T. & Bjeldanes L.F. Introduction to Food Toxicology (2nd Ed.),
Amsterdam: Elsevier/Academic Press, 2009.
2. Pussa, T. Principles of Food Toxicology (2nd Ed.), Boca Raton: CRC Press, 2014.
3. Deshpande S.S. Handbook of Food Toxicology. New York: Marcel Dekker, Inc.,
2002.
4. Helferich W. & Winter C.K., Food Toxicology, Boca Raton: CRC Press, 2001.
5. Stanley T. Omaye, Food and Nutritional Toxicology, Boca Raton: CRC Press,
2002.
GTN317/4-Food Microbiology
This course covers the role of microorganism in food, identification methods and
classifications, and intrinsic and extrinsic factors which affect the microorganisms growth.
It also covers ‘Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point’ (HACCP), ISO 22000, ‘Good
Manufacturing Practice’ (GMP) [Amalan Pengilangan yang Baik] and Malaysia Food Act
[Akta Makanan Malaysia 1983] which are applied in food industries in Malaysia and the
world. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and discussion.
Students will be assessed through test, assignment, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ray, B. & Bhunia A., Fundamental Food Microbiology. London: CRC Press,
2013.
2. Khalilah Abdul Khalil, Food Microbiology: A Laboratory Manual. Pusat
Penerbitan Universiti, 2007.
3. Adams, M.R. & Moss M.O., Food Microbiology (3rd Ed.). Cambridge: Royal
Society of Chemistry, 2008.
4. Montville, T.J., Matthews, K.R. & Knile K.E., Food Microbiology: An
Introduction. ASM Press, 2012. 5. Yousef, A.E. & Carlstrom C., Food Microbiology: A Laboratory Manual. John
Wiley & Sons Inc, New York, 2002.
172
GTN318/3-Nutrition Anthropology
This course introduces students to the study of human nutrition from the perspective of
anthropology raging from the aspects of biological, ecological and social influence of diet
and human nutrition, referring to how diet affects human behavior and culture, and how
culture affects human behavior and nutrition. It also covers a review of cross-cultural
diversity in terms of diet, nutritional status and life advice system, as well as differences in
the factors of human existence is the result of the evolution of the pre-historic to modern
times and provide some basis that can be used to assess the reliability and reasonableness
of the policy and dietary recommendations are featured in daily modern life. This course
will be taught via lectures and discussion session. Students will be assessed through
continuous assessments, report, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bryant, C.A., DeWalt, K.M., Courtney, A. & Schwartz, J., The Cultural Feast:
An Introduction to Food and Society (2nd Ed.). Belmont, CA:
Wadsworth/Thomson Learning, 2003.
2. Pollan, M., The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History of Four Meals. New
York: Penguin, 2007.
3. Kittler, P.G., Sucher, K.P. & Nelms, M., Food and Culture (6th Ed.). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth / Thomson Learning, 2011.
GTP303/2- Neuropsychology
This course introduces students to the fundamental neuropsychology teaching on memory,
emotion, perception, visual recognition, language and the recovery of brain function. This
course is important for the students to understand the neuropsychological assessment
results in order to innovate and collaborate in partnership for proper diagnosis and
management of the speech pathology cases to improve patients quality of life. This course
will be taught via lecture, tutorial, and discussion session. Student will be assessed through
assignments, quiz, presentation and a final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Elias, L.J. & Saucier, D.M., Neuropsychology: Clinical and Experimental
Foundations. London: Pearson Education, Inc., 2006.
2. Halligan, P.W., Kischka, U. & Marshall, J.C., Handbook of Cinical
Neuropsychology (2nd Ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2010.
3. Kolb, B. & Wishaw, I.Q., Fundamentals of Human Neuropsychology (6th Ed.).
New York: Worth Publishers, 2009.
4. Martin, G.N., Human Neuropsychology (2nd Ed.). London: Pearson Education Limited, 2006.
5. Morgan, J.E. & Ricker, J.H., Textbook of Clinical Neuropsychology. New York:
Taylor and Francis Group, 2008.
173
GTP304/3- Speech Pathology Clinic III
This course trains students to fully conduct clinical session under supervision. The main
caseloads in this course are developmental language disorders, hearing impairment and
speech sound disorders. The students are required to design the individualized assessment
and intervention plans for their patients. They are required to administer and apply these
plans in managing their patients. This course will be delivered through clinical session and
case discussion. Students will be assessed on their clinical performance, log book, case
history report and case presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Paul, R., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Aadolescence:
Assessment and Intervention (3rd Ed.). St. Louis: Mosby, 2006.
2. Meyer, S. M., Survival Guide for the Beginning Speech-Language Clinician
(2nd Ed.). London: Pro-Ed Inc., 2004.
3. Hedge, M. N., Clinical Methods and Practicum in Speech-Language Pathology.
New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2005.
4. Gordon-Brannan, M., Clinical Management of Articulatory and Phonologic
Disorders (3rd Ed). New York: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2007.
5. Roth, F. & Worthinston, C., Treatment Resources Manual for Speech Language Pathology (4th Ed.). New York: Delmar, 2010.
GTP306/3- Voice and Resonance Disorders
This course discusses in depth on the fundamental theories on voice disorders, including
laryngeal speech, and resonance disorders. It covers on methods of assessment and
principles of interventions in managing individuals with voice disorders and resonance
disorders. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorial and problem based learning.
Students will be assessed through quiz, tests, reports, and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Boone, D.R., McFarlane, S.C., Von Berg, S.L. & Zraick, R.I., The Voice and
Voice Therapy (8th Ed.). Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.
2. Andrews, M.L., Manual of Voice Treatment: Pediatrics Through Geriatrics (3rd
Ed.). San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2006.
3. Stemple, J.C., Glaze, L.E., & Klaben, B.G., Clinical Voice Pathology: Theory and
Management (4th Ed.). San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2009.
4. Kummer, A.W., Cleft Palate and Craniofacial Anomalies the Effects on Speech
and Resonance. San Diego:Singular, 2007.
174
GTP311/3-Counseling for Communication Disorders
This course emphasises on fundamental aspects of counseling in the fields of audiology
and speech pathology. It also focuses on the application of counseling methodologies in
the management of individuals with communication disorders, as well their families. This
course will be taught via lecture, tutorial and problem based learning. Students will be
assessed through assignments, practical, presentation, and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Flasher, L.V. & Fogel, P.T, Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist
and Audiologist. Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.
2. Luterman, D.M., Counseling Persons With Communication Disorders and
Their Families (5th Ed.). Austin: Pro-Ed., 2008.
3. Clark, K., & English, J., Counseling in Audiologic Practice: Helping Patients and
Families Adjust to Hearing Loss. Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2004.
4. Nelson-Jones, R., Introduction to Counseling Skills (3rd Ed.). London: Sage
Publication Ltd., 2000.
GTP312/2- Augmentative and Alternative Communication
This course exposes students to the fundamental theories of augmentative and alternative
communication (AAC) as a communication method for those who cannot communicate
verbally. It covers on types and characteristics of ACC. Principles of prescription,
assessment and intervention of AAC are also included in this course. This course will be
taught via lectures, tutorials, and problem based learning. Students will be assessed through
assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Beukelman, D.R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication:
Management of Severe Communication Disorders in Children and Adults (4th
Ed.). Baltimore: Brookes Publishers, 2012.
2. Tetzchner, S.V., & Martinsen, H., Introduction to Augmentative and Alternative
Communication. London: Whurr Publishers, 2000.
3. Cockerill, H., & Carrollfew, L., Communicating Without Speech: Practical
Augmentative and Alternative Ccommunication Clinics for Children (Clinics in
Developmental Medicine). London: Mac Keith Press, 2001.
GTP313/3- Acquired Language Disorders
This course discusses in depth on acquired language disorders. It focuses on aphasia with
additional exposures on communication disorders due to dementia, right hemisphere syndrome dan traumatic brain injury. It also discusses assessment and intervention
techniques for these disorders. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorials and problem
based learning. Students will be assessed through quiz, test, reports, presentation and final
examination.
175
List of text/reference books:
1. Murdoch, B.E., Acquired Speech and Language Disorders: A Neuroanatomical
and Functional Neurological Approach (2nd Ed.). West Sussex: John Wiley &
Sons Ltd., 2010.
2. Chapey, R., Language Intervention Strategies in Aphasia and Related Neurogenic
Communication Disorders (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &
Wilkings, 2008.
3. Hedge, M.N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language
Disorders (3rd Ed.). San Diego: Delmar Cengage Learning, 2005.
4. Pointe, L.L., Aphasia and Related Neurogenic Language Disorders (3rd Ed.). New
York: Thieme, 2005.
GTP314/2- Motor Speech Disorders
This course introduces students to the management of motor speech disorder cases i.e.,
apraxia of speech and dysarthria. It covers etiologies, neurological characteristics,
assessments, diagnosis, and intervention for motor speech disorder cases. This course will
be taught via lecture, tutorial, and problem-based learning (PBL). Students will be assessed
through assignments, presentation, quiz and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Duffy, J. R., Motor Speech Disorders: Substrates, Differential Diagnosis, and
Management (3rd Ed.). St Louis: Elsevier Health Sciences, 2012.
2. Freed, D.B., Motor Speech Ddisorders: Diagnosis & Treatment. New York:
Delmar Cengage Learning, 2011.
3. Brookshire, R.H., Introduction to Neurogenic Communication Disorders (7th
Ed.). St. Louis: Mosby, 2007.
4. Hedge, M.N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language
Disorders (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2007.
GTP315/3- Speech Pathology Clinic IV
This course trains students to fully conduct clinical session under supervision. The main
caseloads in this course are developmental language disorders, hearing impairment, speech
sound disorders and voice disorders. The students are required to design the individualized
assessment and intervention plans for their patients. They are required to administer and
apply these plans in managing their patients. This course will be delivered through clinical
session and case discussion. Students will be assessed on their clinical performance, log
book, case history reports and case presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Roth, F., & Worthington, C., Treatment Resource Manual for Speech Language
Pathology (4th Ed.). New York: Delmar, 2010.
176
2. Hedge, M.N., Clinical Methods and Practicum in Speech-Language Pathology
(5th Ed.). New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2009.
3. Dollaghan, C., Handbook for Evidence-Based Practice in Communication
Disorders. London: Paul H. Brookes Pub. Co., 2007.
4. Paul, R., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment
and Intervention (3rd Ed). St. Louise: Mosby, 2006.
5. Paul, R. & Norbury, C., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Adolescence:
Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing, and Communicating (4th Ed.). St. Louise:
Mosby, 2012.
GTP316/3- Learning Disabilities
This course introduces students to the aspects of learning disabilities and education for
children with communication disorders. It covers theories and processes of learning,
etiologies and characteristics of learning disabilities with an emphasis on the educational
issues that are related to these children. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorial, and
problem-based learning. Students will be assessed through assignment, reports,
presentation, and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Harwell, J.M. & Jackson R.W., The Complete Learning Disabilities Handbook:
Ready-to-Use Strategies and Activities for Teaching Students with Learning
Disabilities. California: Jossey-Bass Publisher, 2008.
2. Lerner, J.W., Learning Disabilities: Theories, Diagnosis, and Teaching Strategies
(10th Ed.). Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2005.
3. Fletcher, M., Lyon, G.R., Fuchs, L.S., & Barnes, M.A., Learning Disabilities:
From Identification to Intervention. New York: The Guilford Press, 2006.
GTP317/2- Swallowing Problems
This course discusses swallowing problems with additional focuses on pediatric feeding
difficulties. It covers on methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing
individuals with swallowing problems. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorial, and
practical session. Students will be assessed through assignments, test and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Groher, M. & Crary, M., Dysphagia: Clinical Management in Adults and
Children. Florida: Elsevier, 2009.
2. Leonard, R. & Kendall, K., Dysphagia Assessment and Treatment Planning: A Team Approach (2nd Ed.). New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2007.
3. Carrau, R.L. & Murry, T., Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders
(2nd Ed.). San Diego. Singular Publishing Group, 2006.
177
GTS305/2-Applied Sports Physiology
This course introduces student to physiological changes due to environment, training
method, time and age. This course also discusses issues related to sport performance
including sports in hot and cold environment, altitude training, circadian rhythm and jet
lag. This course will also cover water-based physiological changes due to physical
acitvities and the effects of pollution (air, noise) on exercise physiology conditions. This
course will be taught via lecture and tutorial. Students will be assessed through
assignments, test and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Reilly, T. & Waterhouse, J., Sport, Exercise and Environmental Physiology.
Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, 2005.
2. Tipton, C.M., Sawka, M.N., Tate C.A. & Terjung R.L. (Eds), ACSM's Advanced
Exercise Physiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006.
3. Powers, S.K. & Howley, E.T., Exercise Physiology Theory and Application to
Fitness and Performance (7th Ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2012.
4. Armstrong N. (Ed)., Pediatric Exercise Physiology. New York: Churchill
Livingstone, 2007.
GTS307/3- Physical Activity, Growth and Development
This course exposes the students to issues related to physical growth and development with
regards to physical activity. Discussion on the maturation process, morphological and
functional changes in relation to exercise and training will be conducted.
List of text/reference books:
1. Thies, K.M. & Travers, J.F., Growth and Development through the Lifespan (2nd
Ed.). Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2009.
2. Malina, R.M., Bar-Or, O. & Bouchard, C., Growth, Maturation and Physical
Activity (2nd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001.
3. Jurimae, T. & Hills, A.P., Body Composition Assessment in Children and
Adolescents. Karger, 2001.
GTS311/3-Sports Nutrition
Students will be exposed to the knowledge of nutritional requirement for the athletes in
various disciplines, nutritional requirement to different sport event and ergogenic aids to
enhance sport performance. Students will learn about nutritional planning in pre, during
and post-performance/training.
List of text/reference books:
1. Antonio, J., Essential of Sports Nutrition and Supplements. Totowa, NJ: Humana
Press, 2008.
178
2. Clark, N., Nancy Clark’s Sports Nutrition Guidebook (5th Ed.). Champaign, IL:
Human Kinetics, 2014.
3. McArdle, W.D., Katch, F.I., Katch, V.L., Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition,
and Human Performance. Philadelphia, PA: Williams & Wilkins, 2004.
4. Jeukendrup, A.E. & Gleeson, M., Sports Nutrition: An Introduction to Energy
Production and Performance (2nd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2010.
GTS312/3-Sports Injuries and Rehabilitation
This course introduces students to the types and mechanism of injuries in sports. It also
covers the principles of rehabilitation process including the use of equipments for the
treatment and therapies in sports injuries. This course will be taught via lectures and
practical that integrates fundamental knowledge with current research ourcomes. Students
will be assessed through tests, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Abrahamson, E. And Comfort, P., Sports Rehabilitation and Injury Prevention.
Chichester, West Sussex: Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.
2. Buschbacher R.M., Dave S.J. & Prahlow N.D., Sports Medicine and
Rehabilitation: A Sport Specific Approach (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia,PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
3. Prentice, W.E. (Ed), Rehabilitation Technique in Sports Medicine (3rd Ed.).
McGraw Hill, 1999.
4. Selvanetti, A., Giombini, A. & Puddu, G., Rehabilitation of Sports Injuries. New
York: Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. 2001.
5. Denegar, C.R., Saliba, E. & Saliba, S.F., Therapeutic Modalities for
Musculoskeletal Injuries (3rd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2010.
GTS313/3-Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology
This course introduces the interdisciplinary knowledge about the anatomy of the skeletal-
muscle and neuro-muscular structure integrated with biomechanic principles. The
knowledge helps to understand the functions and limitations of the systems, comprehend
the types and causes of movement in sports and to analyse body motion. The course will
focus on the development techniques of human motion analysis from the aspect of structure
and function as well as the applied biomechanics principles involved in human movement.
Examples from joint movements and application of sports skills will be used for the
analyses.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hamilton, N., Welmar, W. & Luttgens, K., Kinesiology: Scientific Basis for
Human Motion (11th Ed.). Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2008
2. Bartlett, R. & Hong, Y., Handbook of Biomechanics and Human Movement
Science. London, NY: Routledge, 2008.
179
3. Bartlett, R. & Bussey, M., Sports Biomechanics: Reducing Injury Risk and
Improving Sports Performance (2nd Ed.). London: Routledge, 2012.
4. Hall S.J., Basic Biomechanics (6th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill, 2011.
GTS314/3-Motor Learning
This course introduces student to basic concepts and theories of motor learning. This course
also introduces students to research studies that utilize an interdisciplinary approach of
perceptual-motor process and psychological mechanism of motor learning in sports. This
course will be taught via lecture and practical. Students will be assessed through test,
assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Magill, R.A., Motor Learning: Concepts and Applications (11th Ed.). Columbus,
OH: McGraw-Hill, 2011.
2. Coker, C.A., Motor Learning and Control for Practitioners (2nd Ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill, 2009.
3. Schmidt, R., Motor Control and Learning: A Behavioral Emphasis (5th Ed.).
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2008.
4. Schmidt, R. & Wrisberg, C., Motor Learning and Performance: A Problem-Based Learning Approach (3rd Ed.). Champaign, IL. : Human Kinetics, 2004.
GTS315/3-Coaching Science and Performance Analysis
This course exposes the students to the multidisciplinary aspect of sport sciences (anatomy,
physiology, psychology, biomechanics, and skill acquisition) that are important for
coaches. It also emphasises on the sustainable management, efficient planning planning
and social-interpersonal skills required by the modern coach. The course also covers
advanced coaching means and methods, theoretical and practical aspects of planning,
periodisation, forecasting and target setting in order to analyse sport performance.
List of text/reference books:
1. Martens, R., Successful Coaching (3rd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics,
2004.
2. Robinson, P.E., Foundations of Sports Coaching. New York, NY: Routledge,
2010.
3. McMorris, T. & Hale, T. Coaching Science: Theory Into Practice. John Wiley &
Sons, 2006.
4. Hughes, M., Jones, R.L. & Kinston K., An Introduction to Sports Coaching: From
Science and Theory to Practice. London, NY: Routledge, 2008.
180
GTS316/3-Adapted Physical Activity
This course is designed to impart knowledge and skills about sports and people with
disabilities. Students are introduced on the conceptual foundation about people with
disabilities, types of people with disabilities, health and fitness, as well as the relationship
of healthy life styles and health conditions. The course further promotes knowledge that
may improve the health and quality of life of people with disabilities, in terms self-help
skills, productivity and psychological through empowerment of people with disabilities in
recreational and physical activities.
List of text/reference books:
1. Claudine, S., Adapted Physical Activity, Recreation, and Sport: Crossdisciplinary
and Lifespan (6th Ed.). Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill, 2004.
2. Thomas, N. & Smith, A., Disability, Sport and Society: An Introduction. London:
Routledge, 2009.
3. Thompson, W.R. & Vanlandewijck, Y., The Paralympic Athlete: Handbook of
Sports Medicine and Science. West-Sussex: Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.
GTS317/3-Sports Management
This course explores the basics of sports organisation, hierarchy of sports organisation and their role in community engagement, networking, and integrated administration to ensure
equality, quality of life and sustainable partnership between diverse sectors of society
through the development of sports. Basic management of physical education and sports
plus the detailed explaination of management and running of various physical education
and sports programme will be covered.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hoye R, Smith A, Nicholson M, Stewart B, Westerbeek H. Sport management:
Principles and application. Oxon, Routledge, 2012.
2. Krotee, M.L. & Bucher, C.A., Management of Physical Education and Sports
(13th Ed.). Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill, 2007.
3. Lussier, R.N., Kimball, D.C. & Lussier, R.N., Applied Sports Management Skills.
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2009.
4. Emery, P., The Sports Management Toolkit. Abingdon, Oxon: Routledge, 2011.
GTX307/3-Radiation Protection and Safety II
This course is the continuity of Radiation Protection and Safety I course. This course aims
to provide theoretical and practical knowledge regarding the best practice of radiation
protection on diagnostic radiology, radiotherapy and nuclear medicine as well as researches involving radiation and radioactive waste management. Teaching and learning activities
for this course will be delivered through lectures, tutorials and practical demonstrations to
provide sustainable knowledge to the students. Students will be assessed through
assignments, test, practical assessment and final examination.
181
List of text/reference books:
1. Ismail Bahari & Mohd Yusof Ismail, Managing Radiation Safety. Atomic Energy
Licensing Board (AELB) McGraw-Hill, 2007.
2. Statkiewicz Sherer, M.A., Visconti, P.J. & Ritenour, E.R., Radiation Protection
in Medical Radiography (7th Ed.). Mosby, 2013.
3. Lombardi, M.H., Radiation Protection in Nuclear Medicine (2nd Ed.). CRC, 2006.
GTX321/4-Imaging Techniques I
This course introduces students to a sustainable clinical exercise in the hospital pertaining
to imaging techniques in general radiography, emergency radiography, dental radiography
and fluoroscopy. It also covers the procedures on handling a modality, radiation protection
practice, patient care and management, and good communication skill. This course will be
conducted via lecture/practicum/SCL. The students will be assessed through practical
assessment, log book, presentations, practical exercise and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive
Approach. Delmar Learning, 2006. 2. Bontrager, K.L. & Lampignano, J.P., Textbook of Radiographic Positioning and
Related Anatomy (8th Ed.). Elsevier Mosby, 2013.
3. Sutherland, R. & Thomson C., Pocketbook of Radiographic Positioning (3rd
Ed.). Churchill Livingston, 2007.
GTX322/3-Radiation Protection and Safety I
This course is aimed to provide the students knowledge regarding biological effects of
ionizing radiation as well as fundamentals of radiation protection. This course discuss the
regulatory acts regarding the use of radiation and radiation safety in Malaysia especially
the Atomic Energy Licensing Act (1984). This course also discusses the Radiation
Protection Program as recommended by Atomic Energy Licensing Board (AELB) to give
awareness on students regarding occupational health and safety involving ionising
radiation. Students will be taught theoretically and through practical regarding basic
principles in radiation protection. Students will be evaluated through quiz, assignments
practical report and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ismail, B. & Mohd. Yusof, M.A., Managing Radiation Safety: Guide for
Radiation Protection Officers. McGraw Hill, 2007. 2. The Government of Malaysia, Atomic Energy Licensing 1984, Act 304: Basic
Safety Standard (2010), Licensing (1986) and Transportation (1989).
3. Martin, A. & Harbison, S.A., An Introduction to Radiation Protection (6th Ed.).
CRC Press, 2012.
182
GTX323/3-Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry
This is an introductory course to the fundamental principles of radiation dosimetry which
includes basic radiation physics, production of x-ray, interactionof radiation, radiation
measurement equipment and clinical beam calibration. This course will be conducted
through lecture, tutorial and seminar. Student will be evaluated through test, quiz,
assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Pawlicki, T., Scanderbeg, D.J., Starkschall, G., Hendee’s Radiation Therapy
Physics (4th Ed.). Wiley-Blackwel, 2016.
2. Washington, C.M. & Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy
(4th Ed.). Mosby, 2015.
3. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2014.
GTX324/4-Diagnostic Radiology Imaging
This course introduces students to the knowledge and practice in mammography,
fluoroscopy, digital radiology, digital subtraction angiography (DSA), CT scan and MRI. It also covers quality assurance programmes, regulations on the use of radiation equipment
and practical radiation protection. This course will be conducted via lecture/tutorial/SCL.
The students will be assessed through continuous assessments, assignment, exercise of
tutorial, field report, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Carlton, R.R. & Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A
Science (5th Ed.). Thomson Delmar Learning, 2012.
2. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. & Boone, J.M., Essential Physics
of Medical Imaging (3rd Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
3. Allisy-Roberts, P., Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging (2nd Ed.). Elsevier, 2008.
GTX325/4-Nuclear Medicine Imaging
This course introduces students to the in-vivo radiation detection in health and the major
components of imaging equipment including gamma camera and PET scanner. Image
formation in nuclear medicine imaging with the performance parameters for both gamma
camera and PET scanner and quality assurance will be discussed. Students will be taught
the imaging techniques of both gamma camera and PET scanner. The course will be
conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students will be assessed through test, assignments, presentation and final examination.
183
List of text/reference books:
1. Prekeges, J., Nuclear Medicine Instrumentation (2nd Ed.). Jones & Bartlett
Learning, 2013.
2. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. & Boone, J.M., Essential Physics
of Medical Imaging (3rd Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
3. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. & Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, (4th
Ed.). Elsevier, 2012.
GTX326/4-Principles of Radiotherapy
This is an introductory course for the student to the fundamental principles of radiotherapy
which including basic concept of radiotherapy technique, clinical radiotherapy machine,
dose calculation and radiation beam calibration in clinical environment. This course will
be conducted through lecture, tutorial and seminar. Student will be evaluated through test,
quiz, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2014. 2. Symonds, P., Deehan, C. & Meredith C., Walter and Miller's Textbook of
Radiotherapy: Radiation Physics, Therapy and Oncology (7th Ed.). Churchill
Livingstone, 2012.
3. Washington, C.M. & Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy
(4th Ed.). Mosby, 2015.
GTX327/3-Brachytherapy
This course discusses fundamental knowledge of physics and dosimetry aspects of
brachytherapy. Radioactive sources commonly used in brachytherapy and types of
brachytherapy will also be discussed. The course will be conducted via lecture and tutorial.
The students will be assessed through test, quiz, assignment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hoskin P. & Coyle C., Radiotherapy in Practice: Brachytherapy (2nd Ed.).
Oxford, 2011.
2. Washington, C.M. & Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy
(4th Ed.). Mosby, 2015.
3. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2014. 4. Venselaar, J. & et al., Comprehensive Brachytherapy: Physical and Clinical
Aspects (Imaging in Medical Diagnosis and Therapy)(1st Ed.). CRC Press, 2012.
185
GTA401/6-Research Project
The course introduces students to a research project in audiology. The students are trained
to conduct research under the supervision of the faculty members. They are encouraged to
select research topics that are important and innovative in the audiological field. The course
requires the students to work independently and professionally while adhering to the ethical
standards. Students will be assessed through research proposal paper, presentation,
dissertation and viva.
List of text/reference books:
1. Daniel W.W., A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences (8th Ed.). John
Wiley & Sons, 2008.
2. Norman G.R. & Streiner D.L., Biostatistics: The Bare Essentials (3rd Ed.).
McGraw-Hill Medical, 2008.
3. Motulsky H., Intuitive Biostatistics (2nd Ed.). Oxford University Press, 2010.
4. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
GTA406/2-Noise and Hearing
This course introduces students to fundamental aspects of noise, different types of noises,
damage risk criteria, noise exposure guidelines internationally and locally, the best practice
for industrial audiology including hearing assessments on noise induced hearing loss cases
and hearing conservation program. It also covers the specific effects of noise on the
auditory and other systems. This course will be taught via lectures, tutorials and practical
sessions. Students will be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Rawool, V. (Ed.)., Hearing Conservation: In Occupational, Recreational,
Educational and Home Settings. Thieme, 2011.
2. Le Prell C.G., Henderson D., Fay R.R. & Popper, A.N. (Eds.), Noise-Induced
Hearing Loss: Scientific Advances (Springer Handbook of Auditory Research).
Springer, 2011.
3. Chasin, M., Hearing Loss in Musicians. Plural Publishing Inc., 2009.
4. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
GTA407/5-Audiology Clinic IV
This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic I, II and III courses. In this course,
students are attached to Audiology Clinic of HUSM three days/week and are supervised
by experienced audiologists for 14 weeks. Apart from conducting history taking and
fundamental audiological tests as well as procedures related to hearing aids, students are
186
also involved in performing advanced audiological tests such as electrophysiological tests,
site of lesion tests and non-organic hearing loss tests. Students will also develop skills in
dealing with complex cases, such as difficult to test children, children with multi-
disabilities and patients with non-organic hearing loss. This course will be taught through
clinical supervision and discussions. Students will be assessed through supervisor’s
evaluation (practical), report, presentation, log book, practical test (OSCE), practical test
(clinical examination) and viva voce.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
2. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
3. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis, Treatment,
Practice Management Volumes I-III (2nd Ed.). New York: Thieme Medical
Publishers, 2008.
4. Goldfarb, R., & Serpanos, Y. C., Professional Writing in Speech-language Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg, E., Sippola, C., Brodsky, A.L. & LISW, The
Communication Skills Workbook. USA: Whole Person Associates, Inc., 2008.
GTA408/6-Audiology Clinical Placement
This course introduces students to clinical audiology practice in selected hospitals in
Malaysia. Students are attached to Audiology Clinic for five days clinic per week and
supervised via experienced Audiologists for six weeks. This clinical training will cover the
best practice for Audiology for both adult and pediatric cases including interviewing
session for history taking, routine tests such as otoscopic examination, tympanometry,
acoustic reflex, PTA (with and without masking), measurement of hearing aid function and
explaining results as well as giving counselling to the patients. This course will be taught
clinical supervision and discussions. Students will be assessed through supervisor’s
evaluation (practical), reports, presentation and log book.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
2. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
3. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis, Treatment,
Practice Management Volumes I-III (2nd Ed.). New York: Thieme Medical
Publishers, 2008.
4. Goldfarb, R. & Serpanos, Y.C., Professional Writing in Speech-language
Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg, E., Sippola, C., Brodsky, A.L. & LISW, The Communication Skills Workbook. USA: Whole Person Associates, Inc., 2008.
187
GTA409/2- Audiology Seminar
This course introduces students to the seminar for promoting advanced audiological
knowledge. It also covers evidence-based practice (EBP) including interest, stages of EBP
and types of statistics to answer the question of work practices. This course will be taught
through lectures and discussions. Students will be assessed through assignments, journal
presentation, seminar presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Wong, L. & Hickson, L., Evidence Based Practice in Audiology: Evaluating
Interventions for Children and Adults with Hearing Impairment. San Diego:
Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.
2. Rubin, A., Statistics for Evidence-Based Practice and Evaluation (Research,
Statistics, & Program Evaluation) (3rd Ed.). Brooks Cole, 2012.
3. Rubin, A. & Bellamy, J., Practitioner's Guide to Using Research for Evidence-
Based Practice (2nd Ed.). Wiley, 2012.
4. Haynes, W.O. & Johnson, C.E., Understanding Research and Evidence-Based
Practice in Communication Disorders: A Primer for Students and Practitioners.
Allyn & Bacon, 2008.
5. Jolles, R.L., How to Run Seminars & Workshops: Presentation Skills for Consultants, Trainers and Teachers (3rd Ed.). Wiley, 2005.
GTA410/2-Ethics and Professionalisme in Audiology
This course introduces the student to professionalism, ethics, best practice of audiology,
codes of ethics, ethical decision making, beneficence and nonmaleficence, competency and
public statements in audiology. This course will be taught through lectures, tutorials,
discussions and case studies. Students will be assessed through assignments, presentations
and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Irwin, D.L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, T.W., &Vekovius, G.T., Ethics for Speech-
Language Pathologists and Audiologists: An Illustrative Casebook. Delmar
Cengage Learning, 2006.
2. Lubinski, R. & Hudson, M. W., Professional Issues in Speech-Language
Pathology and Audiology (4th Ed.). Delmar Cengage Learning, 2012.
3. Hosford-Dunn, H., Roeser, R. J. & Valente, M., Audiology Practice Management.
USA: Thieme, 2007.
4. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Diagnosis. New York:
Thieme, 2007. 5. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R. & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. USA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
188
GTA411/5-Audiology Clinic V
This course introduces students to clinical audiology practice. Students are attached to
Audiology Clinic for two days clinic per week and supervised via experienced Audiologists
for 14 weeks. This clinical training will cover the best practice of Audiology for both adult
and pediatric cases including interviewing session for history taking, basic tests such as
otoscopic examination, tympanometry, acoustic reflex, PTA (with and without masking),
and explaining results to the clients. Students are also able to handle the procedures related
to hearing aids, advanced audiological test (electrophysiology testing, site of lesion tests,
tests of non-organic hearing loss, vestibular testing and tinnitus audiometry) and mapping of adult patients with cochlear implants and children as well as patients who are difficult
to be tested. Students will be assessed through supervisor’s evaluation (practical), report,
presentation, log book, practical test (OSCE), practical test (clinical examination) and viva
voce.
List of text/reference books:
1. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical
Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
2. Stach, B.A., Clinical Audiology, An Introduction (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular
Publishing Group, Inc., 2010.
3. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., and Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis,
Treatment, Practice Management Volumes I-III (2nd Ed.). New York: Thieme
Medical Publishers, 2008.
4. Goldfarb, R. & Serpanos, Y. C., Professional Writing in Speech-language
Pathology and Audiology Workbook. San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.
5. Liptak, J.J., Leutenberg, E., Sippola, C., Brodsky, A.L. & LISW, The
Communication Skills Workbook. USA: Whole Person Associates, Inc., 2008.
GTA412/2-Practice Management for Audiologist and Speech Pathologist
This course introduces students to fundamental principles of practice management,
essential issues in business administrations, basic managerial accounting, financial
management of clinical practice, human resource and staff management as well as the
infection control at workplace. It also covers the applications of information technology at
workplace for Audiology and Speech Pathology practice. This course will be taught via
lectures, tutorials and discussions. Students will be assessed through test, presentation and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hosford-Dunn, H., Roeser, R.J., & Valente, M., Audiology Practice Management.
USA: Thieme, 2007.
2. Madell, J.R., & Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology,
and Management. Thieme, 2008.
3. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
189
GTB408/9-Biomedical Practicum
This course exposes students to the best practice in clinical diagnostic laboratory services
for sustainability of health and quality of life. Students are given opportunities to acquire
knowledge and experience as well as to observe, perform, analyze and interpret the test
results. Students are also trained to identify and solve problems in laboratory services; to
implement quality control program; to do troubleshooting and to manage the diagnostic
laboratory. The course will be conducted via practical training and discussion. The students
will be evaluated through practical tests, assignments, presentation and logbook.
List of text/reference books:
Text books relevant to the field of clinical/industrial attachment chosen by the students
including those journals in their respective fields of specialty.
GTB411/8-Research Project
This course provides the opportunity for the students to carry out biomedicine related
research project under the supervision of a lecturer. This course also exposes the students
to the best practice in research as well as occupational health and safety during research
project briefing. This course will be conducted by supervision of research work in the lab,
discussion and workshop. Students will be evaluated through thesis, seminars and
supervision.
List of text/reference books:
1. Minichiello, V., Sullivan, G., Greenwood, K. & Axford, R., Handbook for
Research Methods in Health Sciences. Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman,
1999.
2. Montgomery, D.C., Design and Analysis of Experiments (5th Ed.). NY: John
Wiley and Sons, 2000.
3. Zieger, M., Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.). NY:
McGraw-Hill Professionals, 1999.
4. Guidelines for the preparation of final year research project dissertation. School
of Health Sciences, USM, 2015.
5. Any books/journals relevant to the fields or topics of research chosen by the
students.
GTB412/10-Industrial Training
This course prepares students to the actual working experience in a laboratory. Student is
given the choice to choose between gaining experiences in a research laboratory or in a
healthcare-based laboratory. In the research laboratory, student will be exposed to relevant
practical skills in research. Student will be guided and supervised by the respective
researcher and the mini research project will be determined by the lab supervisor. Student who chooses to perform his/her industrial training in clinical/industrial laboratory will get
to experience the running, analysis and evaluation of various clinical or industrial tests.
Student will also be exposed to various administrative, best practice, health and safety
190
procedures and management skills in the laboratory. The students will be evaluated through
final report and performance evaluation by the laboratory supervisor.
List of text/reference books:
Relevant text books and peer-reviewed journals related to the field of interest.
GTD406/3-Outpatient Dietetic Practicum II
This course is a continuation of Outpatient Dietetic Internship I which aims to develop
students' self confidence in planning the diet and to handle diet counselling session under
supervision. Students will be attached to specialist clinics including the pediatric, renal and
surgical clinics.
List of text/reference books:
1. Thomas B. & Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic
Association). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008.
2. Bauer K.D. & Sokolik, C.A., Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development.
Wadsworth, 2002.
3. Mahan K. & Escott-Stump, S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy (12th. Ed.). Saunders Co., 2007.
GTD407/3-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II
This course is a continuation of Dietetic Practicum in the Ward I which aims to enhance
students’ dietetic skills in giving medical nutrition therapy to patients in hospital wards.
Students will be attached to selected wards such as pediatric, general, surgical and medical
wards under the supervision of respective dietitians. Students are required to give case
presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite of completion
of this course.
List of text/reference books:
1. Mahan, L.K., Escott-Stump, S. & Raymond, J.L., Krause’s Food and the
Nutrition Care Process (13th Ed.). Saunders Co., 2011.
2. Nelms, M., Roth, S.L. & Lacey K., Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study
Approach (3rd Ed.). Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
3. Nix, S., William’s Basic Nutrition and Diet Therapy. Canada: Mosby Elsevier,
2009.
GTD408/3-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II
This course is a continuation of Dietetic Internship Special Unit I which aims to expand
students' knowledge in giving appropriate medical nutrition therapy in specific fields such
as pediatric, surgery, trauma, medical, renal, oncology, nutritional support and critical care.
191
Intensive training will be provided by the respective dietitians. Students are required to
give case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite to the
completion of this course.
List of text/reference books:
1. Werbach M.R. & Jeffrey Moss J., Textbook of Nutritional Medicine. Third Line
Press, 2000.
2. Mahan, L.K., Escott-Stump, S. & Raymond, J.L., Krause’s Food and the
Nutrition Care Process (13th Ed.). Saunders Co., 2011.
3. Nelms M., Long, S. & Lacey, K., Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study
Approach (3rd Ed.). Thomson Wadswoth, 2008.
GTD410/6-Research Projects in Dietetics
This course introduces students to the actual research project on nutrition and health related
diseases. The students will be exposed on how to choose appropriate experimental design
and research methodology and conduct the research project effectively based on learned
knowledge in real. The course also exposes the students on data analysis using correct
statistics and effective thesis and article writing. This course will be conducted by
supervision of research work in the lab, ward, clinic and community. Students will be evaluated through thesis, article, presentations and supervision.
List of text/reference books:
1. Elaine R.M. & Linda V.H., Research, Succesful Approaches (3rd Ed.), American
Dietetic Association, 2007.
2. International Dietetics & Nutrition Terminology (IDNT) Reference Manual (4th
Ed.). Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics, 2013.
3. Stephen P. & Shane, A.T., Introduction to Research in the Health Sciences (5th
Ed.). Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier, 2008.
GTF400/3-Forensic Medicine
This course introduces students to the various kinds of death and its signs, various chemical
transformations taking place after death, postmortem study, pattern and types of injuries.
It also covers theoretical and practical aspects of the victims dying of unknown causes,
killing, suicide, blunt/sharp force injuries, firearm & explosive injuries, asphyxia,
drowning, burns and electrical shocks. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorials,
discussion and education visits to forensic medicine unit. Students will be assessed via
assignment, test, reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Walters, B.L. Handbook of Autopsy Practice (4th Ed.), Humana Press, 2009.
2. DiMaio V.J.M, Dana S.E. Handbook of Forensic Pathology (2nd Ed.). CRC Press,
2006.
192
3. Vij, K. Textbook of Forensic Medicine & Toxicology: Principles & Practice.
Elsevier India, 2014.
4. Payne-James J., Busuttil A. & Smock W. Forensic Medicine: Clinical and
Pathological Aspects. Greenwich Medical Media, 2002.
5. Saukko P. & Knight B., Knight’s Forensic Pathology (4th Ed.). CRC Press, 2015.
GTF402/4-Ballistics and Chemistry of Explosives
This course introduces students to concepts of ballistics and knowledge for ballistic and
explosive investigations. This course also introduces concepts of explosives and various
types of firearms and explosives commonly used by terrorist and criminals. This course is
conducted at Chemistry Department by experts in both disciplines; ballistics and
explosives. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorial and practical. Students will be
assessed through tests, practical reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Di Maio V.J.M. Gunshot Wounds: Practical Aspects of Firearms, Ballistics, and Forensic Techniques (3rd Ed.). CRC Press, 2015.
2. Zukas J.A.,Walters W. Explosive Effects and Applications (Shock Wave and High
Pressure Phenomena). Springer, 2013.
3. Pickett M. Explosives Identification Guide (2nd Ed.). Delmar Cengage Learning,
2004.
4. Carlucci D.E. & Jacobson S.S. Ballistics - Theory and Design of Guns and
Ammunition (2nd Ed.). CRC Press, 2013.
5. Warlow T., Firearms, the Law, and Forensic Ballistics (3rd Ed.). CRC Press.
2011.
GTF407/8-Forensic Practicum
This course introduces students to training on crime scene management and forensic
examination by way of mock crime scenes and moot court. This course is conducted at the
Forensic Laboratory, Royal Malaysia Police in Cheras, Kuala Lumpur by qualified police
personnel assisted by the forensic experts from the Chemistry Department, Petaling Jaya.
The students will have practical training in fingerprints, ballistics, and clandestine
laboratory and will be exposed to various chemical and instrumental methods of analysis.
The students will also be taken to real crime scenes and will be taught the various
procedures followed in the search and collection of evidence materials. This course also
provides fundamental knowledge on the Malaysian Legal System and also the police
administration in processing of evidence materials at the Chemistry Department. This
course provides detailed knowledge on the preparation of reports and presentation of
evidence before courts of law. The course will be taught via lectures, tutorial, practical and
discussion, Students will be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports, seminar
and final examination.
193
List of text/reference books:
1. Miller M.T.. Crime Scene Investigation Laboratory Manual. Academic Press,
2014.
2. James, S.H., Nordby, J.J. & Bell, S. Forensic Science: An Introduction to
Scientific and Investigative Techniques (4th Ed.). CRC Press, 2014.
3. Christian, D.R., Forensic Investigation of Clandestine Laboratories. CRC Press,
2003.
4. Ramotowski, R. Lee and Gaensslen's Advances in Fingerprint Technology (3rd
Ed.). CRC Press, 2012. 5. St. Clair, J. Crime Laboratory Management, Academic Press, 2002.
6. Houck M.M. Trace Evidence Analysis: More Cases in Mute Witnesses. Elsevier
Academic Press. 2004.
7. Fisher, B.A.J. & Fisher, D.R., Techniques of Crime Scene Investigation (8th Ed.).
CRC Press, 2012.
8. Ogle Jr, R.R., Crime Scene Investigation and Reconstruction (3rd Ed.). Pearson,
2011.
GTF408/2-Forensic Documents Examination
This course introduces students to various techniques to examine sample of forensic
documents. The course will be taught via lectures, practical sessions and discussion by
document examination experts from Chemistry Department of Malaysia. Students will be
assessed through tests, assignments, laboratory reports and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Day, S.P., Ellen D. & Davies C. Scientific Examination of Documents: Methods
and Techniques (3rd Edition). CRC Press. 2005.
2. Kelly, J.S. & Lindblom, B.S., Scientific Examination of Questioned Documents. CRC Press. 2006.
3. Harralson H.H. & Miller L.S. Huber and Headrick's Handwriting Identification:
Facts and Fundamentals. CRC Press LLC. 2017.
4. Koppenhaven, K.M., Forensic Document Examination: Principles and Practices.
Humana Press. 2007
GTF409/2- Statistics for Forensic Science
This course introduces to students the use of statistics for forensic data interpretation and
common fallacies of prosecutors and defense lawyers as well as the transformation from
conventional statistical analysis to the use of more complex statistical interpretation. It
covers the key statistical techniques used to evaluate various types of forensic evidence.
Real-life examples from the forensic science literature and forensic case-work are used to
illustrate relevant statistical concepts and methods in areas such as vehicle paint survey
data, glass fragment interpretation, DNA profiling and biochemical matching (e.g. blood
stains). The course will be taught via lectures and discussions. Students will be accessed
via test, assignments and final examination.
194
List of text/reference books:
1. Adam, C. Essential Mathematics and Statistics for Forensic Science. Wiley. 2010.
2. Lucy, D., Introductory Statistics for Forensic Scientists. Wiley. 2005.
3. Aitken C. & Taroni F. Statistics and the Evaluation of Evidence for Forensic
Scientists (2nd Ed.). Wiley. 2004
4. Haigh, J., Taking Chances; Winning with Probability. Oxford University Press,
2003
GTF410/2- Forensic Digital Evidence
This course introduces students the fundamental of digital forensics. It covers the recovery
and handling of digital evidence, investigation approach, device and storage of digital
information. Computer forensic analysis and validation as well as digital crimes will also
be discussed. The course will be taught through lectures and discussions. Students will be
accessed via test, assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Marshall, A.M. Digital Forensics: Digital Evidence in Criminal Investigations.
Wiley-Blackwell. 2008. 2. Casey, E. Handbook of Digital Forensics and Investigation. Academic Press.
2009.
3. Casey, E. Digital Evidence and Computer Crime: Forensic Science, Computers
and the Internet (3rd Ed.). Academic Press. 2011.
4. Nelson, B., Phillips A., Steuart C. Guide to Computer Forensics and
Investigations (5th Ed.). Course Technology. 2015.
GTF411/8- Research Projects
The course introduces students to diverse research disciplines pertaining to forensic
science. The students engage in supervised research under the guidance of a faculty
member. They are encouraged to select research topics in criminalistics, biological and
chemical sciences, criminal profiling, forensic psychology and other related
interdisciplinary investigation. The course requires substantial independent work by
students. The completion of the course will present the students the ability to better
understand research methodologies. The course will also provide a strong science
foundation and emphasize the scientific method and problem solving skills that will keep
them in good stead, when they are employed in forensic laboratories. Students will be
assessed through dissertation, seminar and assignments.
List of text/reference books:
1. Thomas, G. How to Do Your Research Project: A Guide for Students. SAGE
Publications Ltd. 2017
195
2. Judith, B. & Waters S. Doing Your Research Project: A Guide For First-Time
Researchers (UK Higher Education OUP Humanities & Social Sciences Study
Skills). Open University Press, 2014.
3. Journals and other references based on areas of research.
GTJ405/5-Medical Nursing Practicum
This course introduces student to medical nursing practicum. It covers holistic, safe and
best nursing practice. This course exposes students to nursing management and health
education to patient and family. It also encourages cultural diversity and multi-disciplinary
approach. Students will be assessed through practical tests, log book and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client
Care (6th Ed.). New Jersey; Pearson Prentice Hall, 2014.
2. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing. Critical Thinking in Client
Care, (4th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2014.
3. Timby, B.K., & Smith, N., Introductory Medical Surgical Nursing (10th Ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2010.
4. Smith, S.F., Duell, D.J., & Martin, B.C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to Advanced Skills (8th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
GTJ406/4-Surgical Nursing Practicum
This course introduces students to surgical nursing practicum. It covers holistic, safe and
best peri-operative nursing practice. This course exposes students to nursing management
and health education to patient and family. It also encourages cultural diversity and multi-
disciplinary approach. Students will be assessed through practical tests, log book and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G., Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts,
Process and Practice (9th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson, 2016.
2. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing. Critical Thinking in Client
Care, (4th Ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2014.
3. Lemon, P., Burke, K, Bouldoff, G. & Gubrund, P. Medical-Surgical Nursing:
Clinical Reasoning in Patient Care, (6th Edn.), New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2014.
4. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills (8th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Edu., 2012.
5. Hinkle, J.L, & Cheever, K.H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing (13th Edn), Philadelphia: Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2013
196
GTJ407/4-Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum
This course introduces students to critical care and management of patients at community
setting. It incorporates best nursing practice, health promotion and community
engagement. It also encourages cultural diversity and multi-disciplinary approach.
Students will be assessed through log book, quiz, practical tests and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Allender, J.A., Rector, C. & Warner, K.D., Community Health Nursing:
Promoting & Protecting the Public Pealth, (7th Ed.). China: Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins, 2010.
2. LeMone, P. & Burke, K.M., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care (4th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008.
3. Urden, L.D., Stacy, K. M., & Lough, M.E., Critical Care Nursing: Diagnosis and
Management (7th Ed.). St. Louis: Elsevier/Mosby, 2014.
GTJ408/4-Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum
This course introduces students to maternal, child and women health nursing management.
It incorporates best nursing practice and health promotion. It also encourages cultural diversity and multi-disciplinary approach. Students will be assessed through practical tests,
log book and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Beckham, C., Ling, F.W., Barzanksy, B.M., Herbert, W.N., Laube, D.W. &
Smith, R.P., Obstetrics and Gynecology (6th Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins
Publishers, 2009.
2. Perry, S.E., Hockenberry, M.J., Lowdermil, D.L. & Wilson, D., Maternal Child
Nursing Care (4th Ed.). Missouri: Mosby Elsevier, 2010.
3. Towle, M.A., Maternal-Newborn Nursing Care. New Jersey: Pearson Education,
Inc., 2009.
GTJ409/3-Nursing Foundation Practicum III
This course introduces students to practicum nursing foundation III. It covers the medical
and surgical management of patients with endocrine, musculoskeletal, neurology,
otorhinolaryngology, ophthalmology, dermatology, immunology, hematology and
oncology problems. It also encourages cultural diversity and safety in nursing. Students
will be assessed through practical evaluation and bedside presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Craven, R. Hirnle, C. & Henshaw, C. M. Fundamentals of NURSING. Human
Health and Function. (8th Eds). Wolters Kluwer, (2017).
197
2. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts,
Process and Practice, (9th Ed), New Jersey, Pearson, (2012).
3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. Medical-Surgical Nursing. Critical Thinking in Client
Care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, (2008).
4. Smeltzer, S. & Bare. Brunner and Sunddart’s Textbook of Medical-Surgical
Nursing, (10th Ed.) J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia, (2004).
GTJ410/6-Research Project
This course introduces students to a nursing research project. It emphasises scientific and
innovative process of conducting research. Findings would enable nursing knowledge
transformation, dissemination of research evidence and networking. This course will be
implemented via discussion and supervision. Students will be assessed through oral and
written research project.
List of text/reference books:
1. Creswell, J.W., Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative and Mixed Methods
Approach (3rd Ed.). Thousand Oaks, California: Sage Publication, 2008.
2. Creswell, J.W. Research Design (4th Ed.). Los Angeles, USA: SAGE Publication
Ltd., 2014. 3. Holloway, I. & Wheeler, S., Qualitative Research in Nursing & Healthcare. UK:
Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.
4. Polit, D.F. & Beck, C.T., Nursing Research (9th Ed.). China: Lippincott, 2012.
GTK402/8-Research Project
This course aims to increase knowledge and research skills such as preparing research
proposal, literature review, seeking ethical approval (human ethics), choose of research
design and methods, data collection, data analysis then further sharing the research results
through scientific writing and presentation. Aspects of sustainability via the components
of energy, health, agriculture, climate change and disaster risk management, production
and consumption, population and poverty, biodiversity and health and safety will be
incorporated into their research projects. Students will be assessed through presentation of
research proposal, research progress, thesis writing and viva voce.
List of text/reference books:
1. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan Peraturan-
Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS),
2009.
2. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS),
2009.
3. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan
Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
198
4. Daniel W.W., Biostatistics, Student Solutions Manual: A Foundation For
Analysis In The Health Sciences (Wiley Series In Probability And Statistics). John
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009.
5. Gordis L., Epidemiology. W.B. Saunders Company, 2009.
6. Weimer W.B., Notes On The Methodology Of Scientific Research. John Wiley &
Sons, 1979.
GTK404/3-Environmental Management
This course describes the ISO 14001 environmental management system and the needs for such standard. The requirement and the methods to conduct Environmental Impact
Assessment, Social Impact Assessment, modelling and integrated environmental
management are also explained. Students are trained to prepare documentation and
conducting internal audits. The concept of sustainable development and established as well
as highlighting the current global environmental issues are also applied in teaching. This
course will be taught via lectures, tutorial and discussion. Students will be assessed through
essays, presentation, tests and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Dalal-Clayton B. & Sadler B., Strategic Environmental Assessment – A
Sourcebook And Reference Guide To International Experience. Earthscan,
London, 2005.
2. Friedman F.B., Practical Guide to Environmental Management (9th Ed.).
Environmental Law Institute, 2003.
3. Miller G.T., Environmental Science, Working With The Earth. Thompson
Learning Science, 2009.
4. Radojevic M. & Bashkin V., Practical Environmental Analysis, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2006.
5. Schoffman A. & Tordini A. M., ISO 14001: A Practical Approach. An American
Chemical Society Publication, 2003.
6. Smith J.U. & Smith P., Introduction to Environmental Modelling. Oxford
University Press, Oxford, 2007.
7. Smith R.D. & Maltby E., Using The Ecosystem Approach To Implement The
Convention On Biological Diversity - Key Issues And Case Studies. Ecosystem
Management Series No. 2. IUCN Publications Services Unit, Cambridge, 2003.
GTK406/12-Environmental And Occupational Health Practicum
Through USM-industry collaboration, the students will be placed for 6 months in selected
government or private organisation. Students will identify the actual situation of
environmental problems and occupational safety and health issues at workplace. Students
have the opportunity to practice the knowledge they have learned, improve their skills and
prepare themselves to face the real situation in the workplace. In addition, students will
also apply the concept of sustainability and eco-friendly development in the workplace as
well as gain knowledge, focused on the elements of the ecosystem and the preservation of
the workplace. Students will be assessed based on log book, reports and presentation.
199
List of text/reference books:
1. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan Peraturan-
Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS).
2009.
2. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan
Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009.
3. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan Peraturan-
Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS),
2009.
4. Akta Pengurusan Sisa Pepejal Dan Pembersihan Awam 2007 (Akta 672). PNMB,
2007.
5. Akta Petroleum (Langkah-Langkah Keselamatan) 1984 (Akta 302). PNMB, 2005.
GTK408/4- Occupational Safety and Health Management
This course introduces occupational safety and health management system in Malaysia
such as OHSAS 18001, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722. This course is also covers methods
to prepare related documentation, planning for training and promotion associated with
health and safety at workplace and methods to conduct audit. This course will be taught
via lectures, tutorial, case study and discussion. Students will be assessed through assignments, presentation, quiz, tests and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. JKKP GP (BM) 04/2003. Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan Dan
Kesihatan, Modul l - lV. Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara,
Malaysia, 2003.
2. Ismail B., Pengaturan Sendiri Dalam Pengurusan Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan
Pekerjaan. McGraw Hill Education, 2002.
3. ILO-OSH. Guidelines On Occupational Safety And Health Management Systems,
2001.
GTN405/3-Current Issues in Nutrition
This course provides an opportunity to students to discuss the contemporary issues related
to Malaysian and international nutrition intake. Controversial issues such as ‘new form of
conquering’ by the introduction of fast food, genetically modified food, introduction of
processed foods from other countries/continents and its impact on the global and Malaysian
food intake quality will be discussed. Other topics include therapeutic, dietary supplement,
functional food and nutraceutical food consumption, association of food with cancer
disease, cardiovascular disease, diabetes, and obesity will also be discussed. This course will be taught via lecture and discussion session. Students will be assessed through
continuous assessment, assignments, presentation and final examination.
200
List of text/reference books:
1. Rolfes S.R., Pinna K. & Whitney E., Understanding Normal and Clinical
Nutrition (9th Ed.). Belmont (ca): Thomson Wadsworth, 2011.
2. Wardlaw G. & Smith A., Contemporary Nutrition: Isssues and Insight With
Foodworks. New York: McGraw- Hill Science/Engineering/Maths, 2012.
3. Insel P., Turner R.E & Ross D., Nutrition (3nd Ed.). American Dietetic
Association, 2007.
4. Sizer F.S., Whitney E & Piche L.A., Nutrition Concepts and Controversies.
Nelson Education, 2009. 5. Brown J.E. Nutrition Now. Wadsworth, 2011.
6. Webb G.P. Dietary Supplements and Functional Foods. Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.
7. Mahan, L.K. & Escott-Stump, S.,Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy (12th
Ed.). Saunders Elsevier, 2008.
GTN407/3-Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar
This course will introduce students to current issues of recent advancements on nutritional sciences such as concepts and current development. It also covers application of nutritional
sciences in healthy populations throughout the lifespan to prevent and alleviate diet- and
lifestyle-related diseases. This course will be taught via group debate and discussion
session. Students will be assessed through assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Contento I.R., Nutrition Education: Linking Theory, Research and Practice (2nd
Ed.). Sudbury, MA: Jones & Bartlett. 2010.
GTN408/4-Food Service and Industry Practicum
This course will stress on food service handling (in hospitals, institutions, industry and
restaurants) and the relationship between quantitative food production with different
menus, equipments, service staff, time of serving, kitchen sanitation, food preparation and
quality assurance. The main focus is on the practical sessions at hospitals, institutions,
industries and major restaurants. Lectures and briefing session will be given on the first
week or before the commencement of internship. The students will undergo internship
service for a period of six to eight weeks in chosen premises. During the attachments, the
students are required to observe the utilization of equipments, services and food
management under supervision of field supervisors.
List of text/reference books:
1 Byers B.A., Shanklin C.W. & Hoover L.A,. Food Service Manual for Healthcare
Institutions (4th Ed.). JB-AHA Publishers, 2004.
2. Knight J. B. & Korschevar L.H., Quantity Food Production, Planning and
Management. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 2006.
3. Gregoire M.B. & Spears M.C., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and
Systems Approach (6th Ed.). Prentice Hall, 2006.
201
GTN409/12-Research Project in Nutrition
This course introduces students to a research project in related fields in order to broaden
their knowledge and skills in critical analysis. It also covers research to acquire skills in
scientific aspects for the testing of hypotheses in health science topics. The course will be
taught via discussion and practical work. The students will be assessed throught theses
writing and presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Koh E.T. & Owen W.L., Introduction to Nutrition and Health Research. Boston:
Kluver Academic Publication, 2000.
2. Heppner P.P. & Heppner M.J., Writing and Publishing Your Thesis, Dissertation,
and Research: A Guide for Students in the Helping Professions. Belmont:
Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2004.
GTP402/6- Research Project
The course introduces students to diverse interdisciplinary & collaborative research culture
pertaining to speech-language pathology field. The students engage in supervised research
under the guidance of a school member. They are encouraged to select research topics in normal language development, paediatric language disorders, speech sound disorders,
acquired language disorders, fluency disorders, voice disorders, motor-speech disorders,
hearing impairment, swallowing problems and also be involved in research collaboration
and partnership in linguistics, psychology, medical, other habilitation specialization area
and etc. The course requires substantial independent and integrative work by the students.
The completion of the course will develop the students ability to better understand the
methodologies to conduct a research study. It will also expose students to essential
fundamental research basics, scientific techniques as well as innovative problem solving
skills to prepare the students to work in a variety of settings in the future. Students will be
assessed through dissertation, and viva voce.
List of text/reference books:
1. Irwin, D., Pannbacker, M., & Lass, N., Clinical Research Methods in Speech-
Language Pathology and Audiology. San Diego: Plural Publishing, 2007.
2. Kuzma, J.W. & Bohnenblust, S.E., Basic Statistics for the Health Sciences (5th
Ed.). Mountain View: Mayfield Pub., 2005.
3. Ruscello, D.M., Tests and Measurements in Speech-Language Pathology.
Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999.
4. Silverman, F.H., Research Design and Evaluation in Speech-Language Pathology
and Audiology (4th Ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1998.
202
GTP403/6- Speech Pathology Clinic V
This course trains students to fully conduct clinical session under supervision. The main
caseloads in this course are voice disorders, acquired language disorders, motor-speech
disorders and language based learning disability. The students are required to design the
individualized assessment and intervention plans for their patients. They are required to
administer and apply these plans in managing their patients. This course will be taught
through clinical session and case discussion. Students will be assessed on their clinical
performance, log book, case history report and case presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Boone, D.R., McFarlane, S.C., Von Berg, S.L. & Zraick, R.I., The Voice and
Voice Therapy (8th Ed.). Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.
2. McHenry, W. & McHenry, J., What Therapists Say and Why They Say It: Effective
Therapeutic Responses and Techniques. Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2007.
3. Hedge, M.N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language
Disorder. New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006. 4. Paul, R. & Norbury, C., Language Disorders from Infancy through Adolescence:
Listening, Speaking, Reading, Writing, and Communicating (4th Ed.). St. Louis:
Mosby, 2011.
GTP406/6-Speech Pathology Clinic VI
This course trains students to fully conduct clinical session under supervision. The main
caseloads in this course are acquired language disorders, learning disability, fluency
disorders and swallowing disorders. The students are required to design the individualized
assessment and intervention plans for their patients. They are required to administer and
apply these plans in managing their patients. This course will be delivered through clinical
session and case discussion. Students will be assessed on their clinical performance, log
book, case history report and case presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Carrau, R.L. & Murry, T., Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders
(2nd Ed.). San Diego. Singular Publishing Group, 2006.
2. Arvedson, J.C. & Brodsky, L., Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding: Assessment
and Management (2nd Ed.). San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001.
3. Logemann, J., Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders (2nd Ed.). Texas: Pro-ed, 1998.
203
GTP408/2–Fluency Disorders
This course introduces students to fluency disorders including stuttering and cluttering.
Interviewing and investigating processes are emphasized in this course as well as the
assessment and mode of intervention. This course will be taught via lectures and problem-
based learning. Students will be assessed through assignment, quiz, presentation and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Guitar, B. & McCauley, R. J., Treatment of Stuttering: Established and Emerging
Interventions. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Philadelphia, 2010.
2. Lees, R. & Stark, C., The Treatment of Stuttering in the Young School-Aged Child.
Philadelphia: Whurr. London, 2005.
3. Ramig, P.R. & Dodge, D.M., The Child and Adolescent Stuttering Treatment and
Activity Resource Guide. New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2005.
GTP409/6-Speech Pathology Clinical Placement
This course trains students to fully conduct clinical session in a different setting, under
supervision of a selected supervisor from other institution. Students are required to fully manage mix of cases along with designing the individualized assessment and intervention
plans for their patients. They are required to administer and apply these plans in managing
their patients. This course will be delivered through clinical session and case discussion.
Students will be assessed on their clinical performance, log book, case history reports and
case presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Paul, R., Introduction to Clinical Methods in Communication Disorders. London:
Paul H Brookes Pub. Co., 2002.
2. Goldstein, B., Cultural and Linguistic Diversity Resource Guide for Speech-
Language Pathologists. New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2000.
3. Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist. London: Singular
Publication Group, 1997.
4. Hedge, M. N., Pocket Guide to Treatment in Speech-Language Pathology.
London: Singular Publishing Group, 1998.
5. Corbin-Lewis, K., Liss, J.M. & Sciortino, K., Clinical Anatomy and Physiology of the Swallow Mechanics. New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2005.
GTP410/2- Ethics and Professionalism for Speech Pathology
This course introduces students to the professional aspects of the speech-language
pathologist. It also discusses the code of ethics/conducts that were set by the professional
body and Allied Health Act. This course will be taught via lecture, tutorial and small group
discussion. Students will be assessed through assignment, seminar and final examination
204
List of text/reference books:
1. Irwin D.L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, P.W. & Vekovius, G.T., Ethics for Speech-
Language Pathologist and Audiologist: An Illustrative Casebook. New York:
Thomson Delmar Learning, 2007.
2. Body, R. & McAllister, L., Ethics in Speech and Language Therapy. West Sussex:
John Wiley & Sons Ltd. United Kingdom, 2009.
3. Corey, G., Corey, M.S. & Callanan, P., Issues and Ethics in the Helping
Profession. New York: Cengage Learning, 2010.
GTS401/3-Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription
This course discusses about the tests to determine fitness level. This course also introduces
students about the method in providing exercise prescription for each health and fitness
components. Integrate innovative technological-assisted programs (i.e. activity
monitoring, applications) for movement and exercise that are targeted on improving
sedentary behaviour, wellness and quality of life. This course will be taught via lecture and
practical. Students will be assessed through test, practical, lab report and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Gordon N.F., Pescatello L.S., Thompson W.R., ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise
Testing and Prescription (8th Ed.). Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2010.
2. Kaminsky L.A., ACSM’s Health-Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual
(3rd Ed.). Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins Health, 2010.
3. Jonas S. and Phillips E.M., ACSM’s Exercise is Medicine: A Clinician’s Guide to
Exercise Prescription, Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2009.
4. Nieman, D. C., Exercise Testing & Prescription: A Health-Related Approach (7th Ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill, 2011.
5. Swain, D. P., ACSM’s Resource Manual for Guidelines for Exercise Testing and
Prescription. Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2014.
GTS407/3-Therapeutic Exercises
This course introduces students to the causes, prevalence and incidence of diseases in the human population and the effects of physical activity on them. This course also covers the
application of specific exercises for prevention and treatment of chronic diseases. This
course will be taught via lectures, practical and discussion. Student will be assessed through
tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Durstine J.L., ACSM’s Exercise Management for Persons with Chronic Diseases
and Disabilities (3rd Ed.), Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2009.
205
2. Myers J. and Nieman D.C., ACSM’s Resouces for Clinical Exercise Physiology:
Musculoskeleral, Neuromuscular, Neoplastic, Immunologic and Hematologic
Conditions (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/ Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins Health, 2010.
3. Roitman J.L. and LaFontaine T., The Exercise Professional’s Guide to Optimizing
Health: Strategies for Preventing and Reducing Chronic Disease. Philadelphia,
PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/ Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Health, 2012.
GTS409/10-Research Project
The course introduces students to diverse research disciplines pertaining to exercise and
sports science. The students engage in supervised research under the guidance of a faculty
member. They are encouraged to select research topics in sport physiology, sport
psychology, sport nutrition, sport biomechanic etc. The course requires substantial
independent work by students. The completion of the course will ensure that the students
are better able and have better understanding with regard to the research methodologies.
The course will also provide a strong science foundation and emphasise the scientific
methods and problem solving skills that will enable them to carry out independent
empirical studies in the future. Students will be assessed through dissertations, seminars
and assignments.
List of text/reference books:
1. Journals and other references based on areas of research.
2. Gratton C. & Jones I., Research Methods for Sport Studies (2nd Ed.).New York,
NY: Routledge, 2010.
3. O’Donoghue P., Research Methods for Sports Performance Analysis. New York,
NY: Routledge, 2010
4. Berg K.E. and Latin R.W., Essentials of Research Methods in Health, Physical
Education, Exercise Science, and Recreation (3rd Ed.). Baltimore, MD: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, 2008.
5. Neutens J.J. and Rubinson L., Research Techniques for Health Sciences (5th Ed.).
Boston, MA: Pearson, 2014.
6. McNamee M.J., Olivier S. and Wainwright P., Research Ethics in Exercise,
Health and Sports Sciences. New York, NY: Routledge, 2007.
GTS410/3-Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices
This course introduces students to the updated issues pertaining to the study of sports and
exercise science based on local and worldwide perspectives. It emcompasses the theories,
empirical evidences based on current practices, malpractices and developments occurring
in the field of sports science. The course will be taught via lectures, discussions and
practical sessions. Students will be assessed through presentations, reports, tests and final
examination.
206
List of text/reference books:
1. Journal and other references based on current issues in sports and exercise science.
2. Collins M. , Genetics and Sports. Switzerland: Karger, 2009.
3. Bakere S.R., Hot Topics in Sports and Athletics. New York: Nova Science Publishers
Inc., 2008.
4. Bahrke, M.S. and Yesalis, C.E (Eds), Performance Enhancing Substance in Sports
and Exercise. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2002.
GTS411/6-Industrial Training
This course is ran by short term training which involve the basic knowledge in health
science that require the application of technology, psychomotor skill, informatics, critical
and rationale thinking, communication skill, ethic, professionalism, management skill,
entrepreneurship and involvement in social activity and community service.
List of text/reference books:
Journal and other references based on areas of research being choosen.
GTX407/3–Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II
This course provides fundalmental practical training regarding routine quality assurance in
radiotherapy and nuclear medicine modalities. Students will be trained under the
supervision of clinical and technical personnel on quality assurance and calibration
according to standard protocols. Teaching and learning activities will be delivered through
practicals and group discussions. Students will be assessed on their attendance,
commitments and laboratory reports.
List of text/reference books:
1. Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. & Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine (3rd
Ed.). Springer, 2005.
2. Symonds, P., Deehan, C. & Meredith C., Walter and Miller's Textbook of
Radiotherapy: Radiation Physics, Therapy and Oncology (7th Ed.). Churchill Livingstone, 2012.
3. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2014.
4. Pryma, D.A., Nuclear Medicine: Practical Physics, Artifacts, and Pitfalls (1st
Ed.). Oxford University Press, 2014.
GTX408/3–Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy
This course introduces methods of dose calculation manually for radiotherapy and the best practice on procedures and techniques for treatment planning including simulation.
Students will be taught on using computer for generating dose distributions for patient
cases. The course will be conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students will be assessed
through test, quiz, assignments and final examination.
207
List of text/reference books:
1. Washington, C.M. & Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy
(4th Ed.). Mosby, 2015.
2. Jayaramans, S. & Lanzl, L.H., Clinical Radiotherapy Physics (2nd Ed.). Springer-
Verlag, 2004.
3. Khan, F.M.and et al., Khan’s Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology (4th Ed.).
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2016.
4. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.). Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, 2014.
GTX410/4–Imaging Techniques II
This course will be conducted with collaboration with Department Radiology under
supervision of clinical instructors. This course provides an integrated practical and
theoretical training regarding imaging techniques involving CT scan, MRI, DSA and
radiotherapy imaging. Students will be trained clinically concerning on imaging procedure,
patient management and radiation protection aspects. Teaching and learning activities will be delivered therough practical and group discussions. Students will be assessed through
practical assessments, assignments, presentation and log book.
List of text/reference books:
1. Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive
Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006.
2. Bontrager, K.L. & Lampignano, J.P., Radiographic Positioning and Related
Anatomy (8th Ed.). Elsevier Mosby, 2014.
3. Ballinger, P.W. and Frank, E.D., Merrill’s Atlas of Radiographic Positions and
Radiological Procedures (10th Ed.). Elsevier Mosby, 2003.
GTX411/4–Radiotherapy Techniques
This course is designed as a clinical course so that the students will be able to learn the
practical application of the fundamental knowledge from the theoretical course. Students will participate and develop their skill in the clinical radiotherapy environment which
includes procedure in treatment simulation, treatment planning, dose calculation and
treatment technique. Students are trained to be competence in using radiotherapy
equipment and also anticipating as a team member in all aspects of the patient’s
management. Students will be assessed based on continuous practical evaluation, student
technical competence recorded in the log book and practical examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Washington, C.M. & Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy
(4th Ed.). Mosby, 2015.
2. Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.). William and Wilkins,
2014.
208
3. Symonds, P., Deehan, C. & Meredith C., Walter and Miller's Textbook of
Radiotherapy : Radiation Physics, Therapy and Oncology (7th Ed.). Churchill
Livingstone, 2012.
4. Khan, F.M.and et al., Khan’s Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology (4th Ed.).
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2016.
GTX412/3-Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques
This course give students chances to go through training to handle nuclear medicine
imaging procedures such as 2-dimensional imaging and SPECT (single photon emission
computed tomography) in clinical environment. Students also will be trained in nuclear
medicine regarding the best practice of imaging including preparation of
radiopharmaceuticals and quality assurance in nuclear medicine. Students will be trained
to work in a team at nuclear medicine unit and display good responsibilities and ethical
values throughout their training. The course will be conducted via training at nuclear
medicine unit HUSM for the duration of 14 weeks. The students will be assessed through
continuous assessment, log books, clinical test (OSPE) and presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Shackett, P., Nuclear Medicine Technology: Procedures and Quick Reference (2nd Ed.). Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2009.
2. Prekeges, J., Nuclear Medicine Instrumentation (2nd Ed.). Jones & Bartlett
Learning, 2013.
3. Christian, P.E. & Waterstram-Rich, K.M., Nuclear Medicine and PET/CT:
Technology and Techniques (7th Ed.). Mosby, 2011.
4. Pryma, D.A., Nuclear Medicine: Practical Physics, Artifacts, and Pitfalls (1st
Ed.). Oxford University Press, 2014.
GTX414/3-Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I
This course provides students with theoretical and practical knowledge in the QA of
equipments for diagnostic imaging like general radiography, fluoroscopy radiography and
mammography imaging. Students will carry out QA tests based on recent standards and
protocols to ensure that proper functioning of diagnostic equipment for a sustainable
patient service. Students will be trained good leadership when doing practical in a group.
This course will be conducted via lecture, practicum dan SCL. The students will be
assessed through practical reports, test, quiz and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Stevens, A.T., Quality Management for Radiographic Imaging: A Guide for Technologists. McGraw-Hill, 2001.
2. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. &Boone, J., Essential Physics of
Medical Imaging, (3rd Ed.), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
209
3. Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and
A Science (5th Ed.), Thomson Delmar Learning, 2013.
4. Abdul Aziz S.A., Handbook of Quality Control in Radiography (1st Ed.). School
of Health Sciences, USM, 2012.
GTX415/8–Research Project
This course gives chances to students to perform research in health by choosing one
particular topic whether in radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy or radiation
protection as the initial exposure to life-long research. At the same time, students can learn
to write their research findings scientifically as a dissertation that need to be submitted by
the end of semester 2 of Year 4. In this course, students will be trained to manage their
projects and plan the preparation of their dissertations. The students will be assessed
through presentation and dissertation.
List of text/reference books:
Journals and other references based on areas of research being chosen.
GTX416/4–Professional Training
This course gives students chances to see the applications of radiation in a working
environment clearly includes diagnostic and therapeutic procedures, research and radiation
protection in health and medicine. Students are able to see installation and commissioning
of radiation equipments in hospitals or medical centers by suppliers. Students will be
trained to present case study verbally and to manage case taking and report writing
systematically. The students will go through 3 months training at government/private
hospitals atau private companies. The students will be assessed through log book, report
and presentation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. & Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine (4th
Ed.). Elsevier, 2012.
2. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. and Boone, J.M., Essential Physics
of Medical Imaging (3rd Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.
3. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation
Therapy, (4th Ed.). Mosby, 2015.
211
GTJ108/2-Health Communication and Education
This course exposes students to various topics on basic knowledge of health promotion.
Students will be introduced to the concepts and resources particularly concern the role of
health promoter in health promotion, education and communication in the context of
national health care system. Knowledge delivery of health promotion will be further
extended to the strategy identification, designing, planning, management, research,
material development and testing, monitoring and evaluation of the related health
promotion programs introduce nationwide.
List of text/reference books:
1. Carole Lium Elizabeth C. Kudzma Edelman & Carol Lynn Mandle, Health
Promotion Throughout the Life Span, 8th Ed., Elsevier, 2014.
2. Claudia Parvanta, David E. Nelson, Sarah A. Parvanta & Richard N.
Harne, Essentials Of Public Health Communication, Jones & Bartlett Learning,
2010.
3. Karen Glanz & Barbara K. Rimer, Health Behavior: Theory, Research, and
Practice, 5th Ed., Josse-Bass A Wiley Brand, 2015.
4. Butler, J Thomas, Principles of Health Education and Health Promotion (5th Ed).
Wadsworth, 2013.
GEG103/3-Fitness and Health
This course provides knowledge on theory, principle and method in fitness activities for
health and fitness. Students will learn various methods in evaluating individual’s fitness
level related to their health. Other components such as nutrition, body composition and
mental health are also emphasised.
List of text/reference books:
1. Shakey, B.O., Brian, J., Fitness and Health (5th Ed). Champaign: Human Kinetics,
2002.
2. Edward T.H., Franks, B.D., Health and Fitness Instructor’s Handbook (4th Ed).
Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003.
3. Jackson, A.W. Physical Activity for Health and Fitness. Champaign: Human
Kinetics, 2004.
4. ACMS’s Health Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual (3rd Ed).
Philadelphia: Walters Kluwer Health/Lippincot Willims & Wilkings Health.
2010.
212
GEG109/2-History of Health Sciences
This course exposes the students to the history and development of science and medicine.
It covers historical aspects of Greek philosophy, modern medicine and history of medicine
from the earlier years to the present day. Aspects of social sciences, religion, philosophy
of physical sciences, behavioral sciences, biological sciences and medicine outside of
Europe including the impact of Islam in the field of medicine and health will also be
explored. The course will be taught through lectures and tutorial. Students will be assessed
through tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Spector, R.E., Cultural Diversity in Health and Illness, New Jersey: Prentice Hall,
2010.
2. Weiss, G.L. & Lonnquist, L.E., The Sociology Of Health, Healing And Illness,
New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2009.
3. Osman Bakar, Tawhid and Science, Shah Alam: Arah Publication, 2008.
4. R.R Subramanyam, Shobhit Mahajan, Archana Madhukar, Suman Sahay & G.S.
Roonwal, The Story of Science From Antiquity To The Present, Potsdam:
h.f.Ullmann, 2010.
GEG114/2-Oral Health
This module provides essential information regarding the teeth and relevant structures of
the oral cavity. It covers the etiology and pathogenesis of common oral diseases such as
caries and periodontal disease. Preventive strategies and oral hygiene methods are
elaborated. Pertinent issues like diet and fluoride in the prevention of oral diseases are
highlighted. The importance of oral health in relation to systemic health is described and
oral health services and promotion in Malaysia will be discussed. The students will be
assessed through their assignments and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Felton, et.al: Basic Guide to Oral Health Education and Promotion, (2nd Ed.),
John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2014
2. Murray, JJ. Prevention of Oral Diseases. (4th Ed.), Oxford University Press,
2003
3. Palmer, CA. Diet & Nutrition in Oral Health. Pearson/Prentice-Hall, 2003
4. Wilkins, EM. Clinical Practice of the Dental Hygienist (9th Ed). Philadelphia:
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.
213
GEG201/2-Women’s Health
This course introduces the new definition and paradigm of women’s health. Students will
be exposed to a more holistic approach to women’s health not limited to maternal and child
are. Several factors that influence the status of women’s health such as economic, politics,
religion and social cultural practices will be examined. This course will encourage students
to participate actively during the lecture and tutorial. The students will be assessed through
their assignments, presentations and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Anandale, Ellen, Women's Health and Social Change, London: Routledge, 2009.
2. The Reader's Digest Association, Women's Health Encyclopedia: An Integrated
Approach to Wellness for Every Season of a Women's Life. New York, 2010.
3. Goldman, M,B, Troisi, R, Rextrode, KM, Women’s Health (2nd Ed.),
Amsterdam, Academic Press, Elsevier.
4. Rosser, Sue V., Diversity and Women's Health. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins
University Press, 2009.
GEG204/3-Gender Perspectives in Health
This course introduces students to a framework of analysis to understand the reason for
gender to be an important determinant factor in health. Students will examine the
interaction between gender and other factors in determining health standard, risks and
illness among men and women. The course will also discuss the importance of gender
perspective in forming health policy as well as in the development of health education.
This course will encourage students to participate actively during the lecture and tutorial.
The students will be assessed through their assignments, presentations and final
examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Bendelow, Gillian, (Ed.), Gender Health and Healing: The Public and Private
Divide. London: Rutledge 2002.
2. Schultz, Amy J & Leith Mullings (Eds), Gender, Race, Class and Health;
Intersectional Approaches. San Francisco: Josey Bass, 2006.
3. Chloe, E.Bird, Patricia P. Rieker, (Eds), Gender and Health: the Effects of
Constrained Choices and Social Policies. Cambridge: Cambridge University
press, 2008.
4. Women Health Organization Western Pacific Region; Integrating Poverty and
Gender into Health Programmes, A Source Book for Healthcare Professionals.
Manila Philippines, 2008.
214
GEG208/2-Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations
This course covers theory and application of Human Resource Management (HRM)
knowledge in the context of healthcare organizations. Students will be exposed to HRM’s
strategic role and function in managing healthcare professionals. Areas of HRM for this
course include staffing in healthcare services, work design, staff evaluations, reward and
recognition of healthcare professionals, staff development, ensuring patient focused
service delivery and trends affecting the management of health workers. At the end of this
course, students are expected to be capable in applying HRM knowledge to improve patient
care and solve issues involving healthcare professionals. Students will be ssessed through
continuous assessment and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Fried B. J. & Fottler M.D. (Editors) Human Resources in Healthcare: Managing
For Success (3rd Ed.). Health Administration Press. Chicago, the United States of
America, 2008.
2. Harris M.G. (Editor) Managing Health Services, Concepts and Practices (2nd
Ed.). Elsevier Australia., 2006
3. Shortell S.M. & Kaluzny A. D. (Editors) Health Care Management, Organization
Design and Behavior (4th Ed.). Delmar, Thomson Learning, the United States of America, 2000.
4. Walshe K & Smith J (Editors) Healthcare Management (2nd Ed.). Open
University Press, McGraw-Hill Education, England, 2011.
GEG213/3-Stress Management
This course exposes students to a holistic approach to stress management. It treats both
cognitive (coping) skills and relaxation techniques with the intention of preventing and/or
alleviating the physical symptoms of stress.
List of text/reference books:
1. Blonna, R., Coping with Stress in a Changing World (4th Ed). N.Y.: McGraw-
Hill, 2007.
2. Greenburg, J.S., Comprehensive Stress Management (13th Ed). N.Y.: McGraw-
Hill, 2012.
3. Davis, M., Eshelman, E. R. & McKay, M. The Relaxation and Stress Reduction
Workbook, New Harbinger Publications. (6th Ed), 2008
4. Peterson, C. Work Stress. Taylor & Francis, London, 2017.
5. Wingo, M. The Impact of the Human Stress Response: The Biologic Origins of
Human Stress, Roxwell Waterhouse, Texas. 2016.
215
GEG216/3- Development of Health Services in Malaysia
This course introduces students to the factors that influence the development of health
services in Malaysia in the pre-and post-independence period to date. It will provide an
understanding of the different contexts and its impact in shaping health thought, practices
and development of health services in urban and rural areas. It will also emphasise on
matters pertaining to health policy, disease control, the effect of specialization in medicine
and public health, international intervention and the development of health services in post-
colonial era to the present. The course will be taught via lecture and tutorial. Students will
be assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Manderson, Lenore, Sickness and the State: Health and Illness in Colonial
Malaya, 1870-1940. Cambridge, New York and Melbourne: Cambridge
University Press, 2002.
2. Muzaffar Desmond Tate Abdullah (completed by Khoo Kay Kim and Selvamany
Gabriel), The History of Medicine in Malaysia: The Foundation Years. Kuala
Lumpur: Academy of Medicine in Malaysia, 2005.
3. Sirajoon Noor Ghani & Hematram Yadav, Health Care in Malaysia. Kuala
Lumpur: University of Malaya Press, 2008. 4. Chee, Heng Leng, ‘Health Status and the Development of Health Services in a
Colonial State: The Case of British Malaya, International Journal of Health
Services 12, No. 3 (1982): 397-417.
GEG218/3-Community Development in Health Promotion
This course introduces students to the concept of community development as an approach
to improve the health status of individuals and communities within the context of health
promotion. It covers the fundamental elements of community development such as the
needs assessment, capacity building, community empowerment and program evaluation.
Health promotion and development in youth, elderly and marginalized groups as well as
issues related to community development in health promotion will also be highlighted. The
course will be taught through lectures, tutorial and community visits. Students will be
assessed through tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Macdowall, W., Bonell, C., & Davies, M. Health Promotion Practice. England:
Open University Press, 2006.
2. Hubley, J., & Copeman, J., Practical Health Promotion. Malden, USA: Polity
Press. 2008. 3. Laverack, G. Health Promotion Practice: Building Empowered Communities,
England: Open University Press, 2007.
4. Doyle E., Susan, W., & Jody, Oomen-Early. Process of Community Health
Education and Promotion (2nd Ed.). USA: Mayfield Publishing Company, 2009 .
216
GEG219/2 Health Care Management
This course explains the scope of management implications for health professionals and
healthcare organisations. Students will learn to analyse the interactions of health
professionals and examine the influence of management on professionals in healthcare
organisations. Throughout the course, management concepts will be applied to solve
problems involving health professionals and issues affecting healthcare organisations.
Teaching and learning consist of lectures, tutorials and e-learning. Students will be
assessed through tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Burns L.R., Bradley E.H. & Weiner B.J., Shortell and Kaluzny’s Healthcare
Management: Organization Design and Behavior, (6th. Ed.), Delmar, Cengage
Learning, 2011
2. Braithwaite J., Hyde P. & Pope C. (Eds), Culture and Climate in Health Care
Organizations, Palgrave Macmillan, 2006
3. Harris M.G. & Associates (Eds), Managing Health Services, Concepts and
Practice, (2nd Ed.), Mosby, Elsevier, 2006
4. Walshe K. & Smith J. (Eds), Healthcare Management, (2nd. Ed.), Open University
Press, McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
GEG220/2- Occupational Therapy for People with Disability
This course introduces the students to occupational therapy profession in terms of its
philosophy, history, ethical and its models, in theory and practice. This course will also
introduce the students on people with disability as well as the process of occupational
therapy assessment and intervention for clients with physical and mental disabilities. The
International Classification of Disability, Health and Functioning (ICF) will also be
introduced.
List of text/referencen books :
1. Willard H.S., Sparkman C.S., Crepeau E.B., Cohn E.S. & Schell B.A.B., Willard
& Spackman’s Occupational Therapy (11th Ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
a Wolters Kluwer business: Philadelphia. 2009.
2. Radomski M.V., Trombly, C.A., Occupational Therapy for Physical Dysfuntion
(6th Ed.). Wolters Kluwer, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008.
3. Case-Smith, J., O’Brien, J.C., Occupational Therapy for Children (6th Ed.).
Mosby Elsevier: Maryland Heights, Missouri, 2010.
4. Kielhofner G., Conceptual Foundation of Occupational Therapy Practice (4th.
Ed.). F.A. Davis Company : Philadelphia, 2009.
217
GTS202/2-First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
This course introduces the students to first-aid techniques and cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR) methods used in various situations with the emphasis on sports related
incidences.
List of text/reference books:
1. Flegel, M., Sport First Aids, (5th Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2014
2. Austin, M., Crawford, R. & Amstrong, V.J., First Aid Manual: The Authorised
Manual of St. John Ambulance, St. Andrew’s First Aid and The British Red Cross
(10th Ed.). London: Dorling Kindersley, 2014
3. National Safety Council, Standard First Aid, CPR, and AED (2nd Rev Ed.).
McGraw-Hill Companies, 2007
4. National Safety Council, Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED (2nd Ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill Education, 2008.
GTS207/2-Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports
This course introduces the students to basic skills and game play for some sports including
badminton, soccer, volleyball and archery, by relating with the principles in kinesiology, physiology, biomechanic and socio-psychology. This course will also emphasise on skills
acquisition, performance, competition and analysis of the games.
List of text/reference books:
1. Haywood K.M. & Lewis C.F., Archery: Steps to Success (4th Ed.). Champaign IL:
Human Kinetic, 2014.
2. Lennox, J.W., Soccer Skills and Drills. Champaign IL: Human Kinetics, 2006.
3. Grice T., Badminton: Steps to Success (2nd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics,
2008.
4. Zartman, S., Youth Volleyball: The Guide for Coaches, Parents, and Athletes.
Betterway Books, 2006.
GEG302/3-Violence and Society
The first part of the course examines the concept and theory of violence in a society, the
second part will be an interactive discussion on the interpersonal violence such as violence
in family, towards children and elderly. Students will also be exposed to theory and
intervention to overcome violence. Lecture and tutorial will be the main instruments in
delivering the course, however students will be encouraged to be creative in their
discussion and during the assesments. Students will be assessed through continous assessement, assigments and final examination.
218
List of text/reference books:
1. Holmes, S.T. & Holmes R.M, Violence, A Contemporary Reader. New Jersey:
Pearson, 2004.
2. Itzin, Catherine (Ed.) Home truths About Child Sexual Abuse. London: Rutledge,
2000.
3. Ray, Larry, Violence and Society. London: Sage Publication, 2011.
4. Silberman, Mathew, Violence and Society A Reader. Upper Saddle River: Prentice
Hall, 2003.
GEG304/2-Communication and Self Development
This course exposes students to various topics on basic knowledge of communication skills
in order to develop their self image and generate self development. The course will also
emphasis on public speaking, handling of interview, presentation of working paper as well
as developing self confidence and assertiveness.
List of text/reference books:
1. Nelson, Paul, Titsworth, Scott, Pearson, Judy, iSpeak: Public Speaking for
Contemporary Life, International Edition, Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2011. 2. Charles J. Stewards, William B. Cash. Jr, Interviewing: Principles and Practices,
(Kindle th Ed.). Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2013.
3. Charles S. Carver, Michael F. Scheier, Perspectives on Personality (7th Ed.).
Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
4. DeVito, Joseph A, The Interpersonal Communication Book (14th Ed.). Pearson
Education Inc., 2015.
GEG305/2-Forensic Science
The course introduces to the students the fundamental concept of Forensic Sciences. It
provides information on crime scene, collection and preservation of evidence and various
types of impression evidence such as finger prints, foot prints, tool marks, and tyre prints
used in identification of individuals and objects. A brief account on trace evidence
materials like dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included. Introductory topics on DNA
evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned documents also form part of
the syllabus. The students will also be taught with photographic techniques, digital cameras
in criminal investigation.
List of text/reference books:
1. M. M. Houck and J. A. Siegel, Fundamentals of Forensic Sciences. Elsevier Academic Press, 2006.
2. R. Saferstein, Criminalistics: An introduction to Forensic Sciences (8th Ed).
Prentice-Hall, 2004.
219
3. S. H. James and J. J. Nordby, Forensic Sciences: An Introduction to Scientific and
Investigative Techniques. CRC Press, 2003.
4. P. R. De Forest, R. E. Gaensslen and H. C. Lee, Forensic Sciences; An
Introduction to Criminalistics. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1983.
GTS307/3- Physical Activity, Growth and Development
This course exposes the students to issues related to physical growth and development with
regards to physical activity. Discussion on the maturation process, morphological and
functional changes in relation to exercise and training will be conducted.
List of text/reference books:
1. Thies, K.M. & Travers, J.F., Growth and Development through the Lifespan (2nd
Ed.). Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2009.
2. Malina, R.M., Bar-Or, O. & Bouchard, C., Growth, Maturation and Physical
Activity (2nd Ed.). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001.
3. Jurimae, T. & Hills, A.P., Body Composition Assessment in Children and Adolescents. Karger, 2001.
GEG309/2-Principles of Forensic Dentistry
This course details the application of dental science knowledge for forensic work such as
human identification and bitemark investigation. Students will be exposed to the theory
and some practices in forensic dental work such as bitemark analyses and identification
process using dental records. Students will also be introduced to disaster victim
identification and record management.
List of text/reference books:
1. Senn DR, Weems RA. Manual of Forensic Odontology. (5th Ed.) Boca Raton:
CRC Press 2013
2. Senn DR, Stimson PG. Forensic Dentistry. (2nd Ed.) Boca Raton: CRC Press
2010.
3. Dorion BJ. Bitemark evidence: A colour atlas and text. (2nd Ed.) Boca Raton:
CRC Press 2011.
GEG313/2-Health Economics
The course covers both microeconomic and utilization of healthcare services as well as its
association with issues within the health organization and its deliverable to the community.
Economic evaluation as a basis of healthcare policy making will be discussed focusing on
both individual and community and supply and demand in health care services.
220
List of text/reference books:
1. Syed Aljunid et al. Ekonomi Kesihatan. Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka Publication
2013.
2. Clewar, A & Perkins, D. Economics for Health Care Management. New York:
Prentice Hall, 1998.
3. Drummond, M.F. Method for the Economy Evaluation of Health Care
Programmes (2nd Ed.). Oxford: Oxford Medical Publication. 1997.
GEG315/3-Fiqh of Health
This course introduces students to the Islamic solution to some issues related to health
sciences. The understanding of the basic formulation of Islamic law will be discussed in
relation to issues raised in the course. The discussion of the issues will be divided into three
categories that are most critical, critical and daily issues. The course will be taught through
lectures and tutorial. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, presentation and
final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ahmad, Yusuf Al-Hajj. The Islamic Guideline on Medicine, Darussalam, Riyadh: KSA. 2010.
2. Harmy Mohd Yusoff. Fikah Perubatan. Selangor, Batu Caves: PTS Millennia,
2011.
3. Al-Ashqar, Muhammad Sulaiman, Ijtihad Di Dalam Fiqh Perubatan, Kuala
Lumpur: Pustakan Syuhada, 2004.
4. Fazlur Rahman, Kesihatan dan Perubatan Dalam Tradisi Islam. Kuala Lumpur:
Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, 1992.
5. Mckenzie, J.F, Pinger R.B, Kotecki. An Introduction to Community Health (6th
Ed). Canada: Jones and Bartlett, 2008.
GTS407/3-Therapeutic Exercises
This course introduces students to the causes, prevalence and incidence of diseases in the
human population and the effects of physical activity on them. This course also covers the
application of specific exercises for prevention and treatment of chronic diseases. This
course will be taught via lectures, practical and discussion. Student will be assessed through
tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.
List of text/reference books:
1. Durstine J.L., ACSM’s Exercise Management for Persons with Chronic Diseases
and Disabilities (3rd Ed.), Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2009.
2. Myers J. and Nieman D.C., ACSM’s Resouces for Clinical Exercise Physiology:
Musculoskeleral, Neuromuscular, Neoplastic, Immunologic and Hematologic
Conditions (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia, PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/ Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins Health, 2010.
221
3. Roitman J.L. and LaFontaine T., The Exercise Professional’s Guide to Optimizing
Health: Strategies for Preventing and Reducing Chronic Disease. Philadelphia,
PA: Wolters Kluwer Health/ Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Health, 2012.
LAA100/2–Arabic Language I
This course introduces Arabic letters to the students, pronounce and write it correctly. The
students practice to communicate about themselves, family and friends by using the
language properly and using the vocabulary accurately with the application in basic
grammar in communication. The students will also learn to make simple sentences by using
the elementary in vocabulary in a good manner and in a positive way which is included in
the course.
List of text/reference books:
1. Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
2. Kershul, K.K, Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004.
3. Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A.. Al-Arabiah Baina
Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004.
4. Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar. Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah,
Kaherah, 2001. 5. Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu. Seri Kota Publications, 2001.
6. Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha
(1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia.
LAJ100/2–Japanese Language I
This course enambles students to apply the basic grammar in writing and speaking,
recognize the hiragana’s letter, pronounce it nicely and write it correctly, interact in daily
conversation based on certain situation and discuss about 3 elements on culture, lifestyle
and matter which are related with Japan.
List of text/reference books:
1. Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening
Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004.
2. Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004.
3. Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now You’re Talking. Japan:3A Corporation,
2003.
LAA200/2–Arabic Language II
This course is a continuation of Arabic Language I. The brief description about the basic
script of Arabic are given as a revision. In this course, students were taught the appropriate
skill of communication. The students will learn the nouns, verbs, and conjuctions in Arabic.
222
List of text/reference books:
1. Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007.
2. Kershul, K.K.. Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004.
3. Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A., Al-Arabiah Baina
Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004.
4. Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar. Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah,
Kaherah, 2001.
5. Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu, Seri Kota Publications, 2001.
6. Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha
(1410H). Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia
LAJ200/2–Japanese Language II
This is a continuation of Japanes Language I. In this course, the students will apply the
verbs broadly especially in using the conjunction, use more in basic sentence for speaking
exercise, read and write in katakana’s letter and apply the basic sentences in daily
conversation.
List of text/reference books:
1. Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening
Comprehension Tasks). Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004
2. Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune. Japan: ASK, 2004.
3. Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now You’re Talking. Japan : 3A Corporation
2003.
223
8.0 FACILITIES
The buildings of School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres, tutorial
and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia equipments.
IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the Multi-Media Laboratories of the
School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11.30 pm.
All laboratory requirements are provided, complete with instruments and equipments
within a new modern building.
Library, hostels and the sports complex with their respective ancillary facilities are
provided for students at the USM Health Campus.
224
9.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
9.1 CAREER GUIDANCE
9.1.1 Biomedicine
Career prospects for the Biomedicine programme include:
1. Science/research officers at research institutes, institutions of
higher learning, hospitals, public and private medical
laboratories.
2. Production and administrative officers in related industries
including Quality Control officers, sales personnel and advisors
in the pharmaceutical, food and beverage industries, suppliers
of medical products and instrumentations and as environmental
officers.
3. Tutors/Lecturers at institutions of higher learning in both
private and public sectors. Graduates can also register as
graduate students, or join the academic staff training scheme at
any of the institutions for higher learning.
The examples given above are not restrictive and graduates can also
involve themselves in many areas of scientific or commercial ventures
that is available now or in development particularly in the biotechnology
field.
9.1.2 Dietetics
Career opportunities for graduates of the Dietetic programme are ample in Malaysia and as well as in other countries. These include:
1. Clinical dietitians, catering dietitians, sport dietitians in
government hospitals, health clinics, private hospitals, wellness
centre and institutions.
2. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning
and research.
3. Tutors at public and private institutions of higher learning.
Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the
academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher
learning.
225
9.1.3 Nursing
Career opportunities in nursing are wide in Malaysia and overseas; these
include:
1. Clinical nurses and nurse administrators at government and
private hospitals including community health centres.
2. Clinical nurses, nurse administrators or counsellors at special
institutions or organizations such as Hospice, Nursing homes,
Rehabilitation centres and various manufacturing industries.
3. Nurse educators at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as postgraduate students
and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions
of higher learning.
4. Officers or administrators in research institutions, hospital,
pharmaceutical, diagnostic laboratories and other health related
industries of both public and private sectors.
9.1.4 Forensic Science
Career prospects for the Forensic Science graduates include:
1. Officers at the forensic services of the Royal Malaysia Police,
Department of Chemistry, Fire and Rescue Department,
government hospitals and forensic private agencies.
2. Science or research officers at research institutes or institutions
of higher learning, private and public hospitals and diagnostic
laboratories.
3. Production, administrative or sales personnels of industries
such as pharmaceuticals, food and beverages, reagent suppliers
and biomedical instrument suppliers as well as environmental
officers.
4. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of
higher learning.
It must be emphasised that the examples of jobs given are not limited to
those mentioned. The curriculam which are offered by the School are
flexible enough to provide graduates with skills and abilities which will
enable them to prospects jobs in a wider domain including private
investigation, insurance investigation and other forensic related areas.
226
Opportunities are wide for high achieving students to pursue post-
graduate courses and become teaching staffs of the future at institutions
of higher learning.
9.1.5 Medical Radiation
Career prospects for graduates of the Medical Radiation programme are
wide in Malaysia and overseas. These include:
1. Radiation protection officers at government and private
hospitals, research institutions and public and private health
organisations.
2. Personnel involved in commercial activities within the
production industries related to the field and also in the health
care industries.
3. Science or research officers at institutions of higher education.
4. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
education. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of
higher education.
9.1.6 Audiology
The graduates from the Audiology programme may provide services or
work at various settings:
1. As audiologists at medical settings (e.g. government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centres); educational settings (e.g.
special education schools, early intervention centers); or private
practice offices.
2. As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private
institutes of higher learning.
3. As researchers at the institutes of higher learning, research
laboratories or centres.
227
9.1.7 Speech Pathology
Qualified professionals in Speech Pathology are known as Speech-Language Pathologist or Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) in
the government sector
1. Job opportunities in this profession are immense, including:
- Health sectors (government hospital, private hospital or
private practice)
- Education sectors (special school or normal school)
- Non-government sectors (intervention center or
rehabilitation center)
- Community and welfare sectors (community based
rehabilitation center)
2. Additionally, they can also:
- become academic staff at the university as clinical
supervisors or lecturers (after completing postgraduate
degrees at masters/doctor of philosophy levels)
- conduct research and development as researchers
- manage related institutions as the managing officers.
9.1.8 Exercise and Sports Science
The graduates from the Exercise and Sports Science programme may
provide services or work at various settings:
1. As science/research/sports officers in medical institutions (e.g. government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centers, Youth
and Sports Departments); educational settings (e.g. special
education schools, sport schools, early intervention centers,
universities); sports institutions and associations (National
Sports Institute, BAM, FAM) or private practising
organisations.
2. As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private
institutes of higher learning.
3. As coaches, sports science consultants, sports administrators
and managers, health coordinators, health club managers in
both government and private sectors.
228
9.1.9 Nutrition
Career opportunities for graduate of the Nutrition programme are ample
in Malaysia as well as in other countries. These include:
1. Nutritionists, nutrition product advisor, sports nutritionist in the
government sector and private industries, wellness centres and
institutions.
2. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning
and research institutes.
3. Tutors at public and private institutions of higher learning.
Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the
academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher
learning.
9.1.10 Environmental and Occupational Health
Career opportunities for graduates of the Environmental and
Occupational Health programme are broad to include public and private
sectors, industries and agencies either in Malaysia or abroad. These
include:
1. Safety and health officers, environmental health officers,
environmental control officers, factory and machinery
inspectors and safety supervisors.
2. EMS engineers, EHS executives, health promotion officers and
operation officers.
3. Training officers, auditors and marketing executives.
4. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning
and research.
5. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher
learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and
possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution.
229
9.2 PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST
The School is continually soliciting funds for the setting up of gold medal awards
to be awarded to the best final year students in all programmes as well as funds
for other prizes and awards.
Students obtaining a CGP of 3.67 and above in any semester will receive a Dean's
List Certificate.
9.3 SOCIETY
Students of the School of Health Sciences automatically become the members of
the Health Science Society of the University.
9.4 POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMMES
The School of Health Sciences offers Masters (M.Sc.) and Doctrate (Ph.D.)
courses via coursework (MSc in Sport Science) and mixed-mode (MSc in Biomedicine and Forensic Science), as well as research mode in many disciplines
such as Biomedicine (e.g. Diagnostics, neurocognitive science, natural health
products, vacinnology, cancer biology, immune regulations, gene regulations and
protein-protein interaction), Forensic Science (e.g. DNA fingerprinting, Forensic
Chemistry, Environmental Forensics and Forensic Toxicology), Dietetics and
Nutrition (e.g. community nutrition, clinical nutrition and human nutrition) and
many others. Candidates shall have graduated with a Bachelors degree from
recognised universities and obtained a CGPA of at least 3.00 for the Masters
programme and 3.67 or graduate with a Masters for the Ph.D. programme.
However students with a CGPA of less than 3.00 may be considered if they
possess appropriate and relevant working experience or experience in research.
Interested candidates can contact the Deputy Dean (Research) Post Graduate
Studies or the USM Post Graduate Institute for further information.
9.5 OVERSEAS TRAINING SCHEME
Universiti Sains Malaysia offers limited and highly competitive overseas training
schemes to students of levels 100 and 200 who are interested to pursue courses of
one semester duration at any foreign university. This scheme is devised with the
purpose of exposing students to experience studying at the international level with the possibility of credit transfers. Further details of this scheme can be obtained
from the office of International Relations, Division of Academic and International
Affairs, USM.
231
TEACHING STAFF OF DIPLOMA NURSING PROGRAMME
DIPLOMA NURSING
NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL
1. Ms. Anisah Mat Desa Tutor 7744 [email protected]
2. Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir Tutor 7733 [email protected]
3. Ms. Fazdillah Husin Tutor 7743 [email protected]
4. Ms. Hasni Embong Tutor 7741 [email protected]
5. Ms. Low Kim Lian Tutor 7747 [email protected]
6. Ms. Mas Nor Saloni
Ibrahim
Tutor 7732 [email protected]
7. Ms. Nik Asiah Nik Lah Tutor 7735 [email protected]
8. Ms. Noor Jasmani Hassan Tutor 7746 [email protected]
9. Ms. Nor Rahan Mohamad Tutor 7780 [email protected]
10. Ms. Norizam Muhammad
Yusof
Tutor 7734 [email protected]
11. Ms. Norliza Hussin Tutor 7745 [email protected]
12. Ms. Nurhayati Mohamad
Nor
Tutor 7742 [email protected]
13. Ms. Salwismawati Badrin Tutor 7813 [email protected]
14. Ms.Tuan Ruasmani Tuan
Daud
Tutor 7750 [email protected]
15. Ms. Zahniyah Che Ishak Tutor 7736 [email protected]
16. Ms. Zaihan Abd. Rahman Tutor 7749 [email protected]
17. Ms. Zuraida Yusoff Tutor 7748 [email protected]
18. Ms. Chu Be Lai Clinical Instructor 7775 [email protected]
19. Ms. Halizan Yusoff Clinical Instructor 7775 [email protected]
20. Ms. Masturah Hamzah Clinical Instructor 7775 [email protected]
21. Ms. Norizan Che Mohd
Yusoff
Clinical Instructor 7775 [email protected]
22. Ms. Zaharah Muhammad Clinical Instructor 7775 [email protected]
232
INTRODUCTION
The Diploma in Nursing Programme is one of the programmes offered by the School of
Health Sciences since the 2007/2008 session in response to the rapid development in
medical technology and increasing number of government and private hospitals, where
the demand for nurses has escalated to a critical level. The shortage of nurses may affect
the quality of health services.
The structuring of Diploma in Nursing Programme is based on the criteria set by the
Malaysian Nursing Board (MNA) that a nursing programme must have sufficient nursing
skills training components to enable the students to register with the MNA. This also
comply with the university objective in producing nursing graduates who possess
excellent academic knowledge and have good clinical skills to achieve the nation’s
aspiration in producing a healthy society.
This programme covers six (6) semesters in three (3) years. The programme encompasses
the following aspects:-
(a) Biological Science
(b) Behavioural Science
(c) Nursing Science
(d) Technical Skills
(e) Co-Curriculum
All these aspects are incorporated in the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic
knowledge in nursing practice as well as scientific knowledge that is essential to produce
nurses who are competent, of calibre, innovative, proactive, critical in thinking and
independent. This will assist in enhancing professionalism and the image of nursing for
the benefit of clients, society and the country.
AIM OF THE PROGRAMME
To produce trained nurses who are caring, practice safe nursing, competent and able to
critically analyse and solve problem at any health institution and in any situation.
OBJECTIVES OF THE PROGRAMME
To fulfill the demand of nurses by hospitals and clinics in the future.
To produce trained nurses who are able to deliver efficient services to individual
and community.
To provide basic nursing education which enables the students to proceed to higher
level.
233
LEARNING OUTCOME
At the completion of the three (3) years programme, graduates will be able to:
PO1: Apply nursing theory and practice comprehensively in nursing care.
PO2: Demonstrate technical skills in analysis and problem solving related to nursing
diagnosis.
PO3: Apply critical thinking skills in assessment of patient for effective nursing care
and interventions.
PO4: Apply effective communication skills in the assessment and problem solving in
nursing care and practices.
PO5: Organise and execute nursing tasks as a team of healthcare professionals in
caring for patients.
PO6: Display ethics and professional values in nursing practice.
PO7: Utilise nursing knowledge and manipulate resources for effective nursing care
and interventions.
PO8: Explore and identify opportunities of entrepreneurship to enhance social
functions and responsibilities.
PO9: Exhibit values of leadership as a group in nursing practice.
234
COURSE DURATION
This is a 3-year programme requiring a total of 90 units for graduation. It consists of core
courses (74 units), and university courses (16 units).
ENTRY QUALIFICATION
UNIVERSITY GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Sijil Pelajaran Malaysia (SPM)
Pass SPM or equivalent examination
Pass with credit in Bahasa Melayu or Bahasa Malaysia and Sejarah for SPM or
equivalent examination
SPECIFIC PROGRAMME REQUIREMENT
Pass SPM or equivalent with at least grade C6 / 6C / C in five (5) subjects as follows:
1. Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia
2. Rampaian Sains / Biology
3. Mathematic
4. Bahasa Inggeris
5. One (1) other subject
And pass in interview
ENTRY APPLICATION
Online application at https://pohon.usm.my/jururawat. Processing fee of RM60.00 is to
be paid cash at Bank Simpanan Nasional or ATM machine / SMS Banking / Cash
Deposit Machines / Internet Banking (GIRO account holder only). Completed application
form with a copy of identification card and academic certificates is to be printed and send
to the address below:
DIPLOMA KEJURURAWATAN
BAHAGIAN PENGURUSAN AKADEMIK
JABATAN PENDAFTAR,
BANGUNAN CANSELORI,
UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA, 11800 USM
PULAU PINANG
235
ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
COURSE REGISTRATION
Registration of courses is an important activity during the period of study at the
University. It is the first step for the students to sit for the examination at the end of each
semester. Signing up for the right courses each semester will help to facilitate the
graduation of each student from the first semester till the final semester.
(a) Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor Degree and University’s
Diploma Students
Student Data and Records Section (SDRP)
Academic Management Division Registry
(Level 1, Chancellory Building)
Tel. No. : 04-653 2925/2924/2923
Fax No. : 04-657 4641
E-Mail : [email protected]
Website : http://registry.usm.my/updr
The SDRP office is the Secretariat/Coordinator of course registration for the
Bachelor Degree and Diploma Programme of the University.
Further inquiries regarding course registration activities for the first degree and
diploma can be made at the office of the Student Data and Records Section.
Please refer to the contact number above.
(b) Course Registration Platform
i) E-Daftar (E-Registration)
E-Daftar is a platform for on-line course registration. The registration is
done directly through Campus Online portal
(https://campusonline.usm.my).
Registration under E-Daftar for Semester 1 usually starts 1-2 days after the
release of 'Official' examination result of Semester 2 of the previous
academic year. The system closes a day before Semester 1 begins (in
September). E-Daftar registration for Semester 2 usually starts 1-2 days
after Semester 1 ‘Provisional’ examination result are released until a day
before Semester 2 begins (in February).
The actual timing of registration under E-Daftar will be announced by the
Student Data and Records Section usually during the Revision Week of
every semester and will be displayed on the respective
Shools/Centres/Hostels’ bulletin board and in the USM’s official website.
236
Under E-Daftar, students can register for any courses offered by USM,
except co-curriculum courses. Registration of co-curriculum courses is still
placed under the administration of the Director of the Centre for Co-
Curriculum Programme at the Main Campus or the Coordinator of the Co-
Curriculum Programme at the Engineering Campus and the Coordinator of
the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Health Campus.
Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students’ course registration
account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their pre-registration application
successful.
ii) Access to E-Daftar System
a. E-Daftar System can be accessed through the Campus Online portal
(https://campusonline.usm.my).
b. Students need to use the E-Mail ID password to access their profile
page, which includes the E-Daftar menu.
c. Students need to click on the E-Daftar menu to access and register for
the relevant courses.
d. Students are advised to print the course registration confirmation slip
upon completion of the registration process or after updating the course
registration list (add/drop) within the E-Daftar period.
e. The E-Daftar system can only be accessed for a certain period of time.
f. Guidelines to register/gain access to the E-Daftar portal are available at
the Campus Online portal’s main page.
iii) Online Course Registration (OCR) in Schools/Centres
OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are applicable to
students who are academically active and under Probation (P1/P2) status.
Students who face difficulties registering their courses during the E-Daftar
period can register their courses during the official period of OCR
alternatively. Each school is responsible for scheduling this activity.
The official period for OCR normally starts on the first day of the semester
(without the penalty charge of RM50.00). After this official date, the
registration will be considered late (a penalty of RM50.00 will be imposed
if no reasonable excuse is given.).
During the non-penalty period, OCR will be conducted at each school.
After Week Six, all registration, including adding and dropping courses will
be administered by the Examination and Graduation Section Office
(Academic Management Division, Registry).
237
(c) The Frequency of Course Registration in One Academic Session
i) Normal Study Semester
2 times per year (beginning of Semester 1 & Semester 2)
ii) Long semester break (about one month after the final examination of
Semester 2)
Once per year
(d) General Guidelines Before Students Register for Courses
i) Matters/Information/Documents required to be noted/considered/
referred to by students before course registration:
- Refer to the respective School’s website to get updated information for
courses offered or course registration.
- Decide on courses to be registered according to the semester as
stipulated in the Study Program Guide Book.
- List courses to be registered and number of units (unit value) for each
course.
- Provide Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred).
- Construct Teaching and Learning Timetable for the registered courses
(to avoid overlapping in timetable).
- Read and comprehend the reminders regarding policies/general
requirements for the course registration.
ii) The number of maximum and minimum units that can be registered in every
semester are stated as below:
Academic Status Minimum Unit Maximum Unit
Active 9 21
P1 9 12
P2 9 10
Determination for academic status in a semester is based on the students’
academic performance in the previous semester (Grade Point Average,
GPA):-
GPA 2.00 & above = Active Academic Status
GPA 1.99 & below = Probation Academic Status (P1/P2)
- Students who meet the minimum period of residency (6 semesters for 3
years programme, 7 semesters for 3.5 years programme or 8 semesters for 4
years programme) are allowed to register courses with a total of less then 9
units.
238
The semester in which the student is on leave is not considered for the
residency period.
iii) Type of course codes during registration:-
T = Core courses Grade and number of units obtained
from these courses are considered for
graduation U = University courses
iv) Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor.
- Approval from the Academic Advisor is required for the students under
Probation status before they are allowed to register during the OCR
period. Probation students cannot access E-Daftar for registration.
- Approval from the Academic Advisor is not required for students under
Active Status to register courses through E-Daftar.
v) Students are not allowed to register and to repeat any course for which they
have achieved a grade 'C' and above.
(e) Information/Document Given To All Students through Campus Online
Portal (https://campusonline.usm.my)
i) The information of Academic Advisor.
ii) Academic information such as academic status, GPA value, CGPA value
and year of study.
iii) Cangred and Course Registration Form.
iv) List of courses offered by all Schools/Centres.
v) Teaching and Learning Timetable for all Schools/Centres/Units from the
three campuses.
vi) List of pre-registered courses which have been added into the students’
course registration record (if any).
vii) Reminders about the University course registration policies/general
requisites.
(f) Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses
i) Registration for Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed.
However, if any problem arises, registration for language courses can
still be carried out / updated during the office and Translation.
239
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of language courses is
under the responsibility and administration of the School of Language,
Literacies and Translation.
Any problems related to the registration of language courses can be
referred to the School of Language, Literacies and Translation. The
contact details as follow:
Health Campus Programme Chairperson : 09-7671252
ii) Registration for Co-Curriculum courses through E-Daftar is not allowed.
Registration for Co-Curriculum courses is either done through pre-
registration before the semester begins or during the first/second week
of the semester. Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the
students’ course registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if
their pre-registration application successful.
All approval/registration/dropping/adding of Co-Curricular courses is
under the responsibility and administration of:
Coordinator of the Center for Co-Curricular Programme, Health
Campus (09-7677547).
iii) Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if necessary, must
be made within the first week. After the first week, a fine of RM50.00 will
be imposed.
(g) Course Registration Confirmation Slip
The course registration confirmation slip that has been printed/obtained after
registering the course should be checked carefully to ensure there are no errors,
especially the code type of the registered course. Any data errors for course
registration must be corrected immediately whether during the period of E-Daftar
(for student with active status only) or during the period of OCR at the Schools.
(h) Revising and Updating Data/Information/Students Personal and Academic
Records
Personal and academic information for each student can be checked through the
Campus Online portal (https://campusonline.usm.my).
Students are advised to always check all the information displayed on this
website.
- The office of the Student Data and Records Section must be notified of any
application / notification for correction / updating of personal data such as
the spelling of names (names must be spelled as shown on the Identification
Card), Identification Card number and address (permanent address and
correspondence address).
240
- The office of the Student Data and Records Section must be notified of any
application/ notification for correction of academic data such as information
on major, minor, MUET and the course code result.
- The office of the Examination and Graduation Section must be notified of
any application/notification for correction of the examination / results data.
(i) Academic Advisor
Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each student. Academic
Advisors comprise of academic staff (lecturers) of the School. Normally the
appointment of Academic Advisors will be made known to every student during
the first semester in the first year of their studies.
Academic Advisors will advice the students under their responsibility on
academic-related matters. Important advice for the students includes the
registration planning for certain courses in each semester during the study
period. Before registering the course, students are advised to consult and discuss
with their Academic Advisor to determine the courses to be registered in a
semester.
INTERPRETATION OF UNIT/CREDIT
a. Unit
Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is determined by
the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the students. In general, a unit is
defined as follows:
Type of Course Definition of Unit
Theory 1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per week
for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester.
Practical/Laboratory/
Language Proficiency
1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per
week for 13 - 14 hours in one semester
Industrial Training/ Teaching
Practice
1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training.
Based on the requirements of Malaysian Qualifications Framework (MQF):
One unit is equivalent to 40 hours of student learning time
[1 unit = 40 hours of Student Learning Time (SLT)]
b. Accumulated Credit Unit
Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate, students must
accumulate the total number of credits stipulated for the program concerned.
241
EXAMINATION SYSTEM
Examination are held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit for the examination
of the courses they have registered for. Students are required to settle all due fees and fulfil
the standing requirements for lectures/tutorials/practical and other requirements before
being allowed to sit for the examination of courses they have registered for. Course
evaluation will be based on the two components of coursework and final examinations.
Coursework evaluation includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation in
tutorials.
(a) Type of Examination
i) Cognitive Component
Objective Test (multiple choice)
Essay
Short Essay
Seminar Paper
Case Study
i) Psychomotor Component
OSCE and Practicum
Clinical Skill Log Book
ii) Affective Component
Will be assessed with (i) and (ii) through progress report from Clinical
Instructor. The aim is to evaluate students’ initiative and interpersonal
relationship in practicum. This assessment is critical in molding the
professional attitude of a student.
b) Duration of Examination
Evaluated Courses Examination Duration
2 units 1 hour for coursework of more than 40%
2 units 2 hours for coursework of 40% and below
3 units or more 2 hours for coursework of more than 40%
3 units or more 3 hours for coursework of 40% and below
242
c) Barring from Examination
Students will be barred from sitting the final examination if they do not fulfil the
course requirements, such as absence from lectures and tutorials for at least 70%,
and have not completed/fulfilled the required components of coursework. Students
will also be barred from sitting for the final examination if they have not settled
the academic fees. A grade 'X' would be awarded for a course for which a student
is barred. Students will not be allowed to repeat the course during Courses During
the Long Vacation (KSCP) period.
d) Grade Point Average System
Students academic achievement for registered courses will be graded as follows:
Alphabetic
Grade A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D D- F
Grade Points 4.00 3.67 3.33 3.00 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 0.67 0
Students awarded with a grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would be
given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP
(see below) or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and above for a
particular course will not be allowed to repeat the course whether during KSCP or
normal semester.
The achievements of students in any semester is based on Grade Point Average
(GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular semester. GPA
is the indicator to determine the academic performance of students in any
semester.
CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from one
semester to another during the years of study.
The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:
Grade Point Average = ∑ UiM i
∑ Ui
where
Ui = Course units for course i
Mi = Grade point for course i
243
Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Course Unit Grade Point
(GP)
Grade
(G)
Total GP
Semester I: ABCXX1 4 3.00 B 12.00
ABCXX2 4 2.33 C+ 9.32
BCDXX3 3 1.67 C- 5.01
CDEXX4 4 2.00 C 8.00
EFGXX5 3 1.33 D+ 3.99
EFGXX6 2 2.67 B- 5.34
20 43.66
GPA = 43.66 = 2.18
20
Course Unit Grade
Point (GP)
Grade
(G)
Total GP
Semester II: ABC XX7 3 1.00 D 3.00
ABB XX8 4 2.33 C+ 9.32
BBC XX9 4 2.00 C 8.00
BCB X10 4 2.67 B- 10.68
XYZ XX1 3 3.33 B+ 9.99
18 40.99
GPA = 40.99 = 2.28
18
CGPA = Total Accumulated GP = 43.66 + 40.99 = 84.65 = 2.23
Total Accumulated Unit 20 + 18 38
From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point
accumulated for all the registered courses and divided by the total number of the
registered units.
(e) Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti Panjang) (KSCP)
KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and obtained a
grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who have obtained 'X' or
'F*' grade are not allowed to take the course during KSCP.
244
The purpose of KSCP is to:
i) Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for
graduation.
ii) Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for graduation.
iii) Assist "probationary" students to enhance their academic status.
iv) Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course, which is not
offered in the following semester.
However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking courses that
they have attempted before and achieved a grade as stipulated above, provided that
the course is being offered. Priority is given to the final year students. Usually,
formal lectures are not held, and teaching is via tutorials.
The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of
examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is available in
the University's Academic Calendar.
(f) The Implementation KSCP
i) Students are allowed to register a maximum of 3 courses and the total
number of units registered must not exceed 10.
ii) Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest marks/the best
grades obtained in a particular course in the normal semester before KSCP.
The final overall grade is determined as follows:
Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade +
Marks or grade for KSCP examination
iii) GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in KSCP) and also
involves courses taken in the second semester and those repeated in KSCP. If
the GPA during KSCP as calculated above is 2.00 or better, the academic
status will be active, even though the academic status for the second
semester was probation status. However, if the GPA for KSCP (as
calculated above) is 1.99 or below, the academic status will remain as
probation status for the second semester.
iv) Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation requirements)
in the second semester are not allowed to register for KSCP.
(g) Academic Status
Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for any
examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be allowed to
pursue his/her studies for the following semester.
245
Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who achieves a GPA
of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation status for three consecutive
semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to pursue his/her studies at the
university. On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student
concerned will be allowed to pursue his/her studies and will be maintained at P2
status.
(h) Termination of Candidature
Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University Examination
Council has the absolute right to terminate any student's studies if his/her
academic achievement do not satisfy and fulfil the accumulated minimum
credits.
The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any student's
studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not registered for the courses,
has not attended examination without valid reasons), as well as medical reasons
can be disqualified from pursuing his/her studies.
(i) Examination Result
A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-7899),
Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will usually be released
and announced after the School Examination Council meeting and presumably
one month after final examination.
Enquiries regarding full results (grade) can be made through the Campus Online
Portal and short message service (SMS). The results will be released and
announced after the University Examination Council meeting and is usually two
weeks after the provisional results are released.
Students can print their official semester results documents namely “SEMGRED”
through the portal “Campus Online” (Campusonline.usm.my) during the second
week of the following semester.
Academic Integrity
“Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without integrity is
dangerous and dreadful.” - Samuel Johnson
Academic honesty in academic is important because it is the main pillar in ensuring that
manners and ethics with regards to high academic integrity are preserved.
Universiti Sains Malaysia encourages its students to be respectful of and to ensure that
any matter relating to academic integrity will be well-preserved. Universiti Sains
Malaysia always encourages its students to ensure that manners and integrity would be
essential in academics while focusing on their studies in Universiti Sains Malaysia.
246
These are practices or acts that are considered as conducts which lack integrity in
academics:
(a) Cheating
Cheating in the context of academics include copying in examinations,
unauthorised use of information or other aids in any academic exercise without
authorisation or in a non-sincere manner. There are numerous ways and methods
of cheating which include:
Copying answers from others during a test or an exam.
Any suspicious action that can be described as cheating or an attempt to
cheat in an exam.
Using unauthorised materials or devices without authorisation (calculator,
PDA, mobile phone, pager, or any smart device, and other unauthorized
devices) during a test or an exam.
Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam on behalf
and vice-versa.
Sharing answers or programmes for assignments or projects.
Purposely tampering with marked/graded work after it has been returned,
and then resubmitting it for remarking/regrading.
Give command, to force, persuade, deceive or blackmail others to
conduct research, do writing, programming or any task for personal
gains.
Submitting any identical or similar work in more than one course without
consulting or prior permission from the lecturers concerned.
(b) Plagiarism
The reputation of an academic institution depends on the ability to achieve and
sustain academic excellence through the exercise of academic integrity.
Academic integrity is based on honesty, trust, fairness, respect, and
responsibility, which form the basis of academic work.
One aspect of the loss of academic integrity is due to plagiarism, which is the act
of presenting published and unpublished ideas, writings, works or inventions of
others in written or other medium, as one’s own original intellectual endeavours
without any clear acknowledgement of or reference to the author of the source.
A substantial portion of academic work and research are in the written form and
the university is committed in the deterrence of plagiarism.
247
POLICY ON PLAGIARISM OF UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA
The University Policy on Plagiarism describes USM’s strong commitment to uphold
academic integrity in relation to plagiarism. It will come into effect when there is an
infringement of academic conduct relating to plagiarism.
This policy acts as a guideline that both educates and prevents and can be used as the
basis if anyone that is part of the university violates any rules and laws of the University.
The policy applies to all students, former students, staff and former staff which include
fellows, post-doctorates, visiting scholars, as well as academic, non-academic, research,
contract and temporary staff who study, serving or having served, or have graduated from
the University.
Plagiarism is defined as the act of presenting, quoting, copying, paraphrasing or passing
off ideas, images, processes, works, data, personal words or those of other people or
sources without any proper acknowledgement, reference to or quotation of the original
source(s). The acts of plagiarism include, but are not limited to, the following:
Quoting verbatim (word-for-word replication of) works of other people.
Paraphrasing another person’s work by changing some of the words, or the order
of the words, without due acknowledgement of the source(s).
Submitting another person’s work in whole or in part as one’s own.
Auto-plagiarising or self-plagiarism (one’s own work or previous work) that has
already been submitted previously for assessment, or for any other academic
award and admitting it as newly-produced without citing the original content.
Insufficient or misleading referencing of the source(s) that would enable the
reader to check whether any particular work has indeed been cited accurately
and/or fairly and this identify the original writer’s particular contribution in the
work submitted.
The university will take action of every report and offences relating to plagiarism and if
the student is found guilty, the student can be charged by the University according to the
Students Disciplinary Rules.
(c) Fabrication
Fabrication refers to a process of invention, adaptation or copying with the
intention of cheating. This is an act of deceiving other people. Fabrication is
somewhat related to matters which have been ‘created’ or altered.
Invention or task outcome or academic work without acknowledgement,
alteration, falsification or misleading use of data, information or citation in any
academic work constitutes fabrication. Fabricated information neither represent
the student's own effort nor the truth concerning a particular investigation or
study, and thus violates the principle of truth in knowledge. Some examples are:
Creating or exchanging data or results , or using someone else’s results,
248
in an experiment, assignment or research
Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to.
Listing with intent, incorrect or fictitious references.
Forging signatures of authorisation in any academic record or other
university documents.
Developing a set of false data.
(d) Collusion
Collusion refers to the cooperation in committing or to commit or to do work
with negative intentions. Some examples of collusion include:
Paying, bribing or allowing someone to do an assignment, test/exam, a
project or research for you.
Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, a project or
research for something in return.
Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others.
Providing material, information, or sources to others knowing that such
aids could be used in any dishonest act.
(e) Other violations relating to academic integrity
Arriving late to lecture, tutorial, class or other forms of teaching relating
to their courses.
Sending or submitting any overdue assignment relating to their courses.
Hire someone else to do the assignment or thesis.
Carrying out business by providing service to write assignment or thesis
of the students.
Any other violations that USM considers as violating academic integrity.
Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity
Students are responsible in protecting and upholding academic integrity in USM.
If in any specific event a student or students would encounter any incident that denotes
academic dishonesty, the student(s) need to submit a report to the relevant lecturer. The
lecturer is then responsible to investigate and substantiate the violation and report the
matter to the Dean of the School.
(i) If any violation of academic integrity is considered as not of a serious nature, the
Dean of the School can take administrative action on the students.
(ii) However, if the violation is deemed serious by the School, this matter will be
brought to the attention of the University Disciplinary Committee for appropriate
measures to be taken.
(iii) If a student is caught copying or cheating in an examination, the Investigation
249
Committee on Copying/Cheating in Examinations will pursue the matter
according to the university’s procedures. If the investigation found that there is a
case, the student(s) will be brought to the Secretariat of University Student
Disciplinary Committee (Academic Cases) at Legal Office, Level 2, Building
E42, Chancellory II, Universiti Sains Malaysia. Regarding this matter, the
Universiti Sains Malaysia ( Discipline of Students) Rules will be enforced.
(iv) Measure 48 Measure Universiti Sains Malaysia (Discipline of Students) Rules
provides that a student who had committed an inappropriate conduct and is
found guilty could be sentenced with either or a combination of or other suitable
penalty as listed:
(a) a warning;
(b) a fine not exceeding two hundred ringgit;
(c) exclusion from any specific part or parts of the University for a specified
period;
(d) suspension from being a student of the University for a specified period;
(e) expulsion from the University.
(v) Any student(s) found guilty and to be suspended from their studies within a
given duration by the University Disciplinary Committee (Academic Matters) or
the University Disciplinary Committee (General Matters), the maximum
suspension period will not be accounted for them in the completion their studies
and while waiting for the verdict to be read.
USM Mentor Programme
The Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves staff undergoing special
training as consultants and guides to the USM community who would like to share their
feelings and any psychosocial issues that could affect their social activities. This
programme helps individuals to manage psychosocial issues in a more effective manner,
which will eventually improve their well-being in order to achieve a better quality of life.
Objectives
(a) To serve as a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing with
stress, psychosocial problems and many more in order to ensure the well-being
of the USM community.
(b) To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one another by
appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent who promotes a caring society
for USM.
(c) To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help.
(d) To prevent damage in any psychosocial aspect before they reach a critical stage.
250
NURSING SKILL PRACTICE
a) Every student is compulsory to undergo practice and practicum in the nursing
skills laboratory and clinical area stated for each semester. Students are to wear
uniform during their practicum. Students have to refer to Clinical Skill Log Book
for regulation in the Nursing Skill Laboratory and clinical area.
b) Students are to practice in Nursing Skill Laboratory with tutor or on their own as
scheduled.
c) Nursing skills practice will be observed using Clinical Skill Log Book.
PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST
Students obtaining a GPA of 3.67 and above in any semester may receive the Dean’s List
Certificate.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
Students must fulfill all requirements in order to graduate (provided the minimum
residence has been fulfilled):
(a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e total credits and
the required number of credits for each component in the programme [Core and
University courses].
(b) Obtain a grade point of 2.00 and above for total Core courses.
(c) Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme.
(d) Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point of 2.00 for the language courses
(Bahasa Malaysia and English), Core Entrepreneurship, Ethnics Relation,
Thinking Technique and TITAS courses.
PROGRAMME STRUCTURE
The Programme was designed by taking into account the Malaysian Nursing Board has
maintained that any nursing educational programme must have sufficient nursing skills
training component for the purpose of registration with the Board.
To meet these requirements the Diploma in Nursing Programme is structured as follow:
Student must complete 90 credit units in 3 years (semester 1-6) which include core
courses (74 units) and university courses (16 units).
251
Programme Structure Synopsis for Diploma in Nursing Programme
PROGRAMME Unit Requirements for Graduation
CORE UNIVERSITY TOTAL
Diploma in Nursing 74 16 90
Status of Students and Level of Study
Students are designated as equivalent to first, second or third year according to the total
credit points accumulated as follows:-
Course of Study Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative
Credit Acquired
(Total Credit Unit
Required for Graduation) First Second Third
90 0 – 36 37 – 71 72 – 90
252
LIST OF CORE COURSES
No. Course Code Course Title Unit
Level 100
1 DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing 3
2 DGN 113 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) 4
3 DGN 114 Professional Nursing ll 3
4 DGN 115 Medical – Surgical Nursing I 3
5 DGN 116 Nursing Practicum I 2
6 DGN 117 Biology for Nursing 3
7 DGN 118 Therapeutic Intervention 4
8 DGN 119 Medical – Surgical Nursing II 3
9 DGN 120 Nursing Practicum II 2
Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 100 = 27
Level 200
1 DGN 204 Medical - Surgical Nursing III 3
2 DGN 208 Mental Health for Nursing 3
3 DGN 209
Advanced Nursing and Medical
Technology 3
4 DGN 210 Nursing Practicum III 2
5 DGN 211 Professional Nursing III 3
6 DGN 212 Medical - Surgical Nursing IV 3
7 DGN 213
Maternal, Child and Women Health
Nursing 3
8 DGN 214 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing 3
9 DGN 215 Community Nursing 3
10 DGN 216 Nursing Practicum IV 2
Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 200 = 28
Level 300
1 DGN 310 Nursing Practicum VI 9
2 DGN 311 Nursing Practicum VII 10
Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 300 = 19
Total Unit of Core Courses 74
253
LIST OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
No. Course Code Course Title Unit
Level 100
1 LKM 400 Malay Language lV 2
2 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 1
3 LDN 101 English Language for Nursing 1 2
4 WUS 101 Core Entrepreneurship 2
5 HTV 201 Thinking Techniques 2
Total Unit of University Courses for Level 100 = 9
Level 200
1 LDN 201 English Language for Nursing ll 2
2 HTU 223 TITAS 2
3 SHE 101 Ethnics Relation 2
4 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 1
Total Unit of University Courses for Level 200 = 7
Level 300
- - - -
Total Unit of University Courses for Level 300 = 0
Total Unit of University Courses 16
254
Registration Guidelines for Diploma in Nursing
Level 100
Code Core Course Unit Code University
Course Unit
Total
Unit
Semester 1
DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing 3 LKM 400 Malay Language lV 2
DGN 113 Nursing Skills (Activities of 4 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 1
Daily Living)
DGN 114 Professional Nursing ll 3
DGN 115 Medical – Surgical Nursing I 3
DGN 116 Nursing Practicum I 2
15 3 18
Semester II
DGN 117 Biology for Nursing 3 LDN 101 English Languange 2
DGN 118 Therapeutic Intervention 4 for Nursing l
DGN 119 Medical - Surgical Nursing II 3 WUS 101 Core 2
DGN 120 Nursing Practicum II 2 Entrepreneurship
HTV 201 Thinking 2
Techniques
12 6 18
Level 200
Code Core Course Unit Code University
Course Unit
Total
Unit
Semester 1
DGN 204 Medical - Surgical Nursing 3 LDN 201 English Language 2
III for Nursing ll
DGN 208 Mental Health for Nursing 3 HTU 223 TITAS 2
DGN 209 Advanced Nursing and 3 SHE 101 Ethnics Relation 2
Medical Technology
DGN 210 Nursing Practicum III 2
11 6 17
Semester II
DGN 211 Professional Nursing lll 3 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 1
DGN 212 Medical - Surgical Nursing 3
lV
DGN 213 Maternal, Child and Women 3
Health Nursing
DGN 214 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing 3
DGN 215 Community Nursing 3
DGN 216 Nursing Practicum IV 2
17 1 18
255
Level 300
Code Core Course Unit Code University
Course Unit
Total
Unit
Semester 1
DGN 310 Nursing Practicum Vl 9 - - -
9 9
Semester II
DGN 311 Nursing Practicum Vll 10 - - -
10 10
Total Unit of Core Courses 74 Total Unit of University 16 90
Courses
Core Courses = 74
University Courses = 16
TOTAL = 90
256
SEMESTER STRUCTURE
DIPLOMA IN NURSING
Year 1 Semester l Year 1 Semester ll
WEEK ACTIVITY WEEK ACTIVITY
1
LECTURE
24
LECTURE
2 25
3 26
4 27
5 28
6 29
7 30
8 MID SEMESTER BREAK 31 MID SEMESTER BREAK
9
LECTURE
32
LECTURE 10 33
11 34
12 35
13
PRACTICUM
36
PRACTICUM 14 37
15 38
16 39
17 STUDY WEEK 40 STUDY WEEK
18 FINAL EXAM
41 FINAL EXAM
19 42
20
SEMESTER BREAK
43
LONG SEMESTER BREAK
21 44
22 45
23 46
47
48
49
50
51
52
257
Year 2 Semester l Year 2 Semester ll
WEEK ACTIVITY WEEK ACTIVITY
1
LECTURE
24
LECTURE
2 25
3 26
4 27
5 28
6 29
7 30
8 MID SEMESTER BREAK 31 MID SEMESTER BREAK
9
LECTURE
32
LECTURE 10 33
11 34
12 35
13
PRACTICUM
36
PRACTICUM 14 37
15 38
16 39
17 STUDY WEEK 40 STUDY WEEK
18 FINAL EXAM
41 FINAL EXAM
19 42
20
SEMESTER BREAK
43
LONG SEMESTER BREAK
21 44
22 45
23 46
47
48
49
50
51
52
258
Year 3 Semester l Year 3 Semester ll
WEEK ACTIVITY WEEK ACTIVITY
1
PRACTICUM
24
PRACTICUM
2 25
3 26
4 27
5 28
6 29
7 30
8 MID SEMESTER BREAK 31 MID SEMESTER BREAK
9
PRACTICUM
32
PRACTICUM
10 33
11 34
12 35
13 36
14 37
15 38
16 39
17 40
18 41
19 42
20
SEMESTER BREAK
43
21 44
22 45
LONG SEMESTER BREAK
23 46
47
48
49
50
51
52
261
DGN105/3-Sociology in Nursing
This course introduces students to roles of sociology in health care and its implication on
behaviour and responses to health alteration and diseases. Lectures given on concepts of
health and disease, the relationship between health and behaviour, the influence of
culture, religion and social class in the prevention of disease. Students will be introduced
to best practice integrated in health system associated with the welfare of society.
Knowledge will be integrated in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1. Denny, E., Earle, S. & Hewison, A., Sociology for nurses. (3rd
Ed.), Wiley:
United States, 2016.
2. Knudsen, M. & Vogd, W., Systems Theory And The Sosiology Of Health and
Illness: Observing Health Care. The Sociology Of Health, Healing and
Illness, Routledge: Abingdon, Oxon, 2015.
3. White, K., An Introduction to The Sociology Of Health And Illness, (3rd
Ed.),
Sage: Los Angeles, 2017.
DGN113/4-Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living)
This course introduces students to basic nursing concept and nursing skills related to
human basic need based on the Virginia Henderson theory. Students will practice the
skills taught in the nursing skill laboratory and implement the skills in clinical area
according to patients’ need holisticly. Nursing process is introduced to students for
effective nursing care delivery. This course is the fundamental of nursing practice to
ensure patients’s rights are protected.
List of text/reference books:
1. DeWit, S. C., Fundamental concepts and skills for nursing, (4th
Ed.), Saunders
Elsevier: St. Louis, 2013.
2. Dougherty, L., Lister, S., & West-Orem, A., The Royal Marsden Manual of
Clinical Nursing Procedures, (9th
Ed.), Wiley Blackwell: United Kingdom,
2015.
3. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to
Advanced Skills, (8th
Ed.), Pearson: Boston, 2012.
DGN114/3-Professional Nursing II
This course provides knowledge and understanding for ethics and laws also importance
of effective communication in nursing practice. Students are introduced to the importance
of security and safety of patients’ information. Effective communication is an essential
aspect in health education and promotion for sustainability of health nationwide. Students
are required to apply the knowledge and communication skills acquired in clinical
practice.
262
List of text/reference books:
1. Burkhardt, M. A. & Nathaniel, A. K., Ethics & Issues in Contemporary Nursing,
(4th
Ed.), Cencage Leraning: Australia, 2014.
2. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, Mosby: New York,
2015.
3. Purtilo, R., Doherty, R. & Haddad, A., Health Professional and Patient
Interaction, (8th
Ed.), Elsevier/Saunders: St. Louis, 2014.
DGN115/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing I
This course introduces basic knowledge and skill of nursing management concept related
to component, method also the importance of medical-surgical nursing and health
assessment. Health assessment focuses on the practical aspect of basic nursing. Aspects
of basic anatomy including terminologies of various human organ systems will be
introduced to students. Knowledge acquired will be applied in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1. Basavanthappa, B.T., Medical Surgical Nursing, (3rd
Ed). Jaypee Brothers
Medical Publishers: New Delhi, 2015.
2. Hinkle, J. L. & Cheever, K. H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical
Surgical Nursing, Lippincotts Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2014.
3. White, L., Duncan, G & Baumic, W., Medical-Surgical Nursing. An integrated
approach, (3 rd
Ed.). Delmar: USA, 2013.
DGN116/2-Nursing Practicum I
This practicum is the application of basic nursing science theory related to nursing
process, activity daily living, sociology, communication technique and ethic and law in
nursing practice. Students need to integrate knowledge and skills to provide holistic
nursing care.
List of text/reference books:
1. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., (Eds.), Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, (7th
Ed.), Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2015.
2. Ledwig, G. B. & Ackley, B. J., Guide to Nursing Diagnosis, (4th
Ed.), Elsevier:
Missouri, 2014.
3. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, Mosby: New York,
2015.
263
DGN117/3-Biology for Nursing
This course provides knowledge and understanding the basic structure and physiology of
cellular organelles, biochemistry, microbiology, and parasitology. Knowledge acquired
from this course will aid students in understanding nursing management of health
conditions. The importance of the understanding will be applied in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1. Craven, R. F., Hurnle, C. J. & Henshaw, C. M., Fundamentals of Nursing:
Human Health and Function, (8th
Ed.), Wolters Kluwer: Philadelphia, 2017.
2. Levinson, W., Review of Medical Microbiology and Immunology, (12th
Ed.),
McGraw-Hill Medical: New York, 2012
3. VanPutte, C. (et al.), Seeley’s Anatomy & Physiology, (10th Ed.), McGraw-Hill:
New York, 2014.
DGN118/4-Therapeutic Intervention
This course introduces basic knowledge and skill of therapeutic intervention such as
aseptic concept and technique, wound management, pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic,
and importance of therapeutic diet, pain management, and also counseling technique.
Knowledge and skills acquired will be integrated in other medical surgical courses.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ester, M. A. Z., Health Assessment and Physical Examination, (5th
Ed.). Delmar
Health Care: USA, 2014.
2. Perry, A. G., Potter, P. A. & Ostendorf, W. R., Clinical Nursing Skills &
Techniques, (8th
Ed.), Mosby/Elsevier: St. Louis, 2014.
3. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, Mosby: New York,
2015.
DGN119/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing II
This course introduces basic knowledge of anatomy and physiology as well as basic skill
in nursing management of patient with impaired hematology, lymphatic, immunology,
respiratory, and cardiovascular system such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation,
complications, diagnostic investigation and medical treatment. The nursing practice
approach is from the wellness-illness continuum and holistic context.
List of text/reference books:
1. Basavanthappa, B.T., Medical Surgical Nursing, (3rd
Ed). Jaypee Brothers
Medical Publishers: New Delhi, 2015.
2. Ignatavicius, D. D. & Linda, W. M. Medical-Surgical Nursing: Patient-
Centered Collaborative Care, Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2012.
3. White, L., Duncan, G. & Baundle, W., Medical-surgical Nursing: An Integrated
Approach, (3rd
Ed.), Delmar Publication: New York, 2013.
264
DGN120/2-Nursing Practicum II
This practicum is the application of basic knowledge related therapeutic intervention and
also medical and surgical nursing care concept in nursing practice. Students will be
taught to integrate mind mapping concept, critical thinking and problem solving method
in delivering nursing care of patients for better quality of life.
List of text/reference books:
1. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., (Eds.), Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, (7th
Ed.), Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2015.
2. Ledwig, G. B. & Ackley, B. J., Guide to Nursing Diagnosis, (4th
Ed.), Elsevier:
Missouri, 2014.
3. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, Mosby: New York,
2015.
266
DGN204/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing III
This course introduces basic knowledge and skill of nursing care for patient with
impaired gastrointestinal, urinary, endocrine, immunology and oncology system such as
pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigation and
medical treatment. Skills of therapeutic intervention will be integrated in this course. The
nursing practice approach is from the wellness-illness continuum and holistic context.
Knowledge and skills learnt will be applied in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1. DeWit, S. C. & Kumagai, C. K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Concepts &
Practice, (2nd
Ed.), Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2013.
2. Hinkle, J. L. & Cheever, K. H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical
Surgical Nursing, Lippincotts Williams & Wilkins: Philadephia, 2014.
3. White, L., Duncan, G & Baumic, W., Medical-Surgical Nursing. An integrated
approach, (3 rd
Ed.). Delmar: USA, 2013.
DGN208/3-Mental Health for Nursing
This course introduces knowledge regarding diseases and basic skill of nursing care for
patient and family experiencing mental health problems and diseases. The course is
structured based on holistic and humanistic framework, emphasizing on patient’s care in
the hospital and community. Knowledge and skills will be applied in nursing practice.
List of text/reference books:
1. Kneisl, C. R. & Trigoboff, E., Contemporary Psychiatric-Mental Health
Nursing, (3rd
Ed.), Pearson: St. Louis, 2013.
2. Stuart, G.W., Principles and Practice of Psychiatric Nursing, (10th
Ed.),
Elsevier: St. Louis, 2013.
3. Varcarolis, E. M. & Halter, M. J., Foundations of Health Nursing: A Clinical
Approach, (7th
Ed.), Elsevier: St. Louise, 2014.
DGN209/3-Advanced Nursing and Medical Technology
This course introduces students to advanced nursing and medical technology revolution
in nursing practice such as operation theatre and critical care. Students will practice the
skills taught in the nursing skill laboratory and clinical area. The course will be taught via
lecture, practical, discussion and case study. Student will be assessed through practical,
test and coursework.
List of text/reference books:
1. Marmo, L., & D’arcy, Y., Compact Clinical Guide to Critical Care, Trauma,
and Emergency Pain Management. New York: Springer Publishing Co., 2013.
267
2. Pellico. L.H., Focus on Adult Health Medical-Surgical Nursing. Philadelphia:
Lippincott, 2013.
3. Phillips, N., Berry & Kohn’s Operating Room Technique. (12th
Ed). Elsevier: St.
Louis, Missouri, 2013.
4. Urden, L.D., Stacy, K.M.. & Lough, M. E., Priorities in Critical Care Nursing,
(6th
.Ed). Elsevier: USA, 2012.
5. Weber, J., Nurse's Handbook of Health Assessment. Philadelphia: Lippincott
Co., 1998.
DGN210/2-Nursing Practicum III
This practicum is the application of medical surgical nursing skill for patient with
gastrointestinal, renal, endocrine system alteration and mental problem. Students are
required to apply mind mapping concept, critical thinking and problem solving method in
delivering nursing care of patients for better quality of life.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hinkle, J. L. & Cheever, K. H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical
Surgical Nursing, Lippincotts Williams & Wilkins: Philadephia, 2014.
2. Lewis, S. L. et al., Medical-Surgical Nursing, (10th
Ed.), Mosby: New York,
2017.
3. White, L., Duncan, G. & Baundle, W., Medical-Surgical Nursing: An Integrated
Approach, (3rd
Ed.) Delmar Publication: New York, 2013.
DGN211/3-Professional Nursing lll
This course introduces knowledge and skills to students on management and leadership,
method of teaching and learning, the importance of research and health informatics.
Management and leadership are important skills for students to acquire in groupwork and
team building in order to deliver quality service to patients. The importance of knowledge
will be applied in nursing practices.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ganerson, K. B., Oermann, M. L. & Borger, T. S., Clinical Teaching Strategies
in Nursing, (4th
Ed.), Springel: New York, 2015.
2. Huber, D. L., Leadership and Nursing Care Management, Elsevier: St. Louis,
Missouri, 2014.
3. Polit, D. F. & Beck, C. T., Nursing Research Generating & Assessing Evidence
for Nursing Practice, (10th
Ed.), Wolters Kluwer: Philadelphia, 2017.
268
GN212/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing lV
This course introduces basic knowledge and skill of nursing care for patient with
impaired neurology, integumentary, special sences and musculoskeletal system such as
pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigation and
medical treatment. The nursing practice approach is from the wellness-illness continuum
and holistic context. The importance of the knowledge is to be applied in nursing
practice.
List of text/reference books:
1. Hinkle, J. L. & Cheever, K. H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical
Surgical Nursing, Lippincotts Williams & Wilkins: Philadephia, 2014.
2. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., (Eds.), Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, (7th
Ed.), Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2015.
3. Lewis, S. L., Dirksen, S. R., Heitkemper, M. M., Bucher, L. & Camera, I. M.,
Medical-Surgical Nursing: Assessment and Management of Clinical Problem,
Elsevier: St. Louis, 2015.
DGN213/3-Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing
This course gives knowledge and skills to students regarding physiology, clinical
manifestation, diagnostic investigation, complication and medical treatment related to
maternal, child and women health nursing. The course will be taught through lecture,
practical and discussion. Students will be assessed via log book, seminar, assignment, test
and final examination. Knowledge and skills acquired in this course will be integrated in
community practicum.
List of text/reference books:
1. Littleton-Gibbs, L. Y. & Engebretson, J. C., Maternity Nursing Care, (2nd
Ed.),
Delmar Cencage Learning: New York, 2013.
2. Murray, S. S. & McKinney, E. S., Foundations of Maternal-Newborn and
Women’s Health Nursing, (6th
Ed.), Elsevier: St. Louis, 2014.
3. Perry, S. E., Hockenberry, M. J., Lowdermilk, D. L., & Wilson, D., Maternal &
Child Nursing Care, (4th
Ed.), Elsevier: Canada, 2014.
DGN214/3-Neonate and Pediatric Nursing
This course introduces basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for neonate and
pediatric patient with medical and surgical problems. Students are expected to acquire
ability to deliver holistic nursing care to neonates and children. The knowledge is
displayed in nursing practice.
269
List of text/reference books:
1. Ball, J.W., Bindler, R. C. & Gowen, K. J., Principle of Pediatric Nursing :
Caring for Children, (5th
Ed.), Pearson: New Jersey, 2012.
2. Hockenberry, M. J. & Wilson, D., Eds, Wong’s Essentials of Pediatric Nursing,
(9th
Ed.), Elsevier/Mosby: St. Louis. 2013.
3. James, S. R., Nelson, K. A. & Ashwill, J. W., Nursing Care of Children:
Principle & Practice, (4th
Ed.), Elsevier Saunders: Philadelphia, 2013.
DGN215/3-Community Nursing
This course introduces students to the concept of community and public health nursing.
The nursing knowledge and skills from nursing and public health sciences will be used by
the students to apply during community practicum.
List of text/reference books:
1. Birchenall, J. & Streight, E., Mosby’s Textbook for the Home Care Aide, (3th
Ed.), Mosby Elsevier’s: USA, 2013.
2. Pawi, S, Bucuan, J. & Siop, S. J., A Handbook on Community Health Nursing
Procedures, UNIMAS: Sarawak, 2013.
3. Stanhope, M. & Lancaster, J., Foundation of Nursing in the Community:
Community Oriented Practice, Mosby Elsevier’s: China, 2014.
DGN216/2-Nursing Practicum IV
This course is the application of knowledge and medical – surgical nursing skills related
to patient with neurology, skin, special senses and musculoskeletal problem. Students are
required to apply mind mapping concept, critical thinking and problem solving method in
delivering nursing care of patients for better quality of life.
List of text/reference books:
1. Basavanthappa, B. T., Medical-Surgical Nursing, (3rd
Ed.), Jaypee Brothers
Medical Publishers: New Delhi, 2015.
2. Hinkle, J. L. & Cheever, K. H., Brunner & Suddarth’s Textbook of Medical
Surgical Nursing, Lippincotts Williams & Wilkins: Philadephia, 2014.
3. Lewis, S. L. et al., Medical-Surgical Nursing, (10th
Ed.), Mosby: New York,
2017.
271
DGN310/9-Nursing Practicum VI
This practicum is the application of nursing theory and skills related to medical-surgical,
operation theatre, community, neonatal, pediatric, obstetric, gynaecology, orthopaedic,
accident and emergency nursing to be practiced professionally and ethically. Students are
required to apply mind mapping concept, critical thinking and problem solving method in
delivering nursing care of patients for better quality of life.
List of text/reference books:
1. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., (Eds.), Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in
Client Care, (7th
Ed.), Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2015.
2. Lewis, S. L., Dirksen, S. R., Heitkemper, M. M., Bucher, L. & Camera, I. M.,
Medical-Surgical Nursing: Assessment and Management of Clinical Problem,
Elsevier: St. Louis, 2015.
3. Stanhope, M. & Lancaster, J., Public Health Nursing: Population-Centered
Health Care in The Community, Elsevier: USA, 2013.
DGN311/10-Nursing Practicum VlI
This course is the application of medical surgical nursing care theory and skills related to
oncology, critical and ward management. This course requires students to implement
management and leadership skills acquired. Students are required to apply mind mapping
concept, critical thinking and problem solving method in delivering nursing care of
patients for better quality of life.
List of text/reference books:
1. Ester, M.A.Z., Health Assessment and Physical Examination. (5th
Ed). Delmar
Health Care: USA, 2014
2. Marmo, L., & D’arcy, Y., Compact Clinical Guide to Critical Care, Trauma,
and Emergency Pain Management. New York: Springer Publishing Co., 2013.
3. Ladwig. G.B., & Ackley, B.J., Guide to Nursing Diagnosis. (4th
Ed). Elsevier:
China, 2014.
4. Perry, S.E., Hockenberry, M.J., Lowdermilk, D.L., & Wilson, D., Maternal &
Child Nursing Care. (4th
Ed). Elsevier: Canada, 2014.
5. Phillips, N., Berry & Kohn’s Operating Room Technique. (12th
Ed). Elsevier: St.
Louis, Missouri, 2013.
6. Stanhope, M. & Lancaster, J., Public Health Nursing: Population-Centered
Health Care in the Community. Elsevier: USA, 2013.
272
FACILITIES AVAILABLE AT THE SCHOOL
Hospital Universiti Sains Malaysia (Hospital USM)
Hospital USM has more than 794 beds from 37 wards of various disciplines including
medical, surgical, orthopedic, critical, obstetric and gynecology, psychiatric, cardiology,
cardiothorasic, oncology and pediatric.
Services available include:
Medical Specialist Clinic
Surgery Clinic
Obstetric And Gynecology Clinic
Orthopedic Clinic
Psychiatric Clinic
Ophthalmology Clinic
Otorhinolaryngology Clinic
Oncology Clinic
Outpatient Clinic (Klinik Rawatan Keluarga)
Staff Clinic
Klinik Sejahtera (for USM students)
Dental Clinic
Radiology Services
Diagnostic Laboratory Services
Clinical Laboratory Services
Blood Bank Services
Pharmacy Services
Library
Facilities include:
Open rack books, reference books, magazine including permanent subscription, serial
monography, special collection, fiction collection and gift books
Media materials
The School of Health Sciences' building
The buildings of the School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres,
tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia
equipments.
273
IT facilities and MultiMedia
IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the MultiMedia Laboratories of the
School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11:30 pm.
SOCIETY
School of Health Sciences students automatically become members of the Health Science
Society of the University.
274
11.0 INDEX
AUDIOLOGY
Course Code Course Title Page
GTA105/2 Acoustics for Hearing and Speech - 97
GTA106/2 Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech I - 97
GTA107/2 Psychoacoustics - 97 - 98
GTA108/2 Basic Audiology Techiques - 98
GTA109/2 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech II - 98 - 99
GTA201/2 Audiological Instrumentation - 112
GTA203/3 Advanced Audiology Technique - 112
GTA205/2 Neurology for Hearing and Speech - 113
GTA208/4 Paediatric Audiology - 113
GTA209/3 Audiology Clinic I - 114
GTA210/3 Otology - 114 -115
GTA211/2 Hearing Screening - 115
GTA212/3 Basic Hearing Amplification Technology - 115 - 116
GTA213/3 Electrophysiologyal Tests - 116
GTA305/3 Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology - 145
GTA307/3 Audiology Clinic II - 145 - 146
GTA308/2 Evaluation of Balance System - 146
GTA309/4 Audiology Clinic III - 146 - 147
GTA310/2 Basic Medical Management for Audiologist and Speech
Pathologist
- 147
GTA311/4 Audiological Rehabilitation - 147 - 148
GTA401/6 Research Project - 185
GTA406/2 Noise and Hearing - 185
GTA407/5 Audiology Clinic IV - 185 -186
GTA408/6 Audiology Clinical Placement - 186
GTA409/2 Audiology Seminar - 187
GTA410/2 Ethics and Professionalisme in Audiology - 187
GTA411/5 Audiology Clinic V - 188
GTA412/2 Practice Management for Audiologist and Speech
Pathologist
- 188
275
BIOMEDICINE
Course Code Course Title Page
GTB105/3 Human Biochemistry - 99
GTB106/3 Laboratory Science - 99 - 100
GTB109/3 Cell Biology Techniques - 100
GTB204/3 Molecular Biology Techniques - 116
GTB212/3 Basic Microbiology - 117
GTB218/3 Immunology II - 117
GTB219/3 Pharmacology I - 118
GTB221/3 Basic Haematology - 118 - 119
GTB222/4 Pathology - 119
GTB224/3 Immunology I - 119 - 120
GTB225/3 Epidemiology - 120
GTB307/3 Medical Parasitology - 148
GTB310/3 Clinical Biochemistry - 148 - 149
GTB316/3 Transfusion Science and Blood Banking - 149 - 150
GTB317/3 Clinical and Laboratory Haematology - 150
GTB318/3 Pharmacology II - 150 - 151
GTB319/3 Toxicology - 151
GTB320/3 Medical Virology and Mycology - 151 - 152
GTB321/3 Clinical Diagnostic Laboratory Management - 152 - 153
GTB322/3 Medical Bacteriology - 153
GTB408/9 Biomedical Practicum - 189
GTB411/8 Research Project - 189
GTB412/10 Industrial Training - 189 - 190
276
DIETETICS
Course Code Course Title Page
GTD212/3 Dietetics Skills and Communication - 120 - 121
GTD311/3 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I - 153 – 154
GTD321/3 Therapeutic Diet Preparation - 154
GTD323/3 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II - 154 -155
GTD324/3 Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I - 155
GTD325/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I - 155
GTD326/3 Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I - 156
GTD406/3 Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II - 190
GTD407/3 Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II - 190
GTD408/3 Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II - 190 – 191
GTD410/6 Research Projects in Dietetics - 191
277
FORENSIC SCIENCE
Course Code Course Title Page
GTF104/3 Inorganic Chemistry
- 100 - 101
GTF105/2 General Chemistry Practical I
- 101
GTF107/3 Organic Chemistry I
- 101
GTF108/2 General Chemistry Practical II
- 102
GTF109/2 Organic Chemistry Practical
- 102 – 103
GTF110/4 Physical Chemistry
- 103
GTF111/4 Analytical Chemistry I
- 103
GTF200/3 Criminalistic
- 121
GTF204/3 Forensic Psychology
- 121 - 122
GTF206/3 Organic Chemistry II
- 122
GTF207/2 Analytical Chemistry Practical
- 122 - 123
GTF210/3 Material Chemistry
- 123
GTF212/4 Analytical Chemistry II
- 123 - 124
GTF213/3 Introduction to Criminology
- 124
GTF214/3 Pollutions and Environment Chemistry
- 124 - 125
GTF215/3 Natural Products Chemistry
- 125
GTF301/3 Physical Evidence
- 156 – 157
GTF305/4 Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drug
- 157
GTF306/3 Fire Investigation
- 157 - 158
GTF309/3 Forensic DNA Analysis
- 158
GTF311/3 Forensic Anthropology
- 158 – 159
GTF312/3 Organic Chemistry III
- 159
GTF313/3 Food Chemistry
- 159 – 160
GTF314/2 Forensic Serology
- 160
GTF315/3 Biological Evidence
- 160 - 161
GTF400/3 Forensic Medicine
- 191 - 192
GTF402/4 Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives
- 192
GTF407/8 Forensic Practicum
- 192 – 193
GTF408/2 Forensic Documents Examination
- 193
GTF409/2 Statistics for Forensic Science
- 193 – 194
GTF410/2 Forensic Digital Evidence
- 194
GTF411/8 Research Projects - 194 - 195
278
NURSING
Course Code Course Title Page
GTJ101/4 Nursing Foundation I - 103 - 104
GTJ109/4 Nursing Foundation II - 104
GTJ205/4 Nursing Foundation III - 125 - 126
GTJ210/3 Primary Health Care, Family and Community - 126
GTJ213/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum I - 126 - 127
GTJ214/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and
Respiratory)
- 127
GTJ215/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastroenterology and
Nephro-Urology)
- 127
GTJ216/3 Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing - 128
GTJ217/2 Principles of Health Management - 128 – 129
GTJ319/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum II - 161
GTJ320/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and
Musculoskeletal)
- 161
GTJ321/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology,
Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology)
- 162
GTJ322/3 Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing - 162
GTJ323/3 Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology,
Hematology and Oncology)
- 162 – 163
GTJ324/3 Critical Care Nursing - 163
GTJ325/3 Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing - 163 – 164
GTJ326/3 Gerontological Nursing - 164
GTJ327/3 Nursing Education - 165
GTJ405/5 Medical Nursing Practicum - 195
GTJ406/4 Surgical Nursing Practicum - 195
GTJ407/4 Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum - 196
GTJ408/4 Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum - 196
GTJ409/3 Nursing Foundation Practicum III - 196 – 197
GTJ410/6 Research Project - 197
279
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
Course Code Course Title Page
GTF101/3 Basic Chemistry - 100
GTK101/3 Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health - 104 - 105
GTK104/3 Environmental Health - 105
GTK201/3 Occupational Safety - 129
GTK202/3 Pollution and Health - 129 - 130
GTK203/3 Occupational Health - 130
GTK204/4 Environmental and Occupational Laws - 131
GTK301/4 Environmental and Occupational Toxicology - 165
GTK302/3 Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering
Perspectives
- 166
GTK303/3 Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management - 166 – 167
GTK305/3 Environmental and Occupational Health Related Diseases - 167
GTK307/3 Occupational Rehabilitation - 167 – 168
GTK310/4 Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants - 168 – 169
GTK311/4 Environmental and Occupational Emergency - 169
GTK402/8 Research Project - 197 – 198
GTK404/3 Environmental Management - 198
GTK406/12 Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum - 198 – 199
GTK408/4 Occupational Safety and Health Management - 199
280
NUTRITION
Course Code Course Title Page
GTN102/4 Food Science - 106
GTN202/3 Principles of Food Preparation - 131 – 132
GTN207/3 Principles of Nutrition - 132
GTN208/3 Nutritional Biochemistry - 132
GTN213/4 Principles of Nutrition - 133
GTN214/4 Nutrition in a Life Cycle - 133
GTN215/3 Nutrition for Health and Fitness - 133 - 134
GTN216/4 Food Analysis - 134
GTN217/4 Assessment of Nutritional Status - 134
GTN309/3 Nutrition and Diseases - 169
GTN311/3 Food Service Management - 170
GTN315/4 Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum - 170
GTN316/3 Food and Nutrition Toxicology - 171
GTN317/4 Food Microbiology - 171
GTN318/3 Nutrition Anthropology - 172
GTN405/3 Current Issues in Nutrition - 199 – 200
GTN407/3 Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars - 200
GTN408/4 Food Service and Industry Practicum - 200
GTN409/12 Research Project in Nutrition - 201
281
SPEECH PATHOLOGY
Course Code Course Title Page
GTP100/3 Basic Linguistics
- 106
GTP104/3 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing
- 106 - 107
GTP107/3 Language Development
- 107
GTP108/2 Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology
- 107
GTP109/3 Applied Linguistics for Speech Pathology
- 108
GTP202/3 Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders
- 135
GTP203/2 Speech Pathology Clinic I
- 135
GTP207/2 Speech Pathology Clinic II
- 135 - 136
GTP209/2 Phonetics and Phonology
- 136
GTP210/2 Clinical Linguistics
- 136
GTP211/3 Paediatrics for Hearing and Speech
- 137
GTP212/2 Abnormal Psychology
- 137
GTP213/3 Paediatrics Language Disorders
- 137 - 138
GTP214/3 Speech Sound Disorders
- 138
GTP215/3 Hearing Impairment
- 138
GTP216/2 Psycholinguistics
- 139
GTP303/2 Neuropsychology
- 172
GTP304/3 Speech Pathology Clinic III
- 173
GTP306/3 Voice and Resonance Disorders
- 173
GTP311/3 Counseling for Communication Disorders
- 174
GTP312/2 Augmentative and Alternative Communication
- 174
GTP313/3 Acquired Language Disorders
- 174 – 175
GTP314/2 Motor Speech Disorders
- 175
GTP315/3 Speech Pathology Clinic IV
- 175 – 176
GTP316/3 Learning Disabilities
- 176
GTP317/2 Swallowing Problems
- 176
GTP402/6 Research Project
- 201
GTP403/6 Speech Pathology Clinic V
- 202
GTP406/6 Speech Pathology Clinic VI
- 202
GTP408/2 Fluency Disorders
- 203
GTP409/6 Speech Pathology Clinical Placement
- 203
GTP410/2 Ethics and Professionalism for Speech Pathology
- 203 - 204
282
EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE
Course Code Course Title Page
GTS101/2 Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science - 108
GTS102/3 Sociology and Philosophy of Sports - 109
GTS201/3 Exercise Physiology - 139
GTS202/2 First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) - 139 – 140
GTS205/3 Sports Psychology - 140
GTS206/3 Sports Training Methodology - 140 – 141
GTS207/3 Principles and Training of Individual and Team Sports - 141
GTS208/3 Kinanthropometry, Test and Measurements for Sports
Science
- 141
GTS305/2 Applied Sports Physiology - 177
GTS307/3 Physical Activity, Growth and Development - 177
GTS311/3 Sports Nutrition - 177 – 178
GTS312/3 Sports Injuries and Rehabilition - 178
GTS313/3 Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology - 178 – 179
GTS314/3 Motor Learning - 179
GTS315/3 Coaching Science and Performance Analysis - 179
GTS316/3 Adapted Physical Activity - 180
GTS317/3 Sports Management - 180
GTS401/3 Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription - 204
GTS407/3 Therapeutic Exercises - 204 – 205
GTS409/10 Research Project - 205
GTS410/3 Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices - 205 – 206
GTS411/6 Industrial Training - 206
283
MEDICAL RADIATION
Course Code Course Title Page
GTX104/4 Introduction to Medical Radiation - 109
GTX105/4 Medical Radiation Physics I - 110
GTX106/3 Mathematics of Radiation Science I - 110
GTX213/3 Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine - 142
GTX214/3 Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology - 142
GTX215/4 Medical Radiation Physics II - 142 – 143
GTX216/3 Radiographic Anatomy - 143
GTX217/3 Mathematics of Radiation Science II - 143
GTX307/3 Radiation Protection and Safety II - 180 – 181
GTX321/4 Imaging Techniques I - 181
GTX322/3 Radiation Protection and Safety I - 181
GTX323/3 Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry - 182
GTX324/4 Diagnostic Radiology Imaging - 182
GTX325/4 Nuclear Medicine Imaging - 182 – 183
GTX326/4 Principles of Radiotherapy - 183
GTX327/3 Brachytherapy - 183
GTX407/3 Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II - 206
GTX408/3 Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in
Radiotherapy
- 206 – 207
GTX410/4 Imaging Techniques II - 207
GTX411/4 Radiotherapy Techniques - 207 – 208
GTX412/3 Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques - 208
GTX414/3 Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I - 208 – 209
GTX415/8 Research Project - 200
GTX416/4 Professional Training - 209
284
ELECTIVE
Course Code Course Title Page
GTJ108/2 Health Communication and Education
- 211
GEG103/3 Fitness and Health
- 211
GEG109/2 History of Health Sciences
- 212
GEG114/2 Oral Health
- 212
GEG201/2 Women’s Health
- 213
GEG204/3 Gender Perspectives in Health
- 213
GEG208/2 Human Resource Management in Healthcare
Organizations
- 214
GEG213/3 Stress Management
- 214
GEG216/3 Development of Health Services In Malaysia
- 215
GEG218/3 Community Development in Health Promotion
- 215
GTS202/2 First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
- 217
GTS207/2 Principles and Training of Individual Team Sports
- 217
GEG219/2 Health Care Management
- 216
GEG220/2 Occupational Therapy for People With Disability
- 216
GEG302/3 Violence and Society
- 217 – 218
GEG304/2 Communication and Self Development
- 218
GEG305/2 Forensic Sciences
- 218 – 219
GTS307/3 Physical Activity, Growth and Development
- 219
GEG309/2 Principles of Forensic Dentistry
- 219
GEG313/2 Health Economic
- 219 – 220
GEG315/3 Fiqh of Health
- 220
GTS407/3 Therapeutic Exercises
- 220 – 221
LAA100/2 Arabic Language I
- 221
LAA200/2 Arabic Language II
- 221 – 222
LAJ100/2 Japanese Language I
- 221
LAJ200/2 Japanese Language II \
- 222
285
FOUNDATION COURSES (GTU)
Course Code Course Title Page
GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Humans I - 91
GTU103/3 Fundamentals of Health Informatics - 91 - 92
GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Humans II - 92
GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science - 92
GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics - 93
GTU202/3 Health and Society - 93
GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for Health Care Professionals - 94
GTU302/3 Biostatistics - 94
GTU304/3 Research Methodology - 95
286
DIPLOMA OF NURSING
Course Code Course Title Page
DGN105/3 Sociology in Nursing - 261
DGN113/4 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) - 261
DGN114/3 Professional Nursing II - 261 – 262
DGN115/3 Medical - Surgical Nursing I - 262
DGN116/2 Nursing Practicum 1 - 262
DGN117/3 Biology for Nursing - 262 – 263
DGN118/4 Therapeutic Intervention - 263
DGN119/3 Medical - Surgical Nursing II - 263
DGN120/2 Nursing Practicum II - 264
DGN204/3 Medical - Surgical Nursing III - 266
DGN208/3 Mental Health for Nursing - 266
DGN209/3 Advanced Nursing and Medical Technology - 266 - 267
DGN210/2 Nursing Practicum III - 267
DGN211/3 Professional Nursing III - 267
DGN212/3 Medical - Surgical Nursing IV - 268
DGN213/3 Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing - 268
DGN214/3 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing - 268 – 269
DGN215/3 Community Nursing - 269
DGN216/2 Nursing Practicum IV - 269
DGN310/9 Nursing Practicum VI - 271
DGN311/10 Nursing Practicum VII - 271
287
12.0 STUDENTS’ FEEDBACK
The aim of this feedback form is to obtain students’ response regarding the content
of this guidebook. The information obtained will be useful in improving it.
Please respond to items 1 - 5 below based on the following 4-point scale.
1 - Strongly Disagree 2 - Disagree 3 - Agree 4 - Strongly Agree
Please circle the number.
1. This guidebook is very useful.
1 2 3 4
2. The information provided in this guidebook is accurate.
1 2 3 4
If you chose 1 or 2 for question no. 2, please provide the number of the pages(s)
that contain the inaccurate information.
3. The information provided in this guidebook is clear and easy to understand.
1 2 3 4
4. Overall, I would rate the quality of this guidebook as good.
1 2 3 4
5. I prefer to use the CD that is provided compared to this guidebook.
1 2 3 4
6. If there is any other information that you think should be included in the
guidebook, please suggest in the space below.
Please send this feedback form to School’s General Office in the 4th week of
Semester I, Academic Session 2017/2018
Top Related